JP7750348B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to be configured so that an internal lottery is held when certain lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the results of the internal lottery.

Specifically, with regard to slot machines, when medals have been bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop as a result of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707

Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the enjoyment of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention 1 is
A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a storage means for storing the specific information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
a means for executing a specific process that enables a specific event to occur by using at least the specific information stored in the storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
means for causing the specific event to occur when a result of the specific processing is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
a first state set so that the specific event is more likely to occur, and a second state set so that the specific event is less likely to occur than in the first state or so that the specific event does not occur at all;
The process for causing a state transition between the first state and the second state is set to be able to be executed in both a first game in which execution of the specific process is permitted and a second game in which execution of the specific process is restricted,
After a state transition from the second state to the first state occurs, a transition from the first state to the second state is possible;
The predetermined processing for causing a state transition between the first state and the second state is executable when the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result, and is also executable when the lottery result is a second result different from the first result.
The present invention 2 is
a game start means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player;
a game ending means for ending a game based on a player's ending operation;
A grasping means capable of grasping specific information corresponding to the number of games played from a predetermined start trigger;
a means for making it possible to execute a specific determination that enables a specific event to occur when the specific information becomes predetermined special information;
means for enabling the specific event to occur when the result of the specific determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
a first state in which the result of the determination of the specificity is likely to be the specific result, and a second state in which the result of the determination of the specificity is less likely to be the specific result than the first state or the result of the determination of the specificity is not likely to be the specific result;
a means for causing a state transition between the first state and the second state;
As games to be started by the game starting means, a first game in which a state transition between the first state and the second state may occur, and a second game in which a state transition between the first state and the second state is restricted are set,
The grasping means is capable of grasping the specific information including the first game and the second game,
After a state transition from the second state to the first state occurs, a transition from the first state to the second state is possible;
The present invention is characterized in that it comprises a means for executing a notification corresponding to the specific information during a game before the specific information becomes the special information.

This invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and the benefits to be awarded. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a winning mode. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when three bets are made. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state when two bets are made. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a bonus state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to a favorable zone. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of various transition lottery tables. 10 is a flowchart showing an AT top-up process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an additional lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a rotation effect process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an instruction monitor and a section indicator. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification display performed on the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery trigger determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process performed by a sub-side display control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery mode notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery opportunity notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special notification process. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special notification lottery table. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing examples of display effects and reel effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of the lottery mode. 10 is a flowchart showing a first BB notification process; 10 is a flowchart showing a second BB notification process; 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of the lottery mode. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the lottery trigger for the AT mode transition lottery and the transition of the lottery mode. In the first variant, (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous zone transition game, and (b) is a flowchart showing the processing for table notification. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode transition table. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. In variant example 2, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefits granted, (b) is a diagram showing a portion of the lottery table for BB state, (c1) is a flowchart showing a portion of the lottery result response processing, and (c2) is a flowchart showing a portion of the winning result response processing. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 10A is a flowchart showing the trigger adjustment process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing a part of the AT lottery mode notification process. In variant example 3, (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous zone transition game, and (b) is a flowchart showing the lottery trigger determination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special notification process in Modification 4. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a special notification lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery mode notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel control process in the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a lottery information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a random number shift process. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 10A is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous zone transition game, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the lottery trigger determination processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for displaying a hold; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the hold display. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a reserved shift. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the hold display. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the hold display. 10A is a flowchart showing the AT lottery mode notification process, and FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the notification restriction process. 10 is a flowchart showing a lottery opportunity notification process. 10 is a flowchart showing a special notification process. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a second mode notification lottery table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an example of a predicted notification lottery table. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lottery mode and the AT counter. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the lottery mode and the AT counter. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode transition lottery table in Modification Example 1. In variant example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the transition to lottery mode in various situations and whether or not various random number processes are executed. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process, (b) is a flowchart showing the random number shift process, and (c) is a diagram for explaining an overview of the lottery information storage area. 10 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing. 10 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing. 10 is a flowchart showing an AT top-up process. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table for the first AT. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table for the second AT. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 10 is a flowchart showing a specialized zone counting process. 10 is a flowchart showing an AT start process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a first specialized zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a second specialized zone. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table for the first specialized zone. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table for the second specialized zone. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing. 10 is a flowchart showing a remaining number management process. 10 is a flowchart showing a start-up effect setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first specialization process. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all the devices are stopped. 10 is a flowchart showing a second process for specialization. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a notification type table, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an overview of a first specialized zone and a second specialized zone. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the first specialized zone. 10 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the second specialized zone. A diagram to explain the difference in the number of medals won due to differences in game modes in the first specialized zone. A diagram to explain the difference in the number of medals won due to differences in game modes in the first specialized zone. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit. 10 is a flowchart showing the complete stop effect setting process in Modification 1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an excess notification lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an excess notification lottery table in Modification Example 2. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for setting the effect when all the wheels are stopped in the third modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a second specialization process in Modification 4. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo notification lottery table. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table for the first specialized zone in variant example 5. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a first specialized zone in Modification 6. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table for the first specialized zone. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a first specialized zone in Modification 7. 10 is a flowchart showing a specialized zone counting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a first specialization process. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the first specialized zone. 19 is a flowchart showing specialized zone count processing in Modification 8. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a first specialized zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for a second specialized zone. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for dealing with the number of avoidances; 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of display effects by the auxiliary display unit.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel-type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Figure 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, Figure 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Figure 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Figure 5 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installed in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 in an openable and closable manner. A pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b are provided on the housing 11's left side when viewed from the front, and bearings 14a, 14b are provided on the front door 12 at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is rotatably supported relative to the housing 11 about an opening/closing axis extending vertically between the support shafts 13a, 13b. Rotating the front door 12 allows the front open side of the housing 11 to be opened or closed. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its backside. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state can be released by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the interior of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the interior of the housing 11 is divided into two sections, upper and lower, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting the variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis coincides with the axis of rotation of the corresponding reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending approximately horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, which drives each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate individually, i.e., independently. The stepping motor is configured to rotate once by applying a drive signal (hereinafter referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 500 pulses. This excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel. Furthermore, the reel unit 31 is equipped with a reel index sensor on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to detect when the reel has rotated once. Each time the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, described below. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before that detection signal was input.

Multiple symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the direction of its long side (circumference direction). More specifically, 20 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next at a specified position, it is necessary to output 25 excitation pulses (= 500 pulses ÷ 20 symbols). Furthermore, the main control unit 101 can determine which symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, and can stop a specified symbol at a position visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, based on the number of excitation pulses output after the reel index sensor detection signal is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 20 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, numbers ranging from 0 to 19 are assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are ten types of symbols: "Bell" (e.g., the first symbol on the left reel 32L), "Replay" (e.g., the zeroth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" (e.g., the fourteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" (e.g., the second symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" (e.g., the eighth symbol on the left reel 32L), "BAR" (e.g., the ninth symbol on the left reel 32L), "White 7" (e.g., the third symbol on the left reel 32L), "Youth" (e.g., the eighteenth symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red Shell" (e.g., the fourth symbol on the left reel 32L), and "White Shell" (e.g., the nineteenth symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in Figure 6, the number and arrangement order of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is shaped so that only three of the 20 symbols on the corresponding reel are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three symbol combinations, one symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, of the visible symbols. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as shown in Figure 7, the combinations of these three symbols include, for example, the combination of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the combination of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the combination of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-sloping line L4 connecting the top symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the bottom symbol on the right reel 32R, as well as combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-sloping line L5 connecting the bottom symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 connecting the middle symbol on the left reel 32L, the top symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the top symbol on the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are straight lines when the symbols are lined up, while the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on curved lines besides the curved line L6, but we will not discuss them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated by betting medals, and some are not. When symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in the form of a predetermined number of medals as gaming media, or a bonus in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, of the above lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as the active line. More specifically, in this slot machine 10, the game may start with either three medals bet or two medals bet. When the game starts with either three or two medals bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the active line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as active lines. In the following description, the bent line L6 may be referred to as the active line ML. Also, hereinafter, a game that starts with three medals bet will be referred to as a three-bet game, a game that starts with two medals bet will be referred to as a two-bet game, and a game that starts with one medal bet will be referred to as a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

Figures 8 to 10 show the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and the benefits awarded when a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize wins that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize win through the 32nd small prize win.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(a), when the symbol corresponding to the first small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line sloping downward to the right L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved.

When the "Replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the second small win is achieved. When the second small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(b), when the symbol corresponding to the second small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in a line on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first small win described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the third minor win is achieved. When the third minor win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(c), when the symbol corresponding to the third small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a small win different from the first and second small wins described above has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the fourth small win is achieved. When the fourth small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(d), when the symbol corresponding to the fourth small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in line on the upward-sloping line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the first to third small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbol is aligned.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 5th small win is achieved. When the 5th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(e), when the symbol corresponding to the 5th small win stops on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbol stops in alignment on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the bell has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 1st to 4th small wins has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "bell" symbols line up.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 6th small win is achieved. When the 6th small win is achieved, 13 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 11(f), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth small win stops on the pay line ML, "bell" symbols stop (forming a small hill) on the bottom of the left reel 32L, the middle of the middle reel 32M, and the bottom of the right reel 32R. This allows the player to easily understand that a small win corresponding to a bell has been achieved, and also allows the player to understand, from the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbols, that a small win different from the first to fifth small wins described above has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 7th small win is achieved. When the 7th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(a), when the symbol corresponding to the seventh minor win stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops aligned on the downward-sloping line L4. This allows the player to easily understand that a minor win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML, the 8th small win is achieved. When the 8th small win is achieved, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

As shown in Figure 12(b), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th small win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops in alignment on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small win corresponding to the watermelon has been achieved, and also understand that a different small win from the 7th small win has been achieved due to the difference in the line on which the "watermelon" symbol is aligned.

The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are so-called missed combinations, which are mainly awarded when the 1st to 6th minor winning combinations are missed. When the 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are awarded, one medal is paid out in a 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in a 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd minor winning combinations are achieved when the corresponding combination of the "replay" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol or "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "replay" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "red shell" symbol, "BAR" symbol or "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the symbol combinations corresponding to the 9th to 32nd minor wins are all set so that the "bell" symbols do not stop aligned on a straight line (L1 to L5), making it easy to understand that a minor win corresponding to the bell has not been achieved.

Incidentally, in the configuration where medals are paid out based on the above-mentioned 1st to 32nd small wins, the paid out small wins are a type of bonus awarded depending on the outcome of the game. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as "out balls," and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (out balls) to the number of inserted (betted) medals may also be referred to as "out ball rate."

Winnings that grant the replay privilege, which allows you to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winnings through the 12th replay winnings. As shown in Figure 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the 1st replay through the 12th replay.

A first replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "white shell" or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbols stop in line on the center line L2. This makes it easy for the player to understand that a replay win corresponding to the replay has occurred.

A second replay win is achieved when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "BAR" or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When a symbol corresponding to a second replay win stops on the active line ML, as shown in Figure 14(a), the "BAR" symbols may stop in a line sloping to the right, L5, or as shown in Figure 14(b), the "red 7" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "BAR" symbol may stop on the active line L5, in order from left to right. When a second replay win is achieved, a beneficial bonus may be awarded to the player.

A third replay win is achieved when the "bell" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. When a symbol corresponding to a third replay win stops on the active line ML, "white 7" symbols may stop in a line on the bottom line L3 as shown in Figure 14(c), or "red 7" symbols may stop in a line on the downward-sloping right line L4 as shown in Figure 14(d). When a third replay win is achieved, a beneficial bonus may be awarded to the player.

The fourth and fifth replays are adjustment replays in the event that multiple replays result in overlapping wins.

A sixth replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "BAR," "cherry," "white shell," or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figure 12(d), when the symbols corresponding to the sixth replay win stop on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the bottom row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern where the upper row watermelon is not in the "tenpai" state. Furthermore, when a symbol corresponding to the sixth replay win stops on the active line ML, a "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the bottom row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the middle row of the middle reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the middle reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

A seventh replay wins when the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or the "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the top row of the left reel 32L and the top row of the right reel 32R, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the top row of the center reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle row of the center reel 32M), resulting in a stop pattern where the upper row watermelon is not in a tenpai state. Furthermore, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay win stops on the active line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the bottom row of the right reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the top row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a downward-right watermelon miss.

The 8th replay wins when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, the "red shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(a), when the symbol corresponding to the 8th replay win stops on the pay line ML, the "watermelon" symbols line up and stop on the center line L2.

A 9th replay win occurs when the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML. As shown in Figure 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 9th replay win stop on the pay line ML, the "replay" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, but the "replay" symbol does not stop in the middle row of the right reel 32R (instead, the "bell" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R), resulting in a stop pattern that is known as a middle row replay miss.

The 10th replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "red shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white shell" symbol, or "young man" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. The 12th replay is won when the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, or "red shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. As shown in Figures 13(c) and 13(d), when a symbol corresponding to a 10th replay win or a 12th replay win stops on the pay line ML, a "cherry" symbol stops on the bottom row of the left reel 32L. If a 10th or 12th replay win has been won, and a "cherry" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R, a "cherry" symbol will stop on the top row in the case of a 10th replay win, and a "cherry" symbol will stop on the middle or bottom row in the case of a 12th replay win, making it possible to distinguish between a 10th replay win and a 12th replay win. An 11th replay win is achieved when a 10th or 12th replay win is not possible, i.e., when a miss occurs.

State transition wins that only result in a transition in game state include the 1st BB win and the 2nd BB win.

When the "White 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White Shell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "Cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a 1st BB win is achieved. When a 1st BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st BB state. As shown in Figure 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to a 1st BB win stop on the pay line ML, the "White 7" symbols line up and stop on the center line L2.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, a second BB win occurs. When a second BB win occurs, the game state transitions to the second BB state. As shown in Figure 13(f), when the symbols corresponding to a second BB win stop on the pay line ML, a "white 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the middle row of the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol stops in the middle row of the right reel 32R.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a starting operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins to rotate.

To the right of the start lever 41 are button-shaped stop switches 42-44 that can be operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (Figure 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to the main control unit 101, which will be described later. The main control unit 101 then determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when a stop switch 42-44 has not been operated, the stop detection sensors 42a-44a output a LOW detection signal. When a stop switch 42-44 is operated, the detection signal switches from LOW to HIGH. The main control unit 101 detects this signal switch and determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated. When the main control unit 101 determines that a stop switch 42-44 has been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

In other words, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42-44 constitute stop operation means that are operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, considering that the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting gaming media.

Medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46, which serves as a passage switching means and is located on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is equipped with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47. Medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. Meanwhile, medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 through a medal discharge port 49 located at the bottom front of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals into an opening 48a in the discharge passage 48, and then pays out the medals to a medal tray 50 via the discharge passage 48. A reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent more than a predetermined amount of medals from accumulating in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals accumulate above the height at which the guide plate 52a is installed, those medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection slot 49.

A first credit insertion switch 56 is provided below and to the left of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R for inserting a predetermined number of virtual medals, which are credited as gaming media, at one time out of the specified number of medals for the game. The specified number is set depending on the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of medals for the game is set to three and the specified number is set to three, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes three virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. When the specified number is set to two and the specified number is set to two, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes two virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. When the specified number is set to three or two and the specified number is set to three, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes three virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. When the specified number is set to three or two and the specified number is set to two, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 causes two virtual medals to be inserted, provided that credits are available. Additionally, a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56, 57, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute input means for inputting gaming media. Furthermore, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit insertion switches 56, 57 merely involve the insertion of virtual medals based on stored memory. Considering this, they can also be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting gaming media. Note that this slot machine 10 does not have a credit insertion switch because it inserts one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for operation by the player than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. Therefore, it is expected that players will normally operate the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is expected that players will normally insert a specific number of coins out of the specified number to play the game.

To the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 is a performance switch 66 that is operated when a performance occurs.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and medals paid out when a prize is won. If the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out as real medals from the medal outlet 49. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored gaming media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, a remaining payout number display unit 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the BB state ends, and a payout number display unit 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display units 60-62 are made up of 7-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with LCD displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the gaming panel 25, to the right of the payout number display unit 62, is an instruction monitor 68 that includes a push order indicator that notifies the player of the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and a zone indicator that notifies the player of the operation order, thereby changing the winning rate of minor winning combinations and indicating advantageous zones that allow the player to play in an advantageous situation. The instruction monitor 68 will be explained in detail later.

The upper part of the front door 12 is provided with an upper lamp 63 that lights up and flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that provides various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is used to perform various display effects as the game progresses, and since the play using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. A display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 is provided on the back of the auxiliary display unit 65.

On the front door 12, below the gaming panel 25 and below the stop switches 42-44, there is a lower display unit 69 that displays the gaming machine model name and provides a specified display screen. The lower display unit 69 may be configured as an LCD display unit, or may be provided with operation buttons for presentation purposes, or the entire lower display unit 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses a power supply unit 91 and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch that supplies power to the main control device 101 and other components. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by hall managers and others to adjust the medal payout. In other words, hall managers and others can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is also operated to change the winning probability of the slot machine 10, in addition to resetting an error state.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls and manages the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a role ratio monitor 77 that indicates the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The role ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control unit 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is open, but is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is closed. More specifically, it is housed within the board box that houses the main control unit 101 so that the display screen of the role ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is closed, the role ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps in the display windows 26L-26R, and the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be viewed unless the front door 12 is unlocked by operating a specific key on the key cylinder 21 and opened. The role ratio monitor 77 will be explained in more detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 15 and 16.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is the calculation means. In addition to the power supply unit 91, the CPU 102 is connected via an internal bus to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and other components. The main control unit 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

Connected to the input side of the main control device 101 are various sensors, including the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a-44a that individually detect operation of each stop switch 42-44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON. Signals from these sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

In addition, a power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and other electronic devices in the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply interruption state and generates a power outage signal not only during a power outage but also when the power is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power outage monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, in this example 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example, and output a power outage signal. The power outage signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power outage signal and executes the power outage processing described below. The power outage signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to perform power outage processing.

Connected to the output side of the main control device 101 via input/output port 104 are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal path switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, the payout number display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the winning combination monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 contains ROM 105, which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, and RAM 106, which provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in ROM 105. As well as these, the CPU 102 also contains various processing circuits (not shown) required for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as various counters, such as a credit counter that counts the number of credits. ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control program.

RAM 106 is configured to receive a backup voltage from power supply 91 and retain (back up) data even after power to slot machine 10 is cut off. RAM 106 is provided with a backup area as well as memory for temporarily storing various data, a win flag storage area 106a for storing the results of the lottery, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing game statuses such as the BB state.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or other reason. When the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state it was in before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed during power outage processing (see Figure 17) when power is interrupted, and the values written to the backup area are restored during main processing when power is turned on.

The CPU 102's NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to a power outage or other reason. When power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing, which serves as a power outage flag generation process, is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 contains a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 that provides a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamp 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected to the effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the effect switch 66). The various display units 60-62, 68 may also be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

Next, we will explain the various control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. The processes performed by the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processing, which is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing, which is activated periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processing, which is activated when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game, i.e., timer interrupt processing, and the normal processing performed in the main processing.

Figure 17 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101. The CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 generates a timer interrupt, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to the backup area of RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of how to handle power outages.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or other reason, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply unit 91, and this power outage signal is input to the main control unit 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control unit 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power outage flag in the power outage flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

The power outage process first determines whether command transmission has finished. If transmission has not finished, the process ends, returns to timer interrupt processing, and ends command transmission. If command transmission has finished, the value of the stack pointer in CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of RAM 106. The output status of the output port in I/O port 104 is then cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Next, a RAM judgment value is calculated to determine whether the data in RAM 106 is normal when the power outage is resolved, and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting further RAM access. After performing the above process, an infinite loop is entered to prepare for a complete power outage that would prevent further processing. Note that, in case the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made to see if a power outage signal is being output before entering the infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not being output, this indicates that the power outage has been recovered, and writing to RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. If the power outage signal continues to be output, the process enters the infinite loop. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main processing.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer, which monitors for malfunctions. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed, which allows the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that drive the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate each reel. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors connected to the input/output port 104, such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a (see Figure 15), and to monitor whether the read results are normal. In step S108, a timer update process is performed to subtract and add values from each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to count the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out, and output the results to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as lottery result commands (described later), to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed in the credit display unit 60, remaining payout number display unit 61, payout number display unit 62, and instruction monitor 68. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60-62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved to the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt enable process is performed to enable the next timer interrupt, ending this series of timer interrupt processes.

Next, we will explain the normal processing that performs the main control related to gameplay based on the flowchart in Figure 18.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to allow the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable play. In the pre-start processing, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have completed initialization. Once initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has completed, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S212.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data stored in RAM 106 (such as random number values used in the previous game) are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

The start waiting process determines whether any replay wins were achieved in the previous game. If any replay wins were achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet, and the start waiting process ends. Specifically, for example, if a replay win is achieved in a three-bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay win is achieved in a two-bet game, a process to automatically insert two virtual medals is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed in the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay win was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals they own or inserting any medals. If no replay win was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormalities have occurred in the sensor reading results obtained in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality has occurred, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading results are normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, a determination is made as to whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Furthermore, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends immediately.

After the start waiting process is completed, step S205 determines whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the bonus state (BB state) is set to "3," and the specified numbers in game states other than the bonus state are set to "2" and "3." That is, in the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "3," and in game states other than the bonus state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals bet is "2" or "3." In other words, in game states other than the bonus state, if no medals have been bet, or if a medal has been bet but the number of medals is "1," a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals bet has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is carried out.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a bet command including information on the number of bets that resulted in a positive determination in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device, in step S206. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 of the timer interrupt processing. Upon receiving the bet command, the display control device 81 executes processing for notifications based on bet operations (for example, notifications that the game start conditions have been met, or notifications of the lottery results from the previous game), and controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processing from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, this means that a start command has been issued to start play, as the system is configured to allow play to begin when the start lever 41 is operated when a specified number of medals have been bet. In this case, in step S208, an active line setting process is performed to set the combination of lines corresponding to the number of bets as active lines. In other words, only the bent line L6 is set as an active line. In step S209, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-energized state, prohibiting bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, and the medal payout process in step S212 are executed in that order, and the system returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 19.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number between 0 and 65535, and after the CPU 102 confirms the operation of the start lever 41, it stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in RAM 106. This configuration makes it possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, thereby avoiding problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, the gaming states are broadly divided into a normal gaming state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each gaming state. In the normal gaming state, the specified number of coins to be bet is set to "3" and "2" as described above, and therefore the lottery table for the normal gaming state is set to a lottery table for a 3-bet game and a lottery table for a 2-bet game.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the gaming state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and no bonus state flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. If the current game is a three-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state for a three-bet game (Figure 20) is selected, and if the current game is a two-bet game, the lottery table for the normal gaming state for a two-bet game (Figure 21) is selected. Furthermore, this slot machine 10 has six preset winning probabilities, from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." By inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole, turning it ON, and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability the internal processing will be based on. In step S302, when the setting status is "Setting 1," the lottery table with the lowest expected medal payout value is selected, and when the setting status is "Setting 6," the lottery table with the highest expected medal payout value is selected.

Here, we will provide additional explanation about the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed by the main processing launched by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is launched after the initialization process of the RAM 106 when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, each time the start lever 41 is operated, the setting value is updated as follows: "Setting 1" → "Setting 2" → "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1." Each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, operating the start lever 41 while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned OFF is considered to confirm the setting value, and the setting value at that time is set as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Upon completion of the winning probability setting process, the display on the credit display unit 60 also terminates. The setting values set in the winning probability setting process are stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table is selected based on these stored setting values.

The lottery table will now be briefly explained. Figure 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 3-bet game. Figure 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state selected in the normal game state in a 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and is also set with a point value PV.

After selecting a lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when determining whether a role has been won or lost. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set a new judgment value DV.

Then, in step S305, a win/loss determination is made for the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV. The winning/loss determination for the winning combination is made by determining whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process is executed to set a winning flag for the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined to be positive in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 23, the seventh small winning combination flag and the eighth small winning combination flag are set in step S306. Furthermore, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 26, the second BB winning flag is set in step S306.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag indicating that the first BB has been won (first BB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (second BB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a will be reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set has ended (see S203 in the normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag, these winning flags will be reset when the corresponding winning is achieved as one of the conditions. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid across multiple games.

In addition, in step S306, when the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is achieved, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a winning combination other than 1st BB or 2nd BB is not achieved, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 25, the 1st BB winning flag will not be set. Also, if the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 11, the 1st small win flag, 9th small win flag, 10th small win flag, and 13th small win flag will be set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, and perform the lottery process using this separately prepared lottery table when the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is recommended to set the index values IV and point values PV in this separately prepared lottery table so that the first BB and second BB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65,535 in step S305, this means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and the following step S308 determines whether there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, i.e., whether there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it determines whether the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the win/loss of the hand continues. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the win/loss of the hand is judged based on this judgment value DV.

By the way, when determining whether a winning combination is achieved using the lottery table shown in Figure 20, that is, when playing a 3-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning normal lip A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 27.3 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 27.5 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 28.3 with setting 6, with the higher the setting value, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal lip B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal lip C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both approximately 1 in 26.2 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning chance eye A (probability of winning when IV = 4) is approximately 1 in 164 regardless of the setting value, the probability of winning chance eye B (probability of winning when IV = 5) is approximately 1 in 262 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning chance eye C (probability of winning when IV = 6) is approximately 1 in 16,400 regardless of the setting value, and the system is set so that chance eye B is easier to win than chance eye C, and chance eye A is easier to win than chance eye B. The probability of winning Cherry A (probability of winning when IV = 7) is approximately 1 in 107 with setting 1, approximately 1 in 104 with setting 3, and approximately 1 in 93.6 with setting 6, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV = 8) is approximately 1 in 215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 9) is approximately 1 in 13,100 regardless of the setting value, so that Cherry B is easier to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is easier to win than Cherry B. The probability of winning a common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 504 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a normal push bell 1, normal push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle normal push bell 1, middle normal push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle reverse push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse pinch bell 2, reverse push bell 1, and reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is approximately 1 in 18.4 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 107 regardless of the setting value. The probability of winning a 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is approximately 1 in 5.03 regardless of the setting value, which is set higher than the probability of winning other roles (replay, small roles, IV = 1-24). In 3-bet games, overlapping 1-coin roles (IV = 24) and 2nd BB (IV = 26) are set to not win (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In 3-bet games, the probability of not winning any role, including 1st BB, is 0. And when 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any role in 3-bet games is approximately 1 in 5.03 (for 1st BB) regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in 3-bet games, excluding the increase in 1st BB state, you can expect a decrease of approximately 1.77 medals per game (net increase minus approximately 1.77 medals).

In contrast, when using the lottery table shown in Figure 21 to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved, i.e., when playing a two-bet game in normal game mode, the probability of winning Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, Normal Lip C, Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, or Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 9) is the same as the probability when playing a three-bet game. The probability of winning the Common Bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 9.64 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be easier to win than when playing a three-bet game. The Push Order Bell (IV = 11 to 22) is set to be impossible to win in a two-bet game. The probability of winning the Watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 23) is approximately 1 in 257 regardless of the setting value, which is set to be harder to win than when playing a three-bet game. In a two-bet game, the system is set up so that a double 1-coin role (IV = 24) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 1.81 regardless of the setting value. Also, in a two-bet game, the system is set up so that the first BB (IV = 25) cannot be won, but the second BB (IV = 26) can be won, with a probability of approximately 1 in 4.95 regardless of the setting value. Even in a two-bet game, the probability of not winning any role, including the second BB, is zero. And when the second BB is won, the probability of not winning any role in a two-bet game is approximately 1 in 4.95 (for the second BB), regardless of the setting value. Incidentally, in a two-bet game, excluding the increase in the second BB, you can expect a decrease of approximately 0.64 medals per game (net increase minus approximately 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning combination has been completed. In such cases, the process proceeds to step S309, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether to execute a freeze effect that disables operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period of time.

The following step S310 performs lottery result response processing. This lottery result response processing involves processing to determine whether or not to transition the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S308, and processing to notify the player of the push order combination. This lottery result response processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing the processing of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the hand win/loss judgment. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. Commands are sent to the display control device 81 during the command output processing (step S110) of the timer interrupt processing described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of this game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in step S306. For example, if push order bell 1 is won (winning when IV = 11) and the first small combination winning flag, ninth small combination winning flag, tenth small combination winning flag, and thirteenth small combination winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the first small combination, ninth small combination, tenth small combination, and thirteenth small combination winning can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Additionally, if a watermelon is won (won when IV = 23) and the 7th small win flag and the 8th small win flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 7th small win and the 8th small win can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the first BB is set to be a winning combination only in a three-bet game, and the second BB is set to be a winning combination only in a two-bet game. Therefore, even if the first BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a two-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a first BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a first BB win is set). Also, even if the second BB win flag is set, if the game starts with a three-bet game, the stop information setting process in step S312 does not set stop symbol information that will result in a second BB win (stop symbol information that will avoid a second BB win is set).

In the following step S313, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S312, a priority setting process is executed to set their priorities. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priorities are set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the small win takes priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win will be won. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the replay win takes priority.

For example, if you have won the 1st BB (the 1st BB win flag is set and the 1st BB win has been carried over), and then you win a watermelon, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st BB win and the 7th and 8th small wins has been set, the priority will be set so that the 7th and 8th small wins take priority over the 1st BB win. Also, if you have won the 2nd BB (the 2nd BB win flag is set and the 2nd BB win has been carried over), and then you win a regular lip A, and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 2nd BB win and the 1st replay, 2nd replay, 3rd replay, and 4th replay wins has been set, the priority will be set so that each replay win takes priority over the 2nd BB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combinations are set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed, and no misses will occur. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win, and a bonus win will never be achieved.

After executing the processing of step S313, the first section display processing is executed in step S314, and then the lottery processing ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this processing will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 22.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309 and the results of the lottery result response process performed in step S310. The spin effect process will be explained in detail later. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

During the spin start process, the system checks whether a predetermined wait time (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels began spinning during the previous game. If not, the system waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the system resets the wait time for the next game and performs motor control initialization processing, which sets spin start information in the motor control storage area in RAM 106. This processing initiates the stepping motor acceleration process in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, causing each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to begin spinning. For this reason, even if a player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately begin spinning. The system then waits until each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R begins spinning at a predetermined constant speed, and the spin start process ends. Additionally, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 have been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that one of the stop switches 42-44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been issued. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to indicate which stop switch was operated to issue the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (the lower row in this embodiment) at the time the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the reel index sensor detection signal is input. In the following step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are available for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42-44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding one symbol; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding two symbols; a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding three symbols; and a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S408, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal. If they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the reel rotation. Then, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set win flag and the stop outcome of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, if a win occurs when IV = 11 to 22, i.e., if the push order bell is won (see Figures 20 and 21), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. For example, if the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the 17th, 18th, or 21st small win will be achieved if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → middle → left, and the stop information is set so that the 3rd small win will be achieved if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order middle → left → right. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

A brief explanation of the symbol arrangement on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R follows. In this slot machine 10, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing of operation of stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R with a spacing of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of operation of stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that they form a section five symbols or more apart, the player must aim at the symbol and operate stop switches 42-44 to stop the symbol on an active line.

We will explain the example of when the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order left → middle → right. In such a case, as described above, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the 17th small win, the 18th small win, or the 21st small win.

The 17th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. The 18th minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red Shell" symbol and the "White Shell" symbol. The 21st minor win symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Replay" symbol and the "Youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the spacing between symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any of the 17th, 18th, and 21st minor win symbols will stop on the active line (middle row) regardless of the timing of the operation. In this slot machine 10, when the operation is performed at a timing when multiple target symbols can be stopped, stop control is performed to stop the symbol with the fewest slip frames on the active line. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, it is possible for the fourth "red shell" symbol (2-slip) which is the 18th minor win symbol and the fifth "replay" symbol (3-slip) which is the 21st minor win symbol to stop in the middle row, but the left reel 32L is controlled to stop the fourth "red shell" symbol, which has the fewest slip frames, in the middle row. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th minor win to be achieved, the 17th and 21st minor wins will not be achieved.

If the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th small win symbol can be achieved.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the center reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. The "replay" symbols on the left reel 32L are arranged so that the spacing between each "replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the timing of operation of the center stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol stops on the top row of the center reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. These symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the distance between the "white shell" and "young man" symbols is five symbols or more. In other words, depending on the timing of operation of the right stop switch 44, the 18th minor winning symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol, may or may not be able to stop on the upper row. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is possible to stop them on the upper row, the 18th minor winning symbol will be achieved, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when it is not possible to stop them on the upper row, a so-called miss will occur.

Here, when the "Red Shell" symbol stops in the middle row of the left reel 32L and the "Replay" symbol stops in the top row of the middle reel 32M, it means that, in addition to the possibility of winning the middle push bell 1 and achieving the 18th small win as described above, it also means that it may win the middle push bell 2 and achieve the 20th small win. In other words, the 20th small win symbol on the middle push bell 2 is the same as the 18th small win symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. Furthermore, on the right reel 32R, the 18th small win symbol is the "White Shell" symbol and the "Young Man" symbol, while the 20th small win symbol is the "Red 7" symbol and the "White 7" symbol, which are different. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th and 20th small win symbols are arranged so that if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 18th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 20th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a time when the 20th small win symbol can be stopped on an active line, the 18th small win symbol cannot be stopped on an active line. Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether middle push bell 1 or middle push bell 2 has been won, even if the left reel 32L and middle reel 32M are stopped in a manner that may result in the 18th or 20th small win, it is not possible to aim for this and win.

Next, we will explain an example where the middle push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in the order of middle → left → right. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the third small win.

The "Replay" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is positioned on the middle reel 32M so that the distance between each "Replay" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "Replay" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol, which is the third minor winning symbol, is arranged so that the distance between each "bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" symbol will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the third minor winning symbols, the "watermelon" and "red shell" symbols, are arranged so that the spacing between these symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, if the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "watermelon" or "red shell" symbol will stop on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the third minor winning symbol will be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

As mentioned above, if the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42-44 are operated in a different operation sequence, depending on the operation timing, another small prize will be won, or none of the small prizes will be won and the win will be missed. Incidentally, if the common bell is won, the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, or sixth small prize will be won regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that a winning combination of symbols is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, the symbol combination formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower rows of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether a winning combination has been formed on the active line. If a winning combination has been formed, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the win flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the win flag, the slot machine 10 enters an error state and an error notification process is performed. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, bonus state processing is performed in step S414. The bonus state processing will be explained in detail later. After the bonus state processing is performed, winning result processing is performed in step S415. The winning result processing involves processing such as transitioning the game state based on the winning result. The winning result processing will be explained in detail later.

After the winning result processing is performed, the second section display processing is executed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this processing will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S417, a winning result command is set to allow the display control device 81 to grasp the winning combination for this game, and the reel control processing is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S212.

The medal payout process determines whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, this means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small win was achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the 1st replay win through the 12th replay win have been achieved. If none of the replay wins have been achieved, the medal payout process ends. If any of the replay wins have been achieved, the replay setting process is performed to change the play mode to replay mode, and the medal payout process ends. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described earlier, if it is determined that the current play mode is replay mode, the automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, medals equal to the payout number are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. Specifically, when the credit counter count has not reached its upper limit (50 medals stored), the payout number is added to the credit counter count, and the resulting value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. If the credit counter count has reached its upper limit, or if the count reaches its upper limit while adding the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. The medal payout process also involves changing the payout number displayed in the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout. If the current game state is BB, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter (described below), and the remaining payout number displayed in the remaining payout number display unit 61 is also subtracted.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S414 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 24.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether the current gaming state is the first BB state or the second BB state can be determined by the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag, which are set in the various flag storage area 106d of RAM 106 when transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the current state is not the first BB state or the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, it is determined whether the first BB win flag or the second BB win flag is set, indicating that either BB has been won. If neither BB win flag is set, the bonus state processing ends. If either BB win flag is set, proceed to step S503.

In step S503, a process is performed in which 3 is input into the MAX bet counter provided in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The MAX bet counter is used to set a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. In other words, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when 3 has been input into the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals will be inserted. In this case, since the MAX bet counter does not set the specified number of medals for the game, if the specified number of medals for the game is set to two or three, it is permissible to play a two-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57. Note that if 3 has already been input into the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the MAX bet counter is set to 2 and the slot machine 10 is started.

In the following step S504, it is determined whether a first BB win or a second BB win has occurred. If neither of the BB wins has occurred, the bonus state processing ends. If either of the BB wins has occurred, the process proceeds to step S505, where it is determined whether a first BB win has occurred.

If the first BB win has been achieved, in step S506, a process of inputting "90" into the BB counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter that determines the upper limit of the payout number in each BB state. In other words, by inputting "90" into the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB win flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, a positive judgment will be made in step S501 from the next game onwards. In the following step S509, a process of setting a first BB start command to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for making the display control device 81 aware that the first BB state is starting, and upon receiving this first BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that a first BB start effect corresponding to the start of the first BB state is performed. Furthermore, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 is able to understand that the first BB state will begin from the next game, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that an effect for the first BB state is performed from the next game.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the specified number of bets is set to 3 in step S510, and then the bonus state processing ends. The specified number of bets corresponds to the specified number of coins for the game described above. In other words, by transitioning to the first BB state, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3, and the first BB state is executed in a 3-bet game.

The initial values for the specified number of bets are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is started.

When it is determined in step S505 that a first BB win has not been achieved, it means that a second BB win has been achieved. In this case, the process proceeds to step S511, where the BB counter is entered with "90." That is, the second BB state is set to end when 90 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the second BB win flag is cleared, and in step S513, the second BB state flag is set. Then, in step S514, a second BB start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command and is a command for informing the display control device 81 that the second BB state has begun. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform a second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state, and controls the speaker 64, auxiliary display unit 65, etc. to perform an effect for the second BB state from the next game onward. The first BB start effect and the second BB start effect differ in appearance and content to the extent that they can be distinguished by the player. The effects for the first BB state and the second BB state also differ in appearance and content to the extent that they can be distinguished by the player. The processing performed by the display control device 81 when a first BB start command or a second BB start command is received will be explained in detail later.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the specified bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. In other words, the specified number of coins for the game is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is played in a 3-bet game.

If step S501 returns a positive result, indicating the first BB state or the second BB state, the process proceeds to step S515, where processing is performed during the first BB state or the second BB state. Figure 25 shows an example of a lottery table for the BB state. While this embodiment uses a common lottery table for the first BB state and the second BB state, separate lottery tables may be provided for each state, with different types of winning combinations and winning probabilities for each combination. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the normal RIP A, common bell, and overlapping 1-coin combination are all winnable. The probability of winning a normal RIP A (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is approximately 1 in 61.2, the probability of winning a common bell (the probability of winning when IV = 10) is approximately 1 in 5.96, and the probability of winning an overlapping 1-coin combination (the probability of winning when IV = 24) is approximately 1 in 1.31. Furthermore, in the first BB state or second BB state, the probability of a losing result (not winning any role) is approximately 1 in 10.14. In this case, an increase of approximately 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase of approximately plus or minus 0.00 medals), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or second BB state. In other words, although an increase in medals cannot be expected in the first BB state or second BB state, it is possible to progress through the game without losing medals.

Here, in the normal game state in a 3-bet game and the first BB state to which a 3-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase occurs when the first through sixth minor winning combinations, which result in a payout of 13 medals, are won. These combinations are the push order bell in the normal game state and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor winning combinations, assuming that stop switches 42-44 are operated in a fixed order, in the normal game state, the winning probability is approximately 1 in 9.19, while in the first BB state, the winning probability is approximately 1 in 5.96. In a 3-bet game, the first BB state is set to be more likely to result in a winning combination than the normal game state. Furthermore, in both the normal game state in a two-bet game and the second BB state to which a two-bet game can be entered, the main medal increase is the common bell, and while the probability of winning in the normal game state is approximately 1 in 9.64, in the second BB state the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 5.96, so even in a two-bet game, the second BB state is set up to make it easier to win than the normal game state.

However, as mentioned above, the first and second BB states use a lottery table in which medals may decrease with each game, so you cannot expect an increase in the number of medals you have even if you complete the first and second BB states. Conversely, it is expected that the number of medals you have will decrease as you complete the first and second BB states.

In the bonus state processing, step S515 determines whether any small wins have been achieved in the current game as a result of the lottery processing using the BB state lottery table described above and the control of each reel. If no wins have been achieved, the bonus state processing ends. If a win has been achieved, step S516 executes a process to subtract the payout amount corresponding to the win from the BB counter in the various counter area 106e described above. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction process in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the first to sixth small wins are achieved, a payout of 13 coins will be generated, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that the count is not 0 or less, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count is 0 or less, in step S518, the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is cleared. That is, if the current state is the first BB state, the first BB state flag is cleared, and if the current state is the second BB state, the second BB state flag is cleared. Then, in step S519, the MAX bet counter is entered with 2, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to be ended is set as an output target to the display control device 81. More specifically, if the first BB state is to be ended, the first BB end command is set as an output target, and if the second BB state is to be ended, the second BB end command is set as an output target. Upon receiving the first BB end command or the second BB end command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 and auxiliary display unit 65 to perform a first BB end effect or a second BB end effect. The processing performed by the display control device 81 when a first BB end command or a second BB end command is received will be explained in detail later.

Then, in step S521, the specified bet number is set to 2 and 3, and the bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, in the normal game state after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, since 2 is input into the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 inserts two virtual medals and a 2-bet game is played. In other words, when neither the first BB hit flag nor the second BB hit flag is set, the system is set to make it easier to play a 2-bet game. Incidentally, after the first BB state or the second BB state ends, 2 is input into the MAX bet counter, so operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57 does not allow a 3-bet game; instead, three medals must be inserted through the medal insertion slot 45 to play a 3-bet game.

Here, we will briefly explain the gameplay of this slot machine 10 using the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game, with reference to Figure 26.

The normal game state, in which the first BB hit flag and second BB hit flag are not set and no BB has been won, is known as the non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to 2 or 3, and both 2-bet games and 3-bet games are possible. However, if the MAX bet counter is set to 2 as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start play, it will be a 2-bet game.

In the non-internal state, in a 3-bet game, the first BB may be won but the second BB may not be won, and in a 2-bet game, the second BB may be won but the first BB may not be won. As described above, in a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the second BB can basically be won in a 2-bet game.

If a player wins the first BB or second BB but does not win in that winning game, the internal state will be one in which the first BB or second BB win is carried over (carryover state). Even in this internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (specified number of coins per game) is set to two or three coins, allowing for two-bet and three-bet games. However, if the MAX bet counter is set to three as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start play, the game will be a three-bet game.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, in the internal state where the first BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the first BB win can be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the first BB win cannot be achieved in a 2-bet game. Also, in the internal state where the second BB has been won, the stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed so that the second BB win cannot be achieved in a 3-bet game, but the second BB win can be achieved in a 2-bet game. In other words, if the first BB is won in a 3-bet game, the first BB win can be achieved by continuing with the 3-bet game, but if the first BB is won and then the game is switched to a 2-bet game, the first BB win cannot be achieved. Furthermore, if you win the second BB in a two-bet game, you can achieve the second BB win by continuing to play the two-bet game, but if you switch to a three-bet game after winning the second BB, you cannot achieve the second BB win. The first BB and second BB cannot be won twice, and you cannot win the first BB again if you have a first BB win carried over, nor can you win the second BB twice. You cannot win the second BB again if you have a second BB win carried over, nor can you win the first BB twice. In other words, if you win the first BB and play a two-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the first BB win is carried over, and if you win the second BB and play a three-bet game, you will continue playing in an internal state where the second BB win is carried over.

As described above, because the first BB win is only possible in a three-bet game and the second BB win is only possible in a two-bet game, even if a three-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a second BB win is carried over, the second BB win will not be achieved, and even if a two-bet game results in a loss (no winning combination) while a first BB win is carried over, the first BB win will not be achieved. This dramatically simplifies the role configuration and control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the internal state where a first BB win or a second BB win is carried over. For example, if a 3-bet game is configured so that a 2nd BB win can be achieved, or a 2-bet game is configured so that a 1st BB win can be achieved, and you want to continue the internal state in which the 1st BB win or 2nd BB win has been carried over, you will need to create a lottery table that will not result in a losing outcome, and for example, in the case of a combination that may result in a miss, you will need to have a different combination win when that miss occurs.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the main role for increasing medals is the common bell. In the non-internal state and the internal state, the main role for increasing medals in a two-bet game is the common bell, whereas the main role for increasing medals in a three-bet game is the push order bell. For the common bell, any of the first to sixth small roles will be won regardless of the operation sequence or timing of the stop switches 42-44, whereas for the push order bell, the winning small role differs depending on the operation sequence and timing of the stop switches 42-44. In other words, the fluctuation in medal gain or loss due to the operation sequence and timing (mainly the operation sequence) when the push order bell is won is greater in the non-internal state and the internal state in a three-bet game than in the first BB state and the second BB state. For example, by announcing the operation sequence (Figure 25) resulting in the first to sixth small wins when the push order bell is won, it is possible to switch between an AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists in winning and a non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) that does not, and create a state in which medals increase or decrease depending on whether or not the notification (assist) is given.

The basic flow of a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated is as follows: first, a two-bet game is played in the non-internal state, and the second BB is won in that two-bet game. When the second BB is won, the state switches to the internal state, the game switches to a three-bet game, and the game continues in a state in which the second BB winning cannot be realized. In this case, as described above, in the three-bet game in which the second BB winning has been carried over, the first BB is not won, nor is the second BB won, and play continues in the internal state in which the second BB winning has been carried over.

The following will explain the gameplay, assuming that the second BB win has been carried over, and utilizing notifications (push order notifications) when the push order bell is won during that game (also referred to as normal play in the following explanation).

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process performed in step S310 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 27. The lottery result response process is a process performed after the lottery process for each game has been performed, and is a process for performing a lottery for transition to an AT mode in which a push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, the process determines the number of bets for the game that will start this time. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether the game that will start this time is in one of the BB states. If the game is not in the BB state, it is determined in step S602 whether the number of bets is 3. If the game is in the BB state, it is determined in step S603 whether the number of bets is 2. As already explained, the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 in the non-internal state before the first BB or second BB is won, and in the internal state after the first BB or second BB is won, and the specified number of bets is set to 3 in the first BB state or the second BB state. The processing in steps S602 and S603 determines whether the number of bets for the current game is a specific specified number (specific set number) that is specified (set) in association with the gaming state; if the specific specified number does not exist, the lottery result response processing ends without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) from step S604 onwards.

In other words, in the non-internal state and internal state, display mode processing is executed in a 3-bet game, but display mode processing is not executed in a 2-bet game. Also, in the first BB state and second BB state, the specified bet number is set to 3, so a 2-bet game is not executed, and display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state or second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a two-bet game, the lottery for transitioning to AT mode from step S604 onwards will not be held, putting the player at a disadvantage. By doing this, the internal state is set to a three-bet game, making it easier to play regular gameplay with the second BB carried over.

If a positive judgment is made in step S602 or step S603, step S604 determines whether or not a favorable zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this slot machine 10, regarding whether or not push order notifications etc. will occur, favorable zones in which push order notifications etc. may occur and normal zones in which they will not occur are set. The favorable zone flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine whether the current game is in a favorable zone, and is set upon transition to a favorable zone and cleared upon transition to a normal zone.

If the advantageous zone flag is not set, this means that the current game is in the normal zone. In this case, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result response process is terminated.

In the advantageous zone transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery results for the current game are obtained in step S701. Then, in step S702, a advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 30, the advantageous zone transition lottery table has a transition rate to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) set according to the lottery results for each game. As also shown in FIG. 30, the triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone are normal lip A, normal lip B, normal lip C, chance eye A, chance eye B, chance eye C, cherry A, cherry B, cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon. In other words, in normal play as a 3-bet game with the second BB carried over, all possible winning results are set as triggers for the lottery to transition to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S702, processing is performed in step S703 to obtain a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is generated using a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e. This dedicated counter is updated at a predetermined interval, and step S703 obtains the most recent updated value of that counter. Then, step S704 executes the advantageous zone transition lottery, and step S705 determines whether the transition lottery has been won. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lottery table is set so that any trigger role has a 100% chance of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, if it is determined that the game result determined in step S701 is a trigger role for the transition lottery (not a losing result), it is possible to skip steps S702 to S705.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transition lottery has been won, then in step S706, a process is executed to set a favorable zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The favorable zone winning game flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the current game is a game in which the transition lottery to the favorable zone has been won. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 has been executed, the favorable zone transition lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous zone flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode, which have different probabilities of winning an additional jackpot, are set as AT modes, and the first AT mode flag and the second AT mode flag are flags that allow the CPU 102 to determine that it is an AT mode and its type, and are flags that are set when switching to AT mode. If neither AT mode flag is set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if either flag is set in step S606, AT additional jackpot processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery processing>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S801, processing is executed to determine the lottery results for the current game. Then, in step S802, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is determined by determining whether the first mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. That is, in this embodiment, the first mode and the second mode are set as lottery modes with different winning probabilities for the AT mode transition lottery, and the second mode is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the first mode. The above-mentioned first mode flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is the first mode.

If the first mode flag is set in step S802, processing is executed in step S803 to obtain a second mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. On the other hand, if the first mode flag is not set in step S802, processing is executed in step S804 to obtain a first mode transition lottery table. The second mode transition lottery table is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery to determine whether to transition from the first mode to the second mode, and the first mode transition lottery table is a table used in the AT lottery mode transition lottery to determine whether to transition from the second mode to the first mode.

As shown in FIG. 30, the second mode transition lottery table and the first mode transition lottery table have transition rates (probabilities of winning the AT lottery mode transition lottery) set according to the lottery results of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, the triggering roles for the lottery to transition from the first mode to the second mode are Normal Lip A, Normal Lip B, Normal Lip C, Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon. The lottery to transition to the second mode is basically set to increase the likelihood of winning the lottery triggered by specific roles known as rare roles, such as Chance Eye A, Chance Eye B, Chance Eye C, Cherry A, Cherry B, Cherry C, and Watermelon. For example, the lottery to transition triggered by Normal Lip A to Normal Lip C has a 1% probability of winning, while the lottery to transition triggered by Cherry A has a 10% probability of winning. In contrast, as shown in Figure 30, normal RIP A, normal RIP B, and normal RIP C are set as trigger roles for the lottery to transition from second mode to first mode, and no specific roles are set as trigger roles for the lottery to transition to first mode.

After obtaining each mode transition lottery table in step S803 or step S804, AT lottery mode transition lottery processing is executed in step S805. Then, in step S806, it is determined whether or not the AT lottery mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT lottery mode transition lottery has been won, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the first mode flag has been set.

If the first mode flag is set and the lottery for transitioning from first mode to second mode is won, processing is executed in step S808 to clear the first mode flag. This causes the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery to transition from first mode to second mode. Then, processing is executed in step S809 to set a second mode transition command. The second mode transition command is a command that notifies the display control device 81 that the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery has transitioned from first mode to second mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the second mode transition command will be explained in detail later.

If the first mode flag is not set in step S807 and the lottery for transitioning from second mode to first mode is won, processing is executed in step S810 to set the first mode flag. This causes the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery to transition from second mode to first mode. Then, processing is executed in step S811 to set a first mode transition command. The first mode transition command is a command that notifies the display control device 81 that the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery has transitioned from second mode to first mode. The processing executed by the display control device 81 upon receiving the first mode transition command will be described in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S806, or after the processing of step S809 or step S811 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether a lottery trigger flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The lottery trigger flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that a specific trigger has occurred to execute a lottery for transitioning to AT mode. In this embodiment, the specific trigger occurs when a predetermined number of games have been played since a transition to the advantageous zone has occurred; more specifically, the lottery trigger flag is set when 50 games have been played since a transition to the advantageous zone has occurred.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S812, a process is executed in step S813 to obtain a non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. If the lottery trigger flag is set, a determination is made in step S814 as to whether the first mode flag is set, and if the first mode flag is set, a process is executed in step S815 to obtain a first AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. If the first mode flag is not set, a process is executed in step S816 to obtain a second AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 30, the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table sets the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery according to the game lottery results. In contrast, the first-use AT mode transition lottery table and the second-use AT mode transition lottery table set the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the game lottery results. More specifically, the non-trigger AT mode transition lottery table sets the specific roles described above as the trigger roles for the AT mode transition lottery. For example, if the lottery result is anything other than a specific role, such as normal lip A to normal lip C, the AT mode transition lottery is not executed. Furthermore, the first-use AT mode transition lottery table offers a 10% chance of winning the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the game lottery results, while the second-use AT mode transition lottery table offers a 60% chance of winning the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the game lottery results. The table is designed to make it easier to win the AT mode transition lottery when using the second-use AT mode transition lottery table than when using the first-use AT mode transition lottery table.

In more detail about each AT mode transition lottery table, the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table executes the AT mode transition lottery using a specific combination as the trigger, as described above, while the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table execute the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the game's lottery results. The total probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery, taking into account the ratio of the lottery results for each game, is set so that the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table is the least likely to win, and the second AT mode transition lottery table is the most likely to win. However, for example, if the game's lottery result is a Cherry C, the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table has a 100% chance of winning, but the first AT mode transition lottery table and the second AT mode transition lottery table may not win. Therefore, depending on the game's lottery results, it may be easier to win using the non-triggered AT mode transition lottery table.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step S813, step S815, or step S816, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S817. Then, in step S818, a determination is made as to whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery has been won, processing is executed to set the AT mode win flag in step S819. After executing processing in step S819, processing is executed to set the AT win notification command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S820, and then this AT lottery processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S818 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S821. In step S821, it is determined whether the lottery trigger flag is set, and whether the current AT mode transition lottery was a lottery based on a specific trigger. If the AT mode transition lottery was a lottery based on a specific trigger, processing is executed to clear the lottery trigger flag in step S822, and processing is executed to set a trigger non-win flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step S823. The trigger non-win flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to determine that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won. Thereafter, processing is executed in step S824 to set a trigger non-win command to be output to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery processing is terminated. The trigger non-win command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to determine that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won. The processing executed by the display control device 81 when the trigger non-win command is received will be described in detail later. Also, if step S821 does not determine that the AT mode transition lottery is based on a specific trigger, the AT lottery processing ends.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 31. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process executed when any of the AT mode flags is set, and is a process for adding to the number of continuing games in the AT mode.

In the AT addition process, first in step S901, the lottery results for the current game are determined. Then, in step S902, a process is executed to obtain the addition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode are set, which have different probabilities of winning the bonus prize, and the second AT mode is set to have a higher probability of winning the bonus prize than the first AT mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, the bonus prize lottery table sets the bonus prize winning rate according to the game lottery results and the type of AT mode. For example, in the bonus prize lottery triggered by Cherry A, the first AT mode has a 5% probability of winning the bonus prize lottery, while the second AT mode has a 10% probability of winning the bonus prize lottery.

In step S903, an add-on lottery is executed, and in step S904, it is determined whether or not the add-on lottery has been won. If the add-on lottery is not won, the AT add-on processing is terminated. If the add-on lottery is won, in step S905, an add-on game number lottery process is executed. In the add-on game number lottery process, an add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the number of add-on games this time is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 32, the add-on game number table is set so that the number of add-on games varies depending on the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. For example, when an add-on is triggered by a normal lip A, an average of 150 games are added, while when an add-on is triggered by a cherry A, an average of 15 games are added. In other words, the number of add-on games is set to be greater when an add-on is triggered by a trigger that is less likely to win the add-on lottery.

After executing the process for drawing the number of added games in step S905, the CPU 102 executes a process in step S906 to add the current number of added games to the AT game counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The AT game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the AT mode. After executing the process in step S906, the CPU 102 executes a process in step S907 to set the added command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then ends the AT added-on process. Upon receiving the added-on command, the display control device 81 executes a process to display an added-on notification effect corresponding to the added-on on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

<Rotation effect setting process>
In this embodiment, the AT mode to be transitioned to is determined after the AT mode winning flag is set and before transitioning to the AT mode. More specifically, the determination is made in the spin effect processing at the start of reel spinning for the game in which the AT mode transition lottery has been won. The spin effect processing is a processing executed in step S401 in the reel control processing (FIG. 22), and is executed after the lottery processing (FIG. 19).

As shown in FIG. 33, in step S1001, it is determined whether the lottery trigger flag or the trigger non-winning flag is set, and whether the game is one in which an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has been held. If neither flag is set, the rotation effect process is terminated. If either flag is set, it is determined in step S1002 whether the lottery trigger flag is set, and if it is set, the lottery trigger flag is cleared in step S1003. Then, in step S1004, an AT type determination process is executed. In the AT type determination process, the current AT mode type is determined by lottery, for example, based on the set value, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased during the advantageous zone, the number of games during the advantageous zone, etc., or randomly. In the following step S1005, it is determined whether the processing result of step S1004 was the first AT mode. If the current AT mode is determined to be the first AT mode, the first AT mode flag is set in step S1006, and then in the following step S1007, the current rotation effect is set to execute the first AT notification rotation effect, and the rotation effect processing ends.

For example, as shown in Figure 47(b1), the first AT notification spin effect is set up so that after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate, as shown in Figure 47(b2), the "white 7" symbol, which is the first AT symbol combination corresponding to the first AT, temporarily stops (stands still) on a specified line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in Figure 47(b4), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R resumes. Note that the first AT notification spin effect is implemented during the inactive period after the game starts and before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective.

If the current AT mode is determined to be the second AT mode in step S1005, the second AT mode flag is set in step S1008, and then in the following step S1009, the current rotation effect is set to be the second AT notification rotation effect, after which the rotation effect processing ends.

For example, as shown in Figure 47(b1), the second AT notification spin effect is set up so that after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate, as shown in Figure 47(b3), the "BAR" symbol is temporarily stopped (stationary) on a specified line (middle line L2) as a second AT symbol combination corresponding to the second AT, and then, as shown in Figure 47(b4), the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R resumes. Note that the second AT notification spin effect is implemented during the inactive period after the game starts and before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective.

If the lottery trigger flag is not set in step S1002 and the AT mode transition lottery based on this specific trigger is not won, step S1010 sets the spin effect to execute as the spin effect for notifying a loss, and then the spin effect processing ends.

For example, as shown in Figure 47(b1), the spin effect for loss notification is set up so that after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate, without pausing either the first AT symbol combination in Figure 47(b2) or the second AT symbol combination in Figure 47(b3), the scattered symbols are temporarily displayed on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then the spin of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R resumes as shown in Figure 47(b4). Note that the spin effect for loss notification is implemented during the inactive period after the game starts and before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, a notification is issued in that game that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and the corresponding AT mode flag is set, resulting in a transition to AT mode. When a transition to AT mode occurs, a notification can be issued regarding the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the push order bell is won.

As a spin effect, at the start of the game, the first AT symbol combination is temporarily suspended on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, indicating that a transition to the first AT mode will occur, and the second AT symbol combination is temporarily suspended on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, indicating that a transition to the second AT mode will occur. In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 may be configured to notify the player that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, for example, by displaying text such as "AT Confirmed," as shown in FIG. 47(a). The notification mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 may differ depending on the type of AT mode to transition to, or may be a common notification mode regardless of the type of AT mode to transition to.

The operation order of the stop switches 42-44 is notified in steps S609-S612 of the lottery result processing (Figure 27). That is, after the AT lottery processing or AT addition processing is performed in step S607 or step S608, the push order notification processing is performed in steps S609-S612.

<Outline of push order notification>
Prior to explaining the processing for pressing order notification executed in steps S609 to S612, an overview of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and pressing order notification effect can also be referred to as, for example, pressing order navigation, sequence notification, or mode notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control unit 101, and the pressing order notification is performed by the main control unit 101. In contrast, the auxiliary display unit 65 is connected to the display control unit 81, and the pressing order notification effect is performed by the display control unit 81.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be explained with reference to Figure 34. Figure 34(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and Figure 34(b) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display mode and display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in Figure 34(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has its own light source made up of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to individually display predetermined symbols (including letters and numbers). Note that since all of the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed on all of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each display segment N1-N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and these first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" through "6." The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right corner of the area where the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are located. Therefore, the indicator monitor 68 can at least display "1" through "6," "1." through "6.", and ".".

Note that, as long as the indicator monitor 68 can individually display multiple patterns of symbols, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1-N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight, or even nine segments, is also possible. Furthermore, it is not necessary for each display segment N1-N8 to display the same color; the color displayed by each display segment N1-N8 can be changed as needed. Furthermore, it is not necessary to control the on/off of each display segment N1-N8 by turning the light source on and off; as long as the display can be individually controlled for each display segment N1-N8, the segment display can be constructed using a single backlight and LCD display. Furthermore, rather than applying a segment display to each display area, symbols can be displayed using other types of display devices, such as an LCD display, organic EL display, CRT, or dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the player of the operation sequence of the push-order combination. For example, as shown in FIG. 34(b), if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "left" → "center" → "right," the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 will light up to display "1." Furthermore, if the player achieves a winning combination advantageous to him by operating the stop switches 42-44 in the order "right" → "left" → "center," the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 will light up to display "5." In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 in accordance with the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 lights up in the game in which the start conditions are met, including notification conditions that cause a transition to the advantageous zone and the possibility of a push order notification. It also turns off when the AT mode ends and the game transitions from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone in which the operation order of the push order bell and other indicators is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner. The eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during specific zones in which the player can actually benefit from the push order notification, and turns off during normal zones that are not advantageous zones, or during non-specific zones that are advantageous zones but are not specific zones.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68, which has the first display segment N1 through the seventh display segment N7 as a push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, is located near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is located above the stop switches 42 through 44, which are operated by the player. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is not located on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the positions where the stop switches 42 through 44 are located. This prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being obscured by the hands operating the stop switches 42 through 44, and it can be said that it is located in a position that is easy for players to see. Furthermore, because it is located near the payout number display unit 62, which is easily visible to players who are playing the game in an effort to win medals, it can be said that players are less likely to miss it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED of the eighth display segment N8 on the instruction monitor 68 is set so that it is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display elements (e.g., the payout number display element 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). Therefore, even when the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display elements are both controlled to emit light (i.e., lit), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The brightness of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher brightness toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display elements (more specifically, so that it is twice as bright as the surrounding display elements). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, reducing the likelihood of missing it when it is lit.

Next, the push order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained with reference to Figure 35. Here, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using the example of a case where the push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left.

As shown in Figure 35(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42-44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (in the illustration, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Furthermore, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning combination for this game and that the first stop switch that should be operated is the middle stop switch 43. Furthermore, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3, indicating that the next stop switch that should be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch that should be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When a player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in Figure 35 (b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in Figure 35 (c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed larger. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

Explaining the timing of the push order notification, the notification is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42-44, from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R begins, through an acceleration period, and up to a constant speed rotation. By configuring the notification to be executed before the operation of the stop switches 42-44 becomes effective, it is possible to recognize the operation order of the stop switches 42-44 before operating them as desired, allowing the game to proceed at a good tempo.

The following explains the process for notifying the button press order in steps S609 to S612.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game was a push order bell win. If the push order bell win was a win, in step S610 it is determined whether the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If either AT mode flag is set, in step S611, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so that push order notifications corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are issued, depending on the type of push order bell this time. Then, in step S612, a push order notification command containing information on the operation sequence corresponding to the first to sixth small wins is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this push order notification process is terminated. Upon receiving this push order notification command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that push order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth small wins are issued.

If the push order bell is not won in step S609, or if none of the AT mode flags are set in step S610, the lottery result response processing ends.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result response process performed in step S415 of the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 36. In the winning result response process, processing is performed to start or end the AT mode depending on the game result.

First, in step S1101, it is determined whether either the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and a determination is made as to whether the game to be started is in one of the BB states. If it is not in the BB state, in step S1102 it is determined whether the number of bets is 3. If it is in the BB state, in step S1103 it is determined whether the number of bets is 2. In other words, the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 corresponds to the processing of steps S601 to S603 above, and is processing to determine whether the number is a specific specified number specified in association with the game state. If it is not the specific specified number, the winning result response processing ends without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) from step S1104 onwards.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1102 or step S1103 and the number of bets is the specified number, the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether the AT mode hit flag is set. An AT mode hit flag is set when the AT mode hit flag is set at the start of the current game. In this case, a process is executed in step S1105 to clear the AT mode hit flag, and then a process is executed in step S1106 to input "50" into the AT game counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The AT game counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games remaining in the AT mode, and is decremented by one each time a game is played in the AT mode. In other words, while the first AT mode and the second AT mode have different additional hit rates, the initial number of games set at the time of transition is the same.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1104, or after executing the processing of step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, it is determined whether any of the AT mode flags are set. If any of the AT mode flags are set, the AT game counter is decremented by 1 in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, it is determined whether the AT game counter has reached 0. If it has reached 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1110. Then, in step S1111, an AT mode end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT mode end flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the AT mode has ended. Then, in step S1112, an AT end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and the winning result response processing is terminated. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the AT end command will be described in detail later. If none of the AT mode flags are set in step S1107, or if the AT game counter is not 0 in step S1109, the winning result response processing ends.

<Management of advantageous zones>
Next, we will explain the first section display process and the second section display process, which are used to control the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transition to a favorable section, and end a favorable section.

<First section display process>
First, the first section display process will be described with reference to Fig. 37. The first section display process is a process carried out in step S314 of the lottery process (Fig. 19), and is carried out after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode, etc. (lottery result response process) is carried out based on the lottery result.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8, which serves as a zone indicator, is currently displayed, or more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit. As already explained, when the eighth display segment N8 is currently lit, it indicates that the advantageous zone is a specific zone in which at least the notification conditions for a push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1201 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is currently off, the process proceeds to step S1202.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous zone flag has not been set, in step S1203, it is determined whether or not an advantageous zone winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to identify that game as a winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag has been set, in step S1204, processing is executed to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. Then, in step S1205, processing is executed to set the advantageous zone flag.

In step S1206, processing is performed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone, or more specifically, to start measuring the advantageous zone game number AG in the various counter areas 106e. The advantageous zone game number AG corresponds to a means for determining the number of games played in the advantageous zone. Then, in step S1207, processing for advantageous zone transition games is executed. In the advantageous zone transition game processing, the advantageous zone to transition to is set, for example, by setting the ceiling game number for AT mode.

After executing the processing for the advantageous zone transition game in step S1207, or if it is determined in step S1202 that the advantageous zone flag is set, or if it is determined in step S1203 that the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, it is determined whether any of the AT mode flags are set and the display start conditions for the zone display are met. If any of the AT mode flags are set, in step S1209, the display of the zone display is started by lighting up the eighth display segment N8.

If it is determined in step S1201 that the eighth display segment N8 is currently being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1210, processing is executed to continue display during the favorable section. Specifically, in step S1210, processing is executed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 remains lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not executed in this first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1208 that none of the AT mode flags are set, the process proceeds to step S1211. In step S1211, a process is executed to add 1 to the first role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which no push order notification occurs, i.e., the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

Furthermore, after executing the display start process of the section indicator in step S1209 and the display continuation process in step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1212. In step S1212, the process adds 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games at which a push order notification can be generated, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the processing of step S1211 or step S1212, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1213. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the value of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games played). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games played. Then, in step S1214, a process is executed to display the calculation result of step S1213 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the winning combination monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment displays consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the winning combination monitor 77 has the following 7-segment displays: a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e. Like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, the display segments in the first display unit 77a through the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs. By controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows each winning combination monitor 77 to individually display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers), and in particular, the winning combination monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1214, the result of the calculation process in step S1213 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a-77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and with four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the percentage of the total number of games in which a push order notification may occur. After the process of step S1214 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

Note that the calculation process in step S1213 may involve rounding off numbers to the fifth decimal point before controlling the display of the winning ratio monitor 77. Furthermore, since the first display unit 77a of the winning ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0," the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It may also be desirable to have a decimal point displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 38. As already explained, the second section display process is a process performed in step S416 of the reel control process, and is performed after medal payout (payout determination process) and transition of the game state based on the winning result (winning result response process) have been performed at the end of one game.

In step S1301, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1302, a process is executed to count the number of games in the advantageous zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. After the process in step S1302 is executed, in step S1303, a process is executed to update the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter area 106e.

In the MY update process of step S1303, provided that the result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of coins inserted (number of coins bet) is subtracted from the number of coins paid out, and the result of this subtraction is added to the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY, thereby updating the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY.

After executing the MY update process in step S1303, a remaining game count management process is executed in step S1304, followed by a remaining coin management process in the following step S1305. The remaining game count management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous zone will reach its upper limit (1,500 games) with the current remaining number of games based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining game count management process, for example, determines whether the sum of the advantageous zone game count AG (the number of games played in the advantageous zone) and the AT game counter (the number of games remaining in AT mode) is greater than the upper limit of games in the advantageous zone. If such a situation exists, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying that situation. The remaining coin management process is a process for managing whether the advantageous zone will reach its upper limit increase (2,400 coins) with the current remaining number of games based on the number of games remaining in AT mode, etc. The remaining payout number management process determines whether the sum of the expected increase calculated from the AT game counter and the average increase per game in AT mode, and the current increase/decrease in the advantageous zone MY, is greater than the increase/decrease in the advantageous zone. If this is the case, a second excess flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d as a flag to identify this situation.

In the following step S1306, a process is executed to set the advantageous zone game command as an output target to the display control device 81. The advantageous zone game command contains the contents of the processing results of steps S1302 to S1305 above. In other words, the advantageous zone game command contains information on the advantageous zone game count AG, information on the MY counter, and information on the presence or absence of the first exceedance flag and second exceedance flag. The processing on the display control device 81 side that receives the advantageous zone game command will be explained in detail later.

In the following step S1307, a lottery trigger determination process is executed. The lottery trigger determination process is a process for determining whether a specific trigger for executing an AT mode transition lottery has occurred.

<Lottery trigger determination process>
In the lottery trigger determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 39, in step S1401, a process is executed to determine whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is a predetermined number. More specifically, a process is executed to determine whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is 50. If it is not 50, the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If it is 50, the process proceeds to step S1402, and a process is executed to set the lottery trigger flag. By executing this process, an AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery trigger flag will be executed in the lottery result response process for the next game.

In the following step S1403, a process is executed to set the lottery trigger command as an output target to the display control device 81. The process executed by the display control device 81 upon receiving the lottery trigger command will be described in detail later. After the process of step S1403 is executed, the lottery trigger determination process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the second interval display process, after executing the lottery trigger determination process in step S1307, it is determined in step S1308 whether the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of coins in the advantageous interval that has increased or decreased MY has reached the upper limit of 2400. If either of these forced termination conditions is met, in step S1309, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG and the number of coins in the advantageous interval that has increased or decreased MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1310, a process is performed to terminate the display of the eighth display segment N8 as an interval indicator. Then, in step S1311, various parameters and information such as flags and counters within the advantageous interval are initialized, and the second interval display process is terminated.

More specifically, the initialization process for advantageous zone information in step S1311 is a process that resets flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous zone, as well as flags and counters set during the current advantageous zone, to their initial values. For example, if advantageous zone flags, AT mode win flags, various AT mode flags, etc. are set and not cleared, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if the advantageous zone game count AG, advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, counters for the number of AT mode continued games, etc. are greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters that affect the performance of push order notifications for advantageous zones that are advantageous states using push order notifications, and is a process that clears RAM for such variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has not reached the upper limit and the number of coins increased or decreased in the advantageous zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S1312, where it determines whether the AT mode end flag is set. If the AT mode end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1309, where processing for ending the advantageous zone is executed. If the AT mode end flag is not set, it determines in step S1313 whether the trigger non-win flag is set. If the trigger non-win flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1309, where processing for ending the advantageous zone is executed.

In other words, in this embodiment, after transitioning to the advantageous zone, a lottery to transition to AT mode is held, and if the transition lottery is won, the player transitions to AT mode. Then, when AT mode ends, the advantageous zone also ends along with the end of the AT mode. Furthermore, when the number of games played after transitioning to the advantageous zone reaches 50, a lottery to transition to AT mode based on a specific trigger is held, and the advantageous zone also ends if the player does not win the AT mode transition lottery.

On the other hand, if neither the AT mode end flag nor the trigger non-winning flag is set, the second zone display process will end without ending the advantageous zone.

As already explained, in this embodiment, processing related to instruction functions such as the AT mode transition lottery, the additional lottery, and the mode transition lottery for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in games in which a specific prescribed number of bets set according to the gaming state is made, but is not executed in games in which bets other than the specific prescribed number are made. More specifically, in states before transition to the first BB state or the second BB state, such as the non-internal state or the internal state, both 2-bet games and 3-bet games are possible, but because the specific prescribed number is set to 3, in the non-internal state or the internal state, processing related to the instruction function is executed in 3-bet games but not in 2-bet games. In contrast, in the first BB state or the second BB state, only 3-bet games are possible, but because the specific prescribed number is set to 2, processing related to the instruction function is not executed in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, processing related to the instruction function is executed in 3-bet games in the non-internal state or the internal state, but processing related to the instruction function is not executed in 2-bet games or in each BB state in the non-internal state or the internal state.

In contrast, the specific trigger for the AT mode transition lottery is determined by the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, which is counted regardless of the number of bets or the state, as described above, and the lottery trigger flag is set when the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches 50. More specifically, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is counted not only by the number of games in three-bet games in non-internal states and internal states, but also by the number of games in two-bet games and each BB state in non-internal states and internal states.

For example, by playing a two-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, no processing related to the instruction function is performed, but it is possible to set the lottery trigger flag. In this case, the first specific specified number of plays after the lottery trigger flag is set will result in an AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery trigger flag. In other words, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger will be executed in a game that switches from a two-bet game to a three-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state.

More specifically, as part of the processing related to the instruction function, a transition to the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery occurs in a non-internal state or a three-bet game in an internal state, but a transition to the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery does not occur in a two-bet game or in each BB state in a non-internal state or an internal state. In contrast, a specific trigger occurs 50 games after transition to the advantageous zone, regardless of the game state or number of bets. Therefore, for example, by playing a three-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is executed, and after successfully transitioning the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery from the first mode to the second mode, it is possible to avoid executing the AT lottery mode transition lottery process again by playing a two-bet game until the specific trigger occurs. This makes it possible to generate a specific trigger while remaining in the second mode, and then by switching to a three-bet game, it is possible to realize a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is entered using the second AT mode transition lottery table with the higher probability.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned innovative game can be realized by utilizing the relationship between whether or not processing related to the instruction function defined by the specific specified number is executed and the specific trigger that occurs regardless of the specific specified number. Below, we will explain the presentation processing required to realize the above-mentioned game.

<Performance setting processing>
The effect setting process executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 40. The effect setting process is initiated by the CPU 181 at predetermined intervals (for example, every 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1502, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. RAM 183 is provided with a command storage area, which is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read commands from previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 has been executed, step S1503 determines whether the newly received command is a bet command. A bet command is a command output from the main control device 101 in response to a bet operation, such as a bet command set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a bet command, step S1504 executes bet effect setting processing to set effects based on the current bet operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1503, or after the processing of step S1504 has been executed, in step S1505 it is determined whether the newly received command was a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery processing, as well as the first mode transition command, second mode transition command, AT win notification command, trigger non-win command, additional command, push order notification command, etc. set in the lottery result response processing (Figure 27). If it is one of these start commands, in step S1506 the start effect setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1505, or after the processing of step S1506 has been executed, step S1507 determines whether the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. A command at the time of each stop operation is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation being performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (Figure 22). If the stop command is a stop command at the time of each stop operation, step S1508 executes a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation to set effects based on the current stop operation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1507, or after the processing of step S1508 has been executed, step S1509 determines whether the newly received command is an all-stop command. An all-stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. It includes the winning result command set in step S417 of the reel control processing (FIG. 22), as well as the first BB start command, second BB start command, first BB end command, second BB end command, AT end command, advantageous zone game command, lottery trigger command, etc., which are set in the bonus state processing (FIG. 24), winning result response processing (FIG. 36), and second zone display processing (FIG. 38). If it is one of these all-stop commands, step S1510 executes the all-stop effect setting processing.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1509, or after the processing of step S1510 has been performed, other processing is performed in step S1511, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1511, the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that the various effects set in each of the above effect setting processes are executed at the corresponding timing. In addition, in step S1511, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when betting, starting, or stopping (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as effect switch detection sensors), settings for error notifications, etc.

The following explains the start-time effect setting process and the all-stop effect setting process.

<Start-up performance setting process>
The start-time effect setting process of step S1506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether the lottery result for the game to be started this time is a press order role win (push order bell win). If a press order role win is determined, in step S1602 it is determined whether a press order notification command has been received. If a press order notification command has been received, in step S1603 settings are executed so that the press order notification effects corresponding to the first small role win through the sixth small role win are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64.

If step S1601 determines that the current game's lottery result is not a push-order role win, step S1604 determines whether the current game's lottery result is a specific role win. As previously explained, a specific role is a so-called rare role that is unlikely to appear (become a win) as a lottery result for each game. In this embodiment, Chance Eye A to Chance Eye C, Cherry A to Cherry C, and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in Figure 30, even if a specific trigger does not occur, these lottery results may trigger an AT mode transition lottery. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 33, the AT mode additional lottery triggered by these lottery results is set to result in an additional win more easily than lottery results other than the specific role win. If the current game's lottery result is a specific role win, step S1605 executes the specific role notification process. The specific role notification process executes settings to ensure that the result of the current game's lottery is one of the above specific roles, and a specific role notification is made on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. For example, as shown in Figure 48(b), the specific role notification is set up so that three exclamation mark characters are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1602 or step S1604, or after executing the processing of step S1603 or step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether an add-on command has been received. If an add-on command has been received, the process executes the process of setting the add-on effect in step S1607. In the process of setting the add-on effect, an add-on effect is executed in which the number of games added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a notification corresponding to the addition of the number of games remaining in the AT mode. Note that the form of the add-on effect is not limited to a form executed in the game in which the add-on is executed, and may include, for example, a form in which the number of games added is notified a predetermined number of times after the game in which the add-on is executed, or, for example, a so-called post-add-on effect may be configured in which an add-on effect is executed when the number of games remaining in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining).

If a negative judgment is made in step S1606, or after the processing of step S1607 is executed, the AT lottery mode notification processing is executed in step S1608. As already explained, in this embodiment, the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery are set to a first mode, which makes it harder to win the AT mode transition lottery, and a second mode, which makes it easier to win than the first mode. In this embodiment, a special notification may be executed to indicate whether the player is in the first mode or the second mode, and the AT lottery mode notification processing is processing for setting the execution conditions for the special notification.

<AT lottery mode notification processing>
In the AT lottery mode notification process, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 42, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a first mode transition command has been received as the current start command. If a first mode transition command has been received, in step S1702, a process is executed to set a first flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The first flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine that the AT lottery mode is the first mode, which is on the low probability side.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether a second mode transition command has been received as the current start command. If a second mode transition command has been received, the processing of clearing the first flag described above is executed in step S1704.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1703, or after the processing of step S1704 is executed, in step S1705 it is determined whether a trigger non-winning command has been received as the current start command. As already explained, the trigger non-winning command is a command output from the main control unit 101 when a non-winning event occurs in the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger. If a trigger non-winning command has been received, in step S1706, a process is executed to increment the trigger skip counter provided in the various counter area 183b by 1. The trigger skip counter is a counter that allows the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of consecutive times that a non-winning event occurs in the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger. The process for executing the special notification will be explained in detail later, but in this embodiment, a special notification can be executed in the second mode depending on the value of the trigger skip counter.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 is executed, in step S1707 it is determined whether an AT winning notification command has been received as the current start command. If an AT winning notification command has been received, in step S1708 the above-mentioned trigger skip counter is cleared to 0, and then the AT lottery mode notification processing is terminated. Also, if an AT winning notification command has not been received in step S1707, the AT lottery mode notification processing is terminated as is.

Returning to the explanation of the start-up effect setting process, after executing the AT lottery mode notification process in step S1608, it is determined in step S1609 whether an AT win notification command or a trigger non-win command has been received as the current start-up command. If an AT win notification command or trigger non-win command has been received, it is highly likely that an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has been held; more specifically, if the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger or the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific winning combination has been won (AT win notification command), or if the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won (trigger non-win command). In this embodiment, in these cases, a result notification effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify the result of the AT mode transition lottery.

In the result notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a battle between a main character and an enemy character is conducted, and if the main character wins the battle, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the main character loses the battle, it is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. More specifically, when the result notification effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 52(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 first displays text such as "Battle Begins!!" and an animation of the enemy character as a start effect of the battle, as shown in FIG. 52(b1). Then, after an attack effect showing the main character attacking as shown in FIG. 52(b1) and an attack effect showing the enemy character attacking as shown in FIG. 52(b2), the result notification effect ends with either a victory effect in which the main character wins (FIG. 52(c1)) or a defeat effect in which the main character is defeated (FIG. 52(c2)). In this case, if the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the result notification effect results in a winning result, a winning effect will be executed, and if the AT mode transition lottery results in a non-winning result, a losing effect will be executed.

If an AT win notification command or a trigger non-win command is received in step S1609, processing to execute the above-mentioned result notification effect is performed in steps S1610 to S1613. That is, in step S1610, as the start processing of the result notification effect, effect setting processing is performed so that the start effect of Figure 52(a) is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. More specifically, effect data for the start effect is obtained from the effect table stored in the various table storage area 182a of ROM 182, and the effect data is set so that the effect based on such effect data is executed on the corresponding notification means (auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64) at the corresponding timing. In this case, the display control device 81 reads the effect data at the corresponding timing in other processing of step S1511 in the effect setting processing (Figure 40), and controls the corresponding notification means so that the effect is executed using the read data. In this way, the effect set in the various effect setting processing is executed at the desired timing. The process for setting and executing these effects is similar for other effects, so the following explanation will generally omit the details.

As already explained, when an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is held, the spin effect processing (Fig. 33) is set to perform a spin effect while the stop switches 42 to 44 are disabled. In this case, when a result notification effect for an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is executed, the spin effect is set to perform a victory effect or defeat effect from the start effect before the pause corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery or the type of AT mode (Fig. 47(b1)) occurs (Fig. 47(b2) or Fig. 47(b3)). Then, the victory effect on the result notification effect side is performed, and after a pause corresponding to the type of AT mode on the spin effect side is performed, the AT win notification effect of Fig. 47(a) is performed.

In contrast, when a result notification effect based on a specific role is performed, the specific role notification effect is performed before the result notification effect (step S1605). In this case, for example, the timing of each effect may be set so that the result notification effect is performed as a continuous effect executed across multiple games, or the result notification effect may be set to start after the specific role notification effect in the game in which the specific role is won, and end in that game.

After executing the processing of step S1610, in step S1611, it is determined whether the currently received command is an AT winning notification command, and if it is, in step S1612, a display setting process is executed so that the current result notification display will ultimately end as a winning display. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to select an attacking display than an attacked display.

If, in step S1611, the command currently received is not an AT win notification command but a trigger non-win command, then in step S1613, a presentation setting process is executed to ensure that the current result notification presentation ultimately ends with a defeat presentation. In this case, it is preferable to make the attacked presentation more likely to be selected than the attack presentation.

If no command is received in step S1609, or after executing the processing of step S1612 or step S1613, the process proceeds to step S1614. In step S1614, the first BB notification process is executed. This process is for creating game effects using the first BB state or the second BB state, and will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1615, other start-time effect setting processes are executed, and then this start-time effect setting process ends. In step S1615, processes are executed, for example, to set effects suggesting the lottery results in response to the start of the game, or to turn off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process of step S1510 will be described with reference to Fig. 43. As already explained, the all-stop effect setting process is a process for setting effects when a newly received command is a all-stop command such as a winning result command, an AT end command, an advantageous zone game command, or a lottery trigger command.

In step S1801, it is determined whether an AT end command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, in step S1802, effect settings are executed to perform an AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. For example, as shown in Figure 48 (a), the AT end effect displays the number of games continued in the current AT mode and the number of medals won in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1801, step S1803 determines whether a favorable zone game command has been received. If a favorable zone game command has been received, step S1804 determines whether the current display mode is AT mode, and if it is not AT mode, that is, if it is in a favorable zone and has not yet transitioned to AT mode, proceed to step S1805. In step S1805, lottery trigger notification processing is executed, and in the following step S1806, special notification processing is executed.

After executing the processing of step S1802 or step S1806, if a negative judgment is made in step S1803 or a positive judgment is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, a second BB notification process is executed. This process is for creating game effects using the first BB state or the second BB state, and will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1808, other all-stop effect setting process is executed, and then the all-stop effect setting process ends. In step S1808, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, or a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet during a replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

<Lottery opportunity notification processing>
In the lottery trigger notification process of step S1805, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S1901, effect settings are executed to display a game count notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. The game count notification effect is an effect for notifying the number of games played from the transition to the advantageous zone until a specific trigger occurs. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(a), for example, the number of games until the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger caused by the lottery trigger flag being set is notified based on the information on the advantageous zone game count AG in the currently received advantageous zone game command, such as "50 games left until chance" (FIG. 49(a) shows that the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger will be held after 50 games). In this case, for example, as the game progresses in the advantageous zone, the number of games notified in the game count notification effect is also subtracted and updated with each game (see FIG. 49(b)). Then, when the number of games until a specific trigger occurs becomes 0 and the specific trigger occurs, the number of games announced in the game number announcement display will also become 0 (displayed as "0 games left until chance"), as shown in Figure 50 (a).

In the following step S1902, it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is a three-bet game. If it is a three-bet game, it is determined in step S1903 whether the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state. If it is determined in step S1902 that the game is not a three-bet game, or if it is in the first BB state or the second BB state in step S1903, this means that the game is in a restricted state (restricted state, restricted play) in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted. In this case, in step S1904, an effect setting is executed to display a mode transition restriction notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64. The mode transition restriction notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that the player is in the above-mentioned restricted state. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(a), the player is notified that the game is in the restricted state by displaying the word "HOLD!!" on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1903 or after the processing of step S1904 is executed, step S1905 determines whether a lottery trigger command has been received. If a lottery trigger command has not been received, the lottery trigger notification processing is terminated. If a lottery trigger command has been received, step S1906 determines whether the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game. If it is a 3-bet game, step S1907 determines whether the game is in the first BB state or the second BB state.

When a game is a three-bet game and is not in the first BB state or the second BB state, it means that the game is being played with a specific prescribed number of bets in a non-internal state or an internal state, and the game is in an allowable state (allowed play) in which execution of processing related to the instruction function is allowed. In other words, it is when a lottery trigger command is received in this allowable state. In this case, in step S1908, effect settings are executed to perform a lottery preview effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then the lottery trigger notification process is terminated. The lottery preview effect is an effect that notifies the player that a lottery trigger command has been received in the allowable state, i.e., that the next game will also be played in the allowable state, and an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger will be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the main character is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and text such as "Next time, it's battle!!" is displayed.

In contrast, when a lottery trigger command is received and the game is a two-bet game, or the first BB state or second BB state, it means that the game is being played with a bet other than the specific specified number, and the game is in a restricted state in which execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted. In other words, the lottery trigger command is received in this restricted state. In this case, in step S1909, effect settings are executed to perform a standby effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then the lottery trigger notification process is terminated. The standby effect is an effect that notifies the player that the lottery trigger command has been received in the restricted state described above, that is, that by switching from the restricted state to the permissive state and playing from the next game onwards, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger will be executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the main character is displayed on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, and text such as "Defeat the enemy with a MAXBET!!" is displayed.

Note that MAXBET here refers to the first credit insertion switch 56. As already explained, operating the first credit insertion switch 56 places a bet corresponding to the MAX BET counter; more specifically, a bet of 2 is set in the non-internal state, a bet of 3 is set in the internal state, and a bet of 3 is set in the first BB state and second BB state. In other words, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, a game may be played with a bet based on a specific specified number (internal state and each BB state), or a game may not be played with a bet based on a specific specified number (non-internal state).

As shown in Figure 50 (b), when a lottery trigger command is received and a specific trigger occurs (when the lottery trigger flag is set), a lottery preview effect or a standby effect is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64. If the next game is played as a two-bet game while these lottery preview effects or standby effects are being executed, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger will not be executed in the game played as a two-bet game. In this case, the standby effect will be executed again.

In contrast, if the next game is played as a 3-bet game while a lottery preview effect or standby effect is being executed, and the game is not in the first BB state or second BB state, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger will be executed, and a result notification effect (battle effect) will be executed based on an AT win notification command or a trigger non-win command.

<Special notification processing>
Next, the special notification process executed in step S1806 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, a process is executed to determine the value of the trigger skip counter. As already explained, the trigger skip counter is a counter that indicates the consecutive number of times that a player has not won the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger. In the following step S2002, it is determined whether the first flag is set. If the first flag is set and the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is the first mode, which has a low probability, in step S2003, a process is executed to acquire a first special notification lottery table from the various table storage area 182a. Also, if the first flag is not set in step S2002 and the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is the second mode, which has a high probability, in step S2004, a process is executed to acquire a second special notification lottery table from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S2005, a special notification lottery process is executed using the special notification lottery table acquired in step S2003 or step S2004. The special notification lottery process is a process that determines by lottery whether or not to execute a special notification as a suggestion for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery.

When comparing the first special notification lottery table (Figure 46(a)) and the second special notification lottery table (Figure 46(b)), the special notification lottery using the second special notification lottery table is set up to make it easier for a special notification to occur. In other words, the special notification is an effect that suggests that you are in the second mode.

In addition, the first special notification lottery table and the second special notification lottery table are set so that the occurrence rate of a special notification varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process and the value of the trigger pass counter. More specifically, the higher the setting value and the higher the ball payout rate, the higher the occurrence rate of a special notification even for the same trigger pass counter value, and the higher the value of the trigger pass counter even for the same setting value, the higher the occurrence rate of a special notification.

After the special notification lottery process is executed in step S2005, a determination is made in step S2006 as to whether or not the special notification lottery has been won. If the special notification lottery has been won, then in step S2007, effect settings are executed to display a special notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64, and then the special notification process is terminated. If the special notification lottery has not been won, the special notification process is terminated. For example, as shown in Figure 49 (b) and Figure 51 (a), an effect is set in which a flame burns behind the main character on the auxiliary display unit 65, showing the main character becoming more and more motivated.

<Game flow>
Next, the basic flow of the game will be described with reference to the timing chart in Fig. 53. Note that Fig. 53 will be described assuming a game in an internal state where the second BB win has been carried over.

As shown in Figure 53, when a 3-bet game is played in the above internal state, and a transition to the advantageous zone occurs at timing t1 after a favorable zone transition lottery, counting begins for the number of games until the lottery trigger flag is set, i.e., the number of games until a specific trigger occurs. Because play in a 3-bet game in the internal state is played with a specific specified number of games, the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed as described above, and a transition to the advantageous zone also occurs. In addition, an AT mode transition lottery can also be executed after transition to the advantageous zone, and a transition lottery (mode transition lottery) for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is also executed.

For example, at time t2, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery transitions to the second mode, and at time t3, it transitions to the first mode. However, because these lottery modes affect the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger, even if a mode transition occurs at times t2 or t3 before the specific trigger, an AT mode transition lottery using that mode information will not be executed. When the number of games after the transition to the advantageous zone reaches 50 at time t4, a specific trigger has occurred, and the lottery trigger flag is set. Then, in the next game, an AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed. Note that in the figure, both the game in which the specific trigger occurs and the game in which the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed are shown as being at time t4, but in reality, there is a one-game delay as described above.

As described above, a transition to first mode occurs at time t3, and first mode is maintained until time t4. Therefore, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger at time t4 is executed in first mode, which has a lower probability. If the AT mode transition lottery at time t4 is not won, the trigger non-win flag is set, and the advantageous zone for that game ends (zone display second process).

At time t5, the game transitions to the advantageous zone, and counting of the number of games until a specific trigger occurs begins. At time t6, the game transitions to second mode. If the specific trigger occurs at time t7 while maintaining the lottery mode (without transitioning to first mode), an AT mode transition lottery is executed in the second mode, which has a higher probability of winning. If the AT mode transition lottery is successful, the display mode transitions to AT mode, and the advantageous zone also ends when the AT mode ends at time t8 (second zone display process).

If the game transitions to the advantageous zone at time t9, and then switches from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game at time t10, the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted in the 2-bet game, and therefore the execution of the mode transition lottery is also restricted. This means that the first mode, which was in effect before the switch to the 2-bet game, will be maintained.

However, since the number of games played until the specific trigger occurs is counted regardless of whether the number of bets meets the specific required number, the specific trigger occurs at t11, 50 games after t9, and the lottery trigger flag is set. On the other hand, since the AT mode transition lottery is a command function process, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not executed in a 2-bet game, even if the lottery trigger flag is set. Then, by switching to a 3-bet game at t12, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed. The AT mode transition lottery at t12 is executed in the first mode, which has a lower probability. The illustration shows that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, and the advantageous period also ends at t12.

If the game moves to a favorable zone at time t13, transitions from first mode to second mode at time t14, and then switches from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game at time t15, the execution of the mode transition lottery will be restricted as described above. Therefore, the second mode before the switch to the 2-bet game will be maintained. As described above, the count of the number of games until the specific trigger occurs continues even in the 2-bet game, so at time t16, the specific trigger occurs and the lottery trigger flag is set. Then, by switching to a 3-bet game at time t17, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed, and this AT mode transition lottery will be executed in the second mode, which has the higher probability. The diagram shows that the AT mode transition lottery was won, and the AT mode will start at time t17.

In this way, in this embodiment, a first mode on the low probability side and a second mode on the high probability side are provided as lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, and the transition to the lottery mode and the AT mode transition lottery are executed in a game with a bet number based on a specific specified number, and the specific trigger occurs regardless of whether the number of bets is the specific specified number.As a result, it is possible to generate a specific trigger while maintaining the second mode on the high probability side, making it possible to realize innovative gameplay that utilizes such a specific specified number.

In this case, as described above, the player can predict whether the lottery mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the occurrence rate of the special notification. In other words, since the occurrence rate of the special notification is higher when the player is in the second mode than when the player is in the first mode, it is possible to play in such a way that the player can determine whether the player is in the second mode by referring to the special notification and change the number of bets.

What's more, the more consecutive times a player fails to win the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger, the more likely the special notification will occur. This makes it possible to compensate for the fact that it is difficult to win the AT mode transition lottery, and it is possible to achieve a so-called ceiling function simply by using lottery mode notifications such as special notifications.

The advantageous zone can end if the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won, and an initialization process for the advantageous zone information is executed when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, the number of consecutive times the AT mode transition lottery based on the above-mentioned specific trigger is not won is stored in the sub-side display control device 81, so that the ceiling function for the AT mode transition lottery can be optimally realized, even while assuming a configuration in which information for each advantageous zone is not carried over on the main control device 101 side.

Here, for example, instead of ending the advantageous zone every time the AT mode transition lottery is lost, a configuration is also conceivable in which whether or not to end the advantageous zone is determined based on the upper limit of the advantageous zone's games (1,500 games). That is, for example, if the number of games remaining up to the upper limit of the advantageous zone at the time the AT mode transition lottery is lost is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the advantageous zone may not be ended in response to the loss of the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, if the number of games remaining is less than the predetermined number of games, the advantageous zone may be ended in response to the loss of the AT mode transition lottery. In such a configuration, the main control unit 101 can manage the number of consecutive losses, thereby enabling a ceiling function to be implemented on the main control unit 101 side. In this case, a command corresponding to the number of consecutive losses can be output to the display control unit 81, and the display control unit 81 can manage whether or not to execute a special notification in response to that number of losses. Alternatively, the main control unit 101 can determine whether or not to execute a special notification based on the number of consecutive losses, and if a special notification is to be executed, output a command to that effect to the display control unit 81, thereby enabling a ceiling function based on the occurrence rate of special notifications.

On the other hand, if the setting value is changed, for example, before the opening of the gaming hall, the RAM clear process is executed on the main control device 101 side, and the above consecutive count managed on the main control device 101 side is also erased. This increases the likelihood that the change in the setting value will be discovered based on whether or not the ceiling function based on the consecutive count is activated. In this regard, by configuring the display control device 81 side to manage the consecutive count as described above, even if the RAM clear process is executed on the main control device 101 side in response to a change in the setting value, it is possible to activate the ceiling function without being involved in that situation. This makes it difficult to discover whether or not the setting value has been changed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted not only in a two-bet game in a non-internal state or an internal state, but also in the first BB state and second BB state. In other words, it is possible to restrict the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery not only by switching the number of bets in a non-internal state or an internal state, but also by transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state. In particular, in the first BB state or the second BB state, the medal loss per game is reduced compared to a three-bet game or a two-bet game in the internal state (see Figure 26). By transitioning to the first BB state or the second BB state, it is possible to execute a game that generates a specific trigger while restricting the mode transition of the AT mode transition lottery, while minimizing the loss of held medals. Therefore, below, processing for game presentation utilizing transitions between each BB state will be explained.

<First BB Notification Process>
First, the first BB notification process in the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 54. As already explained, the first BB notification process (start effect setting process) is a process for setting effects based on start commands (lottery result command, AT winning notification command, trigger non-winning command, etc.) output when the game starts.

In step S2101, it is determined whether the first BB has been won based on the currently received lottery result command. If the first BB has been won, in step S2102, a process is executed to set a first BB win flag in the various flag storage area 183a. Then, in step S2103, it is determined whether a first BB completed flag or a second BB completed flag has been set in the various flag storage area 183a. The first BB completed flag and the second BB completed flag are flags that allow the CPU 181 to know that the first BB state or the second BB state has already ended, but that the effects corresponding to these first BB states or second BB states are still ongoing. The processing when these BB completed flags are set will be explained in detail after explaining the effects corresponding to each BB state. Here, the processing when no BB completed flags are set will be explained.

In other words, if a negative judgment is made in step S2103 and no BB completed flags are set, then in step S2104, effect settings are executed to display a first BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. The first BB winning effect is an effect for informing the player that they have won the first BB in this game, and for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that a tank has been acquired as the first BB corresponding character associated with the first BB (the figure shows a tank jumping out of a treasure chest).

If it is determined in step S2101 that the first BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2105, it is determined whether the second BB has been won based on the lottery result command currently received. If the second BB has been won, in step S2106 a process is executed to set a second BB win flag in the various flag storage area 183a. Then, in step S2107 it is determined whether a first BB end flag or a second BB end flag has been set in the various flag storage area 183a. If a negative determination is made in step S2107 and neither of the BB end flags has been set, in step S2108 a performance setting is executed to perform a second BB win performance on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. The second BB winning effect is an effect used to notify the player that they have won the second BB in this game. For example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays that the player has acquired a sword as the second BB corresponding character associated with the second BB (the image shows the sword popping out of the treasure chest).

If it is determined in step S2105 that the second BB has not been won, the process proceeds to step S2109. In step S2109, it is determined whether the first BB won flag is set. If the first BB won flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2110, where it is determined whether the game to be started this time is a three-bet game. Here, the first BB won flag is a flag that is cleared upon winning the first BB. When the first BB won flag is set and the game is a three-bet game, this means that the internal state in which the first BB win is carried over is being executed in a three-bet game. In this case, in step S2111, effect settings are executed to display a first BB won effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. The 1st BB won effect is an effect that notifies the player that the 1st BB win has been carried over and that a 1st BB win may occur in the current game. For example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), a tank is displayed as the 1st BB character in a predetermined position (left edge) on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

If the 1st BB winning flag is not set in step S2109, it is determined in step S2112 whether the 2nd BB winning flag is set. If the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2113, where it is determined whether the game to be started this time is a 2-bet game. Here, the 2nd BB winning flag is a flag that is cleared when the 2nd BB win is achieved. A case where the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the game is a 2-bet game means that the internal state in which the 2nd BB win is carried over is being executed in a 2-bet game. In this case, in step S2114, effect settings are executed to display a 2nd BB winning effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. The 2nd BB winning effect is an effect to notify the player that the 2nd BB win is carried over and that a 2nd BB win may be achieved in the current game. For example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), a sword is displayed as the 2nd BB corresponding character in a predetermined position (left edge) on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65.

<Second BB Notification Process>
The processing for executing the effects corresponding to the first BB state and the second BB state is executed in the second BB notification processing. Therefore, prior to explaining the processing in the first BB notification processing when the effects corresponding to these BB states are continuing, the second BB notification processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 55. As already explained, the second BB notification processing is processing executed in the full stop effect setting processing, and is processing for setting effects based on start commands (winning result command, first BB start command, second BB start command, first BB end command, second BB end command, AT end command, advantageous zone game command, lottery trigger command, etc.) output when the game ends.

In the second BB notification process, step S2201 determines whether a first BB start command has been received. If a first BB start command has been received, step S2202 executes the effect settings to start the first BB effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then terminates the second BB notification process. The first BB effect is an effect to notify the player that the first BB state is in effect and that execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the main character riding a tank as the first BB character associated with the first BB-compatible character. Furthermore, when the first BB effect is executed, a mode transition restriction notification effect displaying text such as "HOLD!!" is executed to notify the player of the restricted state, and a medal reduction suppression effect displaying text such as "Conserving stamina" is executed to notify the player that medal reduction is being suppressed. The first BB effect will continue at least until the process to end the first BB effect is executed. If the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches 50 during the first BB state and a lottery trigger command is received, a standby effect will occur as shown in Figure 59(a) (step S1909).

If the first BB start command has not been received in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether a second BB start command has been received. If the second BB start command has been received, in step S2204, effect settings are executed to start the second BB effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then the second BB notification process is terminated. The second BB effect is an effect for notifying the player that the second BB state is in effect and that execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted. For example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the main character equipped with a sword as the second BB character associated with the second BB-compatible character. Furthermore, when the second BB effect is executed, a mode transition restriction notification effect displaying text such as "HOLD!!" is executed to notify the player of the restricted state, and a medal reduction suppression effect displaying text such as "Conserving stamina" is executed to notify the player that medal reduction is being suppressed. The second BB effect will continue at least until the process to end the second BB effect is executed. If the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches 50 during the second BB state and a lottery trigger command is received, a standby effect will occur as shown in Figure 59(b) (step S1909).

If it is determined in step S2203 that the second BB start command has not been received, then in step S2205 it is determined whether the first BB end command has been received. If the first BB end command has been received, then in step S2206 a process is executed to set a first BB end flag. Then in step S2207 a process is executed to input "3" as the first predetermined number into the end counter provided in the various counter area 183b, and then this second BB notification process is terminated. In this embodiment, the first BB effect and the second BB effect are configured to continue until a game after the corresponding BB end game, and the end counter is a counter that specifies the maximum number of games that the ongoing BB effect will continue even after the BB end game.

If it is determined in step S2205 that the first BB end command has not been received, it is determined in step S2208 whether or not the second BB end command has been received. If the second BB end command has been received, a process is executed in step S2209 to set a second BB end flag. Then, in step S2210, a process is executed to input "5" as the second predetermined number into the end counter, and then this BB notification second process is terminated. Note that in this embodiment, the second predetermined number is different from the first predetermined number and is a number greater than the first predetermined number, but it may be a number less than the first predetermined number or the same as the first predetermined number. If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the BB notification second process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the first BB notification process, if the first BB is won in step S2101 and it is determined in step S2103 that the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2115. In step S2115, the process to end the BB effect currently in progress is executed. That is, if a first BB effect is currently in progress, the first BB effect is ended, and if a second BB effect is currently in progress, the second BB effect is ended. Note that when the BB effect is ended, the counter is also reset to 0 after the end. In other words, each BB effect can continue after the BB state ends until the next first BB is won.

Also, if the second BB is won in step S2105 and it is determined in step S2107 that the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2116. In step S2116, similar to step S2115 above, the process of ending the BB effect currently in progress is executed. That is, if a first BB effect is currently in progress, the first BB effect is ended, and if a second BB effect is currently in progress, the second BB effect is ended. Note that when the BB effect is ended, the counter is also reset to 0 after the end. In other words, each BB effect can continue after the BB state ends until the next second BB is won.

After executing any of the processes in step S2104, step S2108, step S2111, or steps S2114 to S2116, or after a negative judgment is made in step S2110, step S2112, or step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2117. In step S2117, it is determined whether any of the BB effects are currently being executed. If any of the BB effects are being executed, it is determined in step S2118 whether the first BB completed flag or the second BB completed flag is set, and it is determined whether the BB state has already ended. If any of the BB completed flags is set, the process executes in step S2119 to decrement the counter by 1 after the end.

Then, in step S2120, it is determined whether the counter has reached 0 after termination. If it has reached 0, in step S2121, termination processing for the BB effect currently being executed is performed, and then the first BB notification processing is terminated. That is, if a first BB effect is being executed, the first BB effect is terminated, and if a second BB effect is being executed, the second BB effect is terminated. Also, even if the counter does not reach 0 after termination, if an AT win notification command or trigger non-win command has been received in step S2122 and a lottery to transition to AT mode based on a specific trigger has been executed, proceed to step S2121, termination processing for the BB effect currently being executed, and then the first BB notification processing is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in step S2117, step S2118, or step S2122, the first BB notification processing is terminated.

In other words, each BB effect ends when a specific triggered AT mode transition lottery is executed after the BB state ends, and even if a specific triggered AT mode transition lottery is not executed, it ends when the next BB is won or the counter reaches 0 after the end of the BB state.

<Relationship between each BB state and AT mode transition lottery>
The relationship between the gameplay and the presentation that creates specific opportunities while restricting the transition to the lottery mode by transitioning to each BB state will be explained with reference to the timing charts of Figures 60 and 61.

For example, suppose a player plays a 3-bet game in an internal state that carries over a second BB win, transitions to a favorable zone at t21, and starts counting the number of games until a specific trigger. At t22, the lottery mode transitions to the second mode. After that, for example, by using a special notification to determine the mode transition, the player switches from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game at t23. After a specific trigger occurs at t24, the player switches to a 3-bet game at t25, and a lottery for transitioning to the AT mode based on the specific trigger is executed. In this case, if the player plays a 3-bet game in the internal state, a loss of approximately 1.77 medals per game is expected, and if the player plays a 2-bet game in the internal state, a loss of approximately 0.64 medals per game is expected. In other words, the game from t21 to t23 results in a loss of approximately 1.77 medals per game, and the game from t23 to t24 results in a loss of approximately 0.64 medals per game.

In contrast, suppose the game enters a favorable zone at t26, the count of the number of games until the specific trigger begins, and the lottery mode transitions to the second mode at t27. Then, at t28, the game switches to a two-bet game, and at t29, the second BB win occurs. In this case, the second BB state from t29 to t31 is played in a three-bet game, but no mode transition occurs, so the second mode is maintained. Meanwhile, the count of the number of games until the specific trigger continues, and the specific trigger occurs at t30. After the second BB state ends at t31, the game switches to a three-bet game and the AT mode transition lottery is held, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the second mode.

Here, as described above, if the internal state is set to 3-bet games, a decrease of approximately 1.77 medals can be expected per game. Furthermore, if the internal state is set to 2-bet games, a decrease of approximately 0.64 medals can be expected per game. In the second BB state, a decrease of approximately 0.00 medals can be expected per game, making medal decrease unlikely (nor is it likely to increase). Therefore, while the games from t26 to t28 result in a decrease of approximately 1.77 medals per game, the same as in the case of t21 to t23, the games from t28 to t29 result in a decrease of approximately 0.64 medals per game, and the games from t29 to t31 result in no medal decrease. In other words, the number of games up to the specific trigger allocated to the internal state and 2-bet games is reduced by the amount required to generate the second BB win, dramatically reducing the number of medal decreases. By doing this, when playing a game that triggers a specific opportunity in a restricted state, the action of achieving a bonus win is added, rather than simply changing the number of bets, making the game much more interesting.

When the game switches to the 2-bet mode at time t28, the 2nd BB win has already been carried over, and so, as shown in Figure 57(b), the mode transition restriction notification effect is displayed along with the 2nd BB win effect. This allows the player to easily understand that it is possible to immediately achieve the 2nd BB win, i.e., to wait for the occurrence of a specific opportunity while minimizing the loss of medals held.

When the second BB win is achieved at t29, the second BB effect begins. In this case, as shown in Figure 58 (b), the mode transition restriction notification effect and medal reduction suppression effect are also executed, allowing the player to understand that this is more advantageous for the player than continuing the internal state of a two-bet game. The game count notification effect is also updated as the game progresses, and when a specific trigger occurs at t30, the above-mentioned waiting effect such as "Defeat the enemy with a MAX BET!!" occurs, notifying the player that a situation has arisen in which they can enter the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger after the second BB state ends.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in a 3-bet game, it is possible to win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and in a 2-bet game, it is possible to win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. Furthermore, in a 3-bet game, it is possible to win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and in a 2-bet game, it is possible to win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In other words, if an internal state in which a 2nd BB win is carried over is played in a 3-bet game, the 2nd BB win will not occur, and by switching to a 2-bet game, it is possible to win the 2nd BB that has been carried over. In this case, if a non-internal state after the 2nd BB state ends is played in a 3-bet game, it becomes possible to win the 1st BB and also to win the 1st BB.

For example, as shown in Figure 61, suppose that at t41 the game count begins after a transition to the advantageous zone until a specific trigger occurs, and the first BB win occurs at t42, which is the first mode. In this case, as described above, while the transition to lottery mode does not occur during the first BB state, the game count until the specific trigger is still executed, so the specific trigger may occur, for example, at t43, which is during the first BB state. Then, when the first BB state ends at t44 and an AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is executed in a 3-bet game, the AT mode transition lottery will be held in the first mode, which has a lower probability, as described above, and the possibility of winning the AT mode transition is low.

In other words, in an internal state where a first BB win is carried over, there is a possibility that a first BB win will occur unintentionally in a 3-bet game before transitioning to first mode, which increases the likelihood that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger will be drawn in first mode, which has a lower probability. Therefore, in an internal state where a first BB win is carried over, players will be forced to play every game in a way that avoids a first BB win while determining the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery before transitioning to second mode.

In this embodiment, when the first credit insertion switch 56 serving as the MAX BET button is operated, a bet is placed according to the value of the MAX BET counter. The MAX BET counter is set to 2 in the non-internal state, and 3 when the internal state is entered. In other words, when the first BB state or second BB state ends and the non-internal state is entered, the MAX BET counter becomes 2, and when a game is played by operating the first credit insertion switch 56, the non-internal state naturally becomes a 2-bet game, and the game is played in a restricted state in which the execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted.

In other words, at time t44, the MAX BET counter is 2, which means that a 3-BET game has been played by inserting three medals into the medal insertion slot 45. Then, at time t45, the 1st BB is won, and the MAX BET counter is set to 3.

Let's say that the game enters the advantageous zone at t46, transitions to the second mode at t47, switches to the 2-bet game at t48, and achieves the second BB win at t49. In these circumstances, the MAX bet counter is 3 in the internal state up until the second BB win is achieved at t48. To switch to the 2-bet game at t48, it is necessary to operate the second credit switch 57 instead of the first credit switch 56, or to place a bet by inserting medals into the medal slot 45. Because the MAX bet counter is still 3 in the second BB state, it is possible to play the desired game (play in the restricted state) by operating the first credit switch 56 in the second BB state from t49 to t51.

After a specific trigger occurs at time t50, the second BB state ends at time t51, and the system enters a non-internal state. In this case, the MAX bet counter becomes 2, and so in games where the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, play continues with a 2-bet game. In a 2-bet game in a non-internal state, the second BB is won with a relatively high probability of approximately 1 in 4.95, and if the second BB is not won in that winning game, the system enters the internal state. When the system enters the internal state, the MAX bet counter becomes 3, and in games where the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, the game transitions to the internal state at t52, switching to a 3-bet game and a lottery for transitioning to AT mode is executed based on the specific trigger.

In other words, in this embodiment, the second mode, which has a higher probability, is maintained as the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery, and a game that generates a specific opportunity while suppressing medal reduction is realized by switching from a three-bet game to a two-bet game and achieving a second BB win. After the second BB state ends, the restricted state is maintained until the second BB win occurs again. This reduces the chance that an internal state carrying over a first BB win will be executed in a three-bet game. This makes it possible to effectively avoid situations where an AT mode transition lottery is held in the first mode, which has a lower probability, due to an unintentional first BB win, or forcing a player to play in a way that avoids a first BB win every game to prevent this from happening. This makes it possible to realize a smoother gameplay without inflicting any disadvantage on the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when playing a non-internal state after the second BB state as described above in a two-bet game, the effects during the second BB state can continue until the internal state is reached. In other words, the second BB effects that began at t49 when the state transitions to the second BB state do not end at t51 when the second BB state ends, but can continue until t52 when the state transitions to the internal state. By doing this, even though a specific trigger has already occurred and the player can enter the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger by simply switching to a three-bet game, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when playing a two-bet game without switching to a three-bet game.

On the other hand, there may be situations where, for example, when gaming time is limited, such as near closing time at an amusement hall, and time or even medals are not available to play the two-bet game until the internal state is reached after the second BB state ends. In this regard, in this embodiment, since bets can be placed not only using the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57 but also using the medal insertion slot 45, it is possible to skip playing the two-bet game until the internal state is reached after the second BB state ends, but instead switch to a three-bet game immediately after the second BB state ends and participate in a lottery to transition to the AT mode based on a specific trigger (Figure 60). In this way, it is possible to respect the player's wishes while playing the game.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

Allowable games (first games, non-internal state or 3-bet games in internal state) that may result in a transition to the lottery mode in the AT mode transition lottery, and restricted games (second games, BB state games, 2-bet games in non-internal state or internal state) that restrict the transition to the lottery mode in the AT mode transition lottery are set, and the AT mode transition lottery is held when the number of advantageous zone games AG, which is counted in both allowable games and restricted games, reaches a predetermined number of 50. This makes it possible to transition the lottery mode to the higher probability second mode in allowable games, and then switch to restricted games to avoid transitioning to the lottery mode until the number of advantageous zone games AG reaches a predetermined number, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, not only is the transition to the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery restricted by restricted play, but the AT mode transition lottery itself is also restricted by restricted play, so the AT mode transition lottery is held by playing permissible play after the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches a predetermined number. By doing this, not only do players need to determine the second mode and switch to restricted play, but they also need to play while knowing that the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached a predetermined number, i.e., they need to know the timing to switch from restricted play to permissible play, which improves the playability of restricted play.

In this embodiment, the player can easily know that the predetermined number has been reached through the lottery preview and standby effects displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The number of games notification effect also allows the player to know that the predetermined number has been reached and the number of games remaining until the predetermined number is reached. This allows the player to play while knowing how long it will take for a specific opportunity to occur. Not only can the player know whether or not a BB has been won and when to switch to a two-bet game, but if the transition to the second mode has not yet occurred, the player can also know the time limit, making the game more entertaining.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the AT mode transition lottery is held during the first permissible play after a specific trigger occurs, it is possible to prevent a specific trigger from occurring and an AT mode transition lottery being held during restricted play, and to prevent an event such as a transition to lottery mode occurring because the AT mode transition lottery is not held for a long time after switching to permissible play following a specific trigger. This makes it possible to optimally realize gameplay that switches to permissible play when a specific trigger occurs.

Furthermore, a special notification is issued when the player wins the special notification lottery, and the probability of winning the special notification lottery is higher when the player is in second mode than when the player is in first mode. This allows the player to perceive the special notification as an indication that the player is in second mode. This allows the player to use the special notification as an indicator to switch from allowed play to restricted play.

The special notification lottery is set so that the higher the value of the trigger pass counter, which indicates the consecutive number of times the AT mode transition lottery has been unsuccessful, the easier it is to win. The more times you fail to win the AT mode transition lottery, the more likely a special notification will occur. In other words, it becomes easier to determine that you are in the second mode, and as a result, it becomes easier to win the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger. In this way, the special notification can be used to achieve a ceiling function for the AT mode transition lottery.

In this case, the special notification can be seen not only as a notification that the player is in the second mode, but also as a notification corresponding to the number of bets. In other words, rather than directly notifying the player of the high or low lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery, it can also be seen as a suggestion of the type of game to be played (restricted game and permitted game). This allows the player to understand the game to be played from the special notification.

If the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won, the advantageous zone is ended, and upon the end of the advantageous zone, the main control unit 101 performs initialization processing for the advantageous zone information. In contrast, the trigger through counter that determines the probability of the special notification being executed is managed by the display control unit 81, making it possible to adjust the likelihood of winning the AT mode transition lottery across advantageous zones through special notifications.

The probability of winning the special notification lottery varies depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. Therefore, even if there are circumstances that make it impossible to set a different winning probability for the AT mode transition lottery, this can be achieved through the special notification.

In this case, the special notification is set to be executed as a full stop effect in the full stop effect setting process, and is executed when the game ends. In contrast, processing for transitioning to lottery mode, such as the AT lottery mode transition lottery process, is executed in the lottery result response processing on the main control device 101 side. In other words, in one game, processing for transitioning to lottery mode is performed before the special notification is executed. This makes it possible to prevent events such as switching to limited play using the special notification as an indicator, only to have the transition to lottery mode occur after the transition.

The AT lottery mode transition lottery process allows for transition to either the first mode or the second mode depending on the game lottery results. This means that in games where a specific opportunity is triggered during limited play to enter the AT mode transition lottery in the higher probability second mode, the lottery results of each game are not ignored, and a decrease in the attention given to each game can be avoided.

In this case, while it is assumed that a transition from first mode to second mode is likely to occur when a specific role, known as a rare role, is achieved, and that a transition from second mode to first mode is likely to occur when a normal role, such as normal lip A to normal lip C, is achieved, it is possible for a transition from first mode to second mode to occur even with the normal role. As a result, it is not possible to definitively determine the mode transition based on the lottery results of each game alone, which increases the fun of predicting the mode transition.

When a specific role is won in permissible play, an AT mode transition lottery triggered by that specific role can be held. This means that a transition to AT mode can occur without going through an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger, thereby diversifying play. Furthermore, by doing this, a transition to AT mode is more likely to occur in play where an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific role is held in permissible play and a player waits for a transition to the second mode, compared to play where only restricted play is played and only AT mode transition lotteries based on specific triggers are held, which can also motivate players to play permissible play.

Furthermore, although it is possible to win a specific role in restricted play as a two-bet game, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery based on the winning of that specific role is restricted, so the frustration of not being able to draw the AT mode transition lottery despite winning a specific role can serve as an encouragement to play permitted games.

A two-bet game as a restricted game has a higher game base, which is the average number of medals required for a game minus the number of medals paid out as a result of the game, than a three-bet game as an allowable game. Therefore, by determining whether to transition to the second mode and then switching to a two-bet game, it is possible to trigger a specific trigger while relatively minimizing medal loss. In other words, the sooner the transition to the second mode occurs, and the sooner the transition to the second mode is determined, the fewer medals are required to trigger the specific trigger. This dramatically increases the attention paid to the transition to the second mode, making it possible to achieve an exciting gameplay experience when balanced with actual medal loss.

Furthermore, if a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state is triggered as a limited game, the game base for these BB states is set higher than for a two-bet game, so fewer medals are required to trigger the specific trigger than if the specific trigger were to occur while remaining in the two-bet game. In other words, by triggering the transition to the second mode earlier, identifying this earlier, and further triggering the second BB win or the first BB win earlier, it is possible to reduce the medal loss required to trigger the specific trigger. Therefore, in addition to improving gameplay by allowing room for knowledge intervention, such as identifying the transition to the second mode, gameplay is also improved by allowing room for player skill intervention, such as achieving a BB win, making it possible to realize a game that is more interesting than ever before.

Moreover, it is not enough to simply achieve a BB win; depending on the timing of the BB win and the timing of the BB state ending, it is possible that the specific trigger may not have occurred, so it is necessary to carefully determine the timing of the BB win. More specifically, if the BB win occurs too early, it will be necessary to play an additional two-bet game after the BB state ends, and if the BB win occurs too late, it will be necessary to continue playing the BB state even after the specific trigger has occurred, which could result in reduced time efficiency.

In this case, if the internal state is in a favorable zone, the number of games in the favorable zone AG is counted. Therefore, in the internal state where a BB win has been carried over, the timing for achieving a BB win can be determined, and a game can be played in which the BB win is achieved when the desired timing occurs. In other words, if the desired timing is reached and a BB win is waited for, and then a BB win is attempted, the discrepancy between the desired timing and the BB win can become large. In this regard, by making the gameplay such that a specific trigger can be waited for in the internal state as described above, a BB win can be achieved earlier, making it possible to avoid inconveniences caused by a difference in the timing of the win (particularly a decrease in time efficiency).

In this embodiment, the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB win is carried over is basically set as normal play, and since the 2nd BB can be won in a 2-bet game but not in a 3-bet game, in order to play limited play while minimizing the loss of medals due to a BB win, it is necessary to switch to a 2-bet game. This makes it possible to avoid an unintentional 2nd BB win during normal play in a 3-bet game, which would result in limited play.

In this case, the MAX BET counter is set to 2 in the non-internal state and 3 in the internal state. Therefore, in a game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, when the non-internal state is entered after the BB state ends, the game will naturally be played in a 2-bet game. If the second BB is won in the 2-bet game, the game will enter the internal state and switch to a 3-bet game. This makes it easier to play normal games in a 3-bet game in which the second BB win has been carried over, and makes it more difficult to play games in which the first BB win has been carried over, for example. This makes it possible to avoid forcing a stop operation to avoid winning the first BB during permitted play, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

On the other hand, when the MAX bet counter has a value of 3, it is possible to play a 2-bet game by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56 or inserting a medal through the medal insertion slot 45. Also, when the MAX bet counter has a value of 2, it is possible to play a 3-bet game by inserting a medal through the medal insertion slot 45 instead of the first credit insertion switch 56. Therefore, for example, it is permissible to play a 3-bet game after the BB state has ended, such as when the amusement hall is about to close, but before the second BB is won. This makes it possible to carry over a 2-BB win without eliminating the thrill of playing slot machine 10, which is to start play by the player's own start operation and end play by the player's own end operation.

Furthermore, as described above, after the BB state ends, it is made easier to play the 2-bet game until the second BB is won, and the BB effects are also configured to continue until the second BB is won. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when players are encouraged to play the 2-bet game in a non-internal state even though the BB state has ended.

However, it is anticipated that there may be player needs, such as when the gaming hall is about to close as described above, to switch to a 3-bet game after the BB state has ended and before winning the second BB, and to take part in the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger. Since the BB effects are terminated when the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is executed after the BB state has ended, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of only the BB effects continuing.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the BB state ends, the BB effect ends after a predetermined number of games (3 or 5 games) even if the second BB is not won. This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of the BB effect continuing indefinitely just because the second BB is not won. Incidentally, the number of games that the second BB effect can continue after the second BB state ends is set to a number greater than the denominator of the probability of winning the second BB (approximately 1 in 4.95), and the second BB effect basically ends when the second BB is won.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment described above, the first mode and the second mode are switched back and forth through the AT lottery mode transition lottery process, but in this modified example, the first mode and the second mode are switched back and forth depending on the number of games AG in the advantageous zone.

Figure 62 (a) is a flowchart showing the processing for advantageous zone transition games in this modified example. As already explained, the processing for advantageous zone transition games is executed as processing on the main control device 101 side in games that transition to advantageous zones during the first zone display processing.

In step S2301, a lottery process for the mode transition table is executed. That is, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 63(a), multiple types of mode transition tables, in which the relationship between the advantageous zone game count AG and the transition games between the first mode and the second mode is set, are stored in the various table storage area 105a. More specifically, for example, the mode transition table for address information M0001 indicates that if the advantageous zone game count AG is 1 to 10, the second mode is set, and if the advantageous zone game count AG is 11 to 49, the first mode is set. Furthermore, the mode transition table for address information M0005 indicates that if the advantageous zone game count AG is 1 to 40, the second mode is set, and if the advantageous zone game count is 41 to 49, the first mode is set. The process in step S2301 is to determine by lottery the mode transition table to be used in the current advantageous zone from among these multiple stored mode transition tables.

More specifically, regarding the mode transition tables with multiple types set, each mode transition table is set so that either the first mode or the second mode occurs regardless of the advantageous zone game count AG. In other words, the type of lottery mode is not determined solely by the advantageous zone game count AG. Furthermore, the mode transition tables in this modified example are set to include at least a zone that is the second mode, and no mode transition tables are set that are the first mode regardless of the value of the advantageous zone game count AG. In contrast, the mode transition table for address information MXXX is set to the second mode for all advantageous zone game count AG values from 1 to 49, and is a mode transition table that does not include a zone that is the first mode.

In step S2302, based on the processing result of step S2301, a process is executed to store the address information of the determined mode transition table in the address information storage area 106f. Then, in step S2303, a process is executed to set the table command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the processing for the advantageous zone transition game is terminated. The table command includes information on the type of mode transition table set for this transition to the advantageous zone.

In the display control device 81, for example, processing to be performed when a table command is received is set as the table notification processing (Figure 62 (b)) executed in step S1615 (other start-up effect setting processing) of the start-up effect setting processing.

That is, in the table notification process, step S2311 determines whether a table command has been received, and if a table command has been received, step S2312 executes a process to store the mode transition table information included in the table command in the address information storage area 183c. Note that if mode transition table information has already been stored, that information is erased and new mode transition table information is stored. If a table command has not been received in step S2311, the table notification process ends.

After executing the processing of step S2312, in step S2313, it is determined whether the trigger through counter is greater than a predetermined number (5). If it is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the table notification processing is terminated. If it is greater than the predetermined number, i.e., if the number of consecutive times that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won is greater than the predetermined number, the table notification lottery processing is executed in step S2314. The table notification lottery processing is a process of drawing lots to determine whether or not to notify information about the type of mode transition table at this time. The probability of winning varies depending on, for example, the value of the trigger through counter, the setting value, and the type of mode transition table. More specifically, for example, the larger the value of the trigger through counter, the more likely it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the setting value, the more likely it is to win the table notification lottery. Furthermore, as for the type of mode transition table, for example, the longer the section that is the second mode is secured, the more likely it is to win the table notification lottery.

After executing the table notification lottery process in step S2314, a determination is made in step S2315 as to whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the result is not a win, the table notification process is terminated. If the result is a win, in step S2316, the stored mode transition table is read and effect data corresponding to the mode transition table is obtained from RAM 183. The effect data corresponding to the mode transition table is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the mode transition table, as shown in FIG. 63, and the effects corresponding to each effect data are different enough to be distinguishable by the player. Note that instead of a one-to-one correspondence between mode transition tables and effect data, multiple mode transition tables may be associated with one piece of effect data, or one mode transition table may be associated with multiple pieces of effect data.

After obtaining the effect data in step S2316, effect settings are executed in step S2317 to execute a table notification effect based on the obtained effect data on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then the table notification processing is terminated. A single table notification effect is generated by, for example, combining the background color and type of the auxiliary display unit 65, the position at which the main character is displayed, and the size at which the main character is displayed. For example, if the background color of the auxiliary display unit 65 is blue, the main character is displayed in the center, and the main character is displayed at a medium size, a table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of address information M0001 is generated. Even with the same background color and main character position, if the main character's display size is large, a table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of address information M0002 is generated. Even with the same background color and main character position, if the main character's display size is small, a table notification effect corresponding to the mode transition table of address information M0003 is generated. Thus, a table notification effect corresponding to a single mode transition table is generated by combining various parameters. In this case, the player can predict the mode transition table that will be set when the advantageous zone transition occurs based on the table notification effect.

In addition to or instead of a configuration in which the presentation style of the table notification effect is set in a one-to-one relationship with each mode transition table, making it possible to identify a single mode transition table from the table notification effect, a configuration in which a single table notification effect presentation style is associated with multiple mode transition tables, making it difficult to identify a single mode transition table from the table notification effect, may be used. In this case, for example, each mode transition table may be categorized by the number of games assigned to the second mode or the timing of games that enter the second mode, and a table notification effect may be associated with each category.

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery processing in this modified example. As already explained, the AT lottery processing is executed in the lottery result response processing, and is permitted to be executed when the number of bets is a specific specified number, but is restricted from being executed when the number is not the specific specified number and is in a restricted state.

In step S2401, the address information of the mode transition table stored in the address information storage area 106f is read, and a process is executed to determine the mode transition table set in the current advantageous zone. In the following step S2402, a process is executed to determine the advantageous zone game count AG. Then, in step S2403, the mode transition table is compared with the advantageous zone game count AG to determine whether the current game corresponds to the first mode.

For example, if the mode transition table is for address information M0001, as described above, when the advantageous zone game count AG is 1 to 10, the second mode is set, and when the advantageous zone game count AG is 11 to 49, the first mode is set. In step S2403, if the advantageous zone game count AG is 11 to 49, a positive judgment is made that the current game corresponds to the first mode.

If step S2403 determines that the game corresponds to the first mode, step S2404 determines whether the first mode flag has already been set. If the first mode flag is not set and the previous AT lottery process was executed in the second mode, step S2405 executes processing to set the first mode flag. Then, step S2406 executes processing to set the first mode transition command as an output target to the display control device 81.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2403, a judgment is made in step S2407 as to whether the game corresponds to the second mode. In other words, if the mode transition table is for address information M0001 and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is between 1 and 10, a positive judgment is made that the current game corresponds to the second mode.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the game corresponds to the second mode, it is determined in step S2408 whether the first mode flag is set. If the first mode flag is set and the previous AT lottery process was executed in the first mode, processing is executed to clear the first mode flag in step S2409. Then, processing is executed in step S2410 to set a second mode transition command as an output target to the display control device 81.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2404, if the processing of step S2406 or step S2410 is executed, or if a negative judgment is made in step S2407 or step S2408, the process proceeds to step S2411. In steps S2411 to S2416, processing for the AT mode transition lottery is executed, similar to the processing of steps S812 to S817 above. In addition, in steps S2417 to S2424, processing according to the results of the AT mode transition lottery is executed, similar to the processing of steps S818 to S824.

Here, as shown in Figure 63, the mode transition table does not specify a lottery mode when the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is 50 or higher. In other words, if the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is 50 or higher, a negative judgment will be made in both steps S2403 and S2407. As a result, once the number of games in the advantageous zone AG reaches 50 and a specific trigger occurs, a transition to the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery will not occur, regardless of the value of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG thereafter.

By doing this, when playing with a bet based on a specific specified number, the game will switch between the first mode and the second mode depending on the value of the advantageous zone game number AG, whereas when playing with a bet that differs from the specific specified number, the game will not switch between the first mode and the second mode regardless of the value of the advantageous zone game number AG.

More specifically, for example, when the mode transition table for address information M0001 is set, the second mode is set for games in which the advantageous zone game count AG is up to 10, and the first mode is set for games in which it is 11 or above. However, by switching from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game for games in which the advantageous zone game count AG is up to 10, and playing in a restricted state, it is possible to continue playing while maintaining the second mode. Then, after the advantageous zone game count reaches 50 and the trigger lottery flag is set, it is possible to switch to a 3-bet game and receive an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger in the second mode.

As described above, in this modified example, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is set using the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. This allows the gaming machine to determine in advance the transition to the lottery mode based on the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. In other words, in the first embodiment, the lottery mode transition occurs after the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is performed during permissible play. Therefore, the transition to the lottery mode cannot be determined until the AT lottery mode transition lottery process is performed. However, by using the modified example, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery mode. Moreover, even if a transition to the lottery mode does not actually occur during permissible play, it is possible to determine which lottery mode will be selected if permissible play occurs during restricted play. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to determine the timing to switch to a three-bet game, for example, if the first mode is switched to a two-bet game.

Multiple mode transition tables are stored in advance as mode transition tables, and these multiple mode transition tables are set so that the mode currently in the advantageous zone cannot be determined from the advantageous zone game count AG. More specifically, for example, if the number of games after transitioning to the advantageous zone (advantageous zone game count AG) is 1 to 10, the mode transition table for address information M0001 will set the player to second mode, but the mode transition table for address information M0002 will set the player to first mode. If the number of games after transitioning to the advantageous zone (advantageous zone game count AG) is 1 to 20, the mode transition table for address information M0001 will set the player to first mode, and the mode transition table for address information M0002 will set the player to second mode. In other words, a mode transition table is set to set a different lottery mode for each number of games, so that the lottery mode currently in the advantageous zone cannot be determined solely from the number of games after transitioning to the advantageous zone. This ensures the significance of playing games that involve predicting the mode transition table.

On the other hand, when a player transitions to a favorable zone, i.e., when a mode transition table is set, a table notification effect can be displayed to suggest each mode transition table. This makes it possible to predict the current lottery mode and future lottery modes based on the number of games played after the transition to the favorable zone and the content of the table notification effect.

In this case, for example, if a table notification effect corresponding to address information M0001 is displayed, after a transition to the advantageous zone, any one of the first through tenth games can be played in permitted play mode, and subsequent games must be played in restricted play mode until a specific trigger occurs. In other words, if a player can detect from a table notification effect or special notification that the mode transition table for address information M0001 has been set by the tenth game, they can switch to restricted play by the eleventh game and play up to the 49th game, thereby remaining in the second mode and participating in the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger. In other words, if the player fails to detect the mode transition table by the tenth game or plays any one of the eleventh through 49th games in permitted play mode, the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger will have to be played in the first mode, which has a lower probability of occurring. This increases the importance of detecting the mode transition table and switching to restricted play, improving the enjoyment of such games.

Furthermore, for example, if a table notification effect corresponding to address information M0005 is performed, after a transition to the advantageous zone, any of the games from game 41 through game 49 can be played in permitted play mode, and subsequent games can be played in restricted play mode. In other words, after detecting from the table notification effect or special notification that the mode transition table for address information M0005 has been set, at least game 48 can be played in restricted play mode. This makes it possible to wait for a specific trigger and transition to the second mode while suppressing medal loss in, for example, two-bet games. In this case, for example, achieving a second BB win can further suppress medal loss in restricted play mode. However, if, for example, a second BB win occurs in the fifth game and the second BB state continues for 44 games, the second BB state ends in game 49, and any of the games from game 41 through game 49 can no longer be played in permitted play mode. In other words, the opportunity to transition to the second mode will be missed. This means that even if a second BB win is achieved, the timing of that win becomes even more important, and attention to the number of games continued in the second BB state (the lottery results for each game in the second BB state) will be dramatically increased. This will increase the enjoyment of the game.

The table notification effect is executed through a table notification lottery, which is set so that the probability of winning varies depending on the setting value and the value of the trigger pass counter. More specifically, the larger the value of the trigger pass counter, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. By doing this, the more likely it is that the player does not win the AT mode transition lottery, the more likely it is that they will have an opportunity to enter the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode, and the higher the setting, the more likely it is that they will have an opportunity to enter the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode. Therefore, it is possible to realize setting differences in the AT mode transition rate through the table notification effect, and it is also possible to realize the ceiling function for AT mode transition through the table notification effect.

Furthermore, the probability of winning the table notification lottery is set to differ depending on the type of mode transition table that is set. More specifically, the type of mode transition table, for example, the longer the section in second mode that is set, the easier it is to win the table notification lottery. This can eliminate the absurdity of players not realizing that they have selected a table with a long section in second mode because they are not notified.

<Modification 2>
A modification of the BB state will now be described.

As shown in Figure 65(a), in this modified example, the bonus corresponding to the first to sixth small wins in a two-bet game differs from that in the first embodiment. In this modified example, the bonus corresponding to the first to sixth small wins is the payout of two medals, the same number as the number of bets. Also, as shown in Figure 65(b), the lottery table for the first BB state and the second BB state in this modified example is set to have a high probability (100% probability in this modified example) of winning the common bell with index value IV = 10.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the bonus state processing in this modified example.

The processing of steps S2601 to S2603 is the same as the processing of steps S501 to S503 above, and when the 1st BB or 2nd BB is won and the internal state is entered, the MAX bet counter is set to 3. If it is determined in step S2604 that a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win has occurred, in this modified example, the MAX bet counter is set to 2 in step S2605. Then, if it is determined in step S2606 that a 1st BB win has occurred, in this modified example, the BB counter is input to 110 in step S2607. Thereafter, the 1st BB win flag is cleared in step S2608, the 1st BB state flag is set in step S2609, a 1st BB start command is set in step S2610, and then the specified number of bets is set to 2 in step S2611 before the bonus state processing ends. That is, in this modified example, the first BB state is executed in two bet games and ends when 110 medals are paid out. Furthermore, in the first BB state, the common bell that results in the payout of two medals is always won, so the first BB state takes 55 games to end. In other words, the number of games required to end the first BB state is greater than the number of games required for the specific trigger to occur, and by transitioning to the first BB state, after the first BB state ends, an AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger can always be executed in the lottery mode before transitioning to the first BB state.

If it is determined in step S2606 that the first BB win has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S2612, where 50 is entered into the BB counter. Thereafter, the second BB win flag is cleared in step S2613, the second BB state flag is set in step S2614, a second BB start command is set in step S2615, and then the specified number of bets is set to 2 in step S2611, after which the bonus state processing ends. In other words, in this modified example, the second BB state is also executed in a two-bet game, and ends with the payout of 50 medals, which is less than in the first BB state. Furthermore, since the common bell, which results in the payout of two medals, is always won in the second BB state, the second BB state takes 25 games to end. In other words, the number of games required to end the second BB state is less than the number of games required until a specific trigger occurs, and when a transition to the second BB state is made, after the second BB state ends, an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger can be executed in a lottery mode different from the lottery mode before the transition to the second BB state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2601, steps S2616 to S2618 perform the same process as steps S515 to S517 above, in which the BB counter is decremented based on the winning of a small winning combination. If the BB counter becomes 0 or less, the corresponding BB state flag is cleared in step S2619, the corresponding BB end command is set in step S2620, and the specified number of bets is set to 2 and 3 in step S2621, after which the bonus state processing ends. In other words, since the first BB state and second BB state are performed in a two-bet game and the MAX bet counter is also set to 2, in this modified example, the MAX bet counter change process (step S519) is not performed when transitioning to a non-internal state.

As shown in Figures 65 (c1) and 65 (c2), in the lottery result response processing and winning result response processing in this modified example, in the processing for restricting the execution of processing related to the instruction function when the specific specified number according to the game state is not reached, it is determined in step S2501 or step S2511 whether any of the BB state flags are set, and if it is an unset non-internal state or an internal state, it is determined in step S2502 or step S2512 whether it is a 3-bet game. If it is a 2-bet game and not a 3-bet game, the lottery result response processing and winning result response processing are terminated without further processing. Also, if any of the BB state flags are set, it is determined in step S2503 or step S2513 whether it is a 3-bet game. If it is a 2-bet game and not a 3-bet game, the lottery result response processing and winning result response processing are terminated without further processing. In other words, the specific specified number is set to 3 for all of the non-internal state, internal state, and BB state, and in the case of a 3-bet game, processing related to the instruction function in the lottery result processing and winning result processing (processing from step S604 onwards, processing from step S1104 onwards) is executed.

The processing related to the trigger skip counter in this modified example will be explained. As already explained, the trigger skip counter is a counter corresponding to the number of consecutive times the player has not won the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger, and the larger the value of the trigger skip counter, the higher the occurrence rate of a special notification indicating the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery. Also, in the above modified example 1, the larger the value of the trigger skip counter, the more likely it is that a table notification effect for the mode transition table will occur. In this modified example, the value added to the trigger skip counter when the player has not won the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger will differ depending on the type of state when the specific trigger occurs, including the first BB state and the second BB state, which require different numbers of games to be completed as described above.

Figure 67 (a) shows the trigger adjustment process in this modified example. The trigger adjustment process is executed as a process on the display control device 81 side, for example, in the other all-stop effect setting process in the all-stop effect setting process.

In step S2701, it is determined whether a lottery trigger command has been received. If not, this adjustment process is terminated. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2702, where it is determined whether the current game state is the first BB state. If it is a specific trigger that occurred during the first BB state, in step S2703, a process is executed to set the first BB trigger flag in the various flags storage area 183a, and then this adjustment process is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2704, where it is determined whether the current game state is the second BB state. If a specific trigger occurred during the second BB state, the process sets the second BB trigger flag in the various flag storage area 183a in step S2705, and then terminates this adjustment process.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2704, the process proceeds to step S2706, where it is determined whether the current game was played as a two-bet game. If the special trigger occurred in a two-bet game, the process sets a two-bet trigger flag in the various flags storage area 183a in step S2707, and then the adjustment process ends. If a special trigger is determined in step S2706 to have occurred in a three-bet game, the adjustment process ends immediately.

Figure 67(b) is a flowchart showing part of the AT lottery mode notification process in this modified example.

After a negative judgment is made in step S1703 or the processing of step S1704 is executed, similar to step S1705 above, step S2711 determines whether a trigger non-winning command has been received. If such a command has been received and the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger has not been won, step S2712 determines whether the above-mentioned first BB trigger flag has been set. If it has been set, processing is executed in step S2713 to clear the first BB trigger flag.

If the first BB trigger flag is not set in step S2712, it is determined in step S2714 whether the second BB trigger flag is set. If it is set, the second BB trigger flag is cleared in step S2715, and the trigger skip counter is incremented by 1 in step S2716.

If the second BB trigger flag is not set in step S2714, it is determined in step S2717 whether the 2-bet trigger flag is set. If it is set, the 2-bet trigger flag is cleared in step S2718, and the trigger-through counter is incremented by 2 in step S2719. If the 2-bet trigger flag is not set in step S2717, the trigger-through counter is incremented by 3 in step S2720.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2711, or after executing any of the processes in steps S2713, S2716, S2719, and S2720, the process proceeds to step S1707, where it is determined whether or not an AT winning notification command has been received.

In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, a larger value is added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific trigger that occurred during the second BB state than when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific trigger that occurred during the first BB state; 0 is added in the first BB state, and 1 is added in the second BB state. Furthermore, if the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific trigger that occurred during a two-bet game, a larger value is added to the trigger through counter when the AT mode transition lottery is not won than when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific trigger that occurred during the first BB state or the second BB state; 0 or 1 is added in the first BB state or the second BB state, and 2 is added in the two-bet game. Furthermore, when the AT mode is entered based on a specific trigger that occurs during a 3-bet game, a larger value is added to the trigger through counter if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, compared to when the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on a specific trigger that occurs during a 2-bet game; 2 is added in the case of a 2-bet game, and 3 is added in the case of a 3-bet game.

As described above, by transitioning to the first BB state, it is possible to play 55 games while minimizing the loss of medals, and by transitioning to the first BB state, it is possible to trigger a specific trigger without reducing medals, regardless of the number of games played after transitioning to the advantageous zone. In contrast, by transitioning to the second BB state, it is possible to play 25 games while minimizing the loss of medals, and by triggering a second BB win when the advantageous zone game count AG reaches 25 or later, it is possible to trigger a specific trigger during the second BB state. In other words, in both the first BB state and the second BB state, it is possible to count the advantageous zone game count AG while limiting mode transitions, but the number of games that continue is different, with the first BB state having a longer number of games that continue than the second BB state.

In this case, for example, in a configuration in which the lottery mode is determined by the mode transition table, as in Variation 1, it is conceivable that the player will decide not to enter the AT mode transition lottery based on this specific trigger in the second mode based on the table notification effect. More specifically, if the player realizes from the table notification effect that a mode transition table that is less likely to transition to the high-probability second mode has been selected, or if the mode transition table cannot be identified because the table notification effect is not performed, the player may transition to the first BB state, thereby minimizing the loss of medals and continuing play until the next mode transition table selection trigger. Therefore, as in the above configuration, if a specific trigger occurs during the first BB state, even if the player does not win the AT mode transition lottery based on that specific trigger, a configuration in which a value smaller than normal is added (or not added) to the trigger through counter can be used to prevent the occurrence of special notifications and table notification effects from being unduly increased by repeatedly generating specific triggers via the first BB state as described above.

Furthermore, when a specific trigger occurs during the second BB state, it is highly likely that at least 25 games were played in a non-internal state or an internal state in addition to the 25 games in the second BB state during this advantageous period. As already explained, the number of medals lost per game is greater in non-internal and internal states than in the first BB and second BB states. Therefore, in such cases, by adding a larger value to the trigger skip counter in the second BB state than in the first BB state, it is possible to compensate for the medal loss in the non-internal and internal states described above.

Furthermore, even in non-internal and internal states, a 3-bet game results in a greater number of medal losses per game than a 2-bet game. Furthermore, because a transition to lottery mode can occur in a 3-bet game, even after transitioning to second mode, there is a possibility that playing a 3-bet game will result in a transition to first mode before a specific trigger occurs. Therefore, by adding a larger value to the trigger skip counter in a 3-bet game than in a 2-bet game, it is possible to compensate for the risk of medal losses in non-internal and internal states, as well as transitions to lottery mode.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, the number of games required until a specific opportunity occurs is determined by lottery. Figure 68(a) is a flowchart showing the processing for the advantageous zone transition game in this modified example. Note that this modified example will be described based on the first embodiment.

In step S2801, a lottery process for the trigger game is executed. The lottery process for the trigger game is a process for determining by lottery the number of games within the advantageous zone required until a specific trigger occurs. For example, one of the game numbers from 1 to 100 is randomly determined as the number of games required until the specific trigger occurs. Note that the setting value may have an effect on this lottery, such that the higher the setting value, the more likely a smaller number of games is selected, and the lower the setting value, the more likely a larger number of games is selected.

In step S2802, the number of trigger games determined in step S2801 above is stored in the various counter area 106e, for example by inputting it into the trigger counter. Then, in step S2803, the number of trigger games command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the processing for this advantageous zone transition game is terminated.

The display control device 81 may be configured to not execute, for example, game count notification effects, lottery preview effects, or standby effects, making it impossible or difficult for the player to identify that a specific trigger has occurred. This adds a game of predicting that the lottery mode has shifted to the second mode, which has a higher probability, and predicting that a specific trigger has occurred or the number of games required until the specific trigger occurs, making the game even more interesting.

In this case, for example, the configuration may be such that whether or not to execute a lottery for the game count notification effect, lottery preview effect, or standby effect is determined by lottery, and the probability of winning such a lottery may be influenced by a set value or the value of the trigger pass counter. In other words, the higher the set value, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects, and the higher the value of the trigger pass counter, the higher the occurrence rate of these effects.

Figure 68(b) is a flowchart showing the lottery trigger determination process in this modified example.

In step S2811, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG matches the number of trigger games (trigger counter) stored in step S2802 above. If it is not the trigger game, the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If it is the trigger game number, the lottery trigger flag is set in step S2812, and in step S2813, a process is executed to set the lottery trigger command as an output target to the display control device 81, after which the lottery trigger determination process is terminated.

By doing this, the number of games in which a specific trigger occurs is diversified, making it difficult for players to know how long to continue playing the games required until a specific trigger occurs using limited play. Therefore, in addition to games that predict lottery modes, games that predict games in which a specific trigger occurs are added, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the special notification is performed in a different manner. Fig. 69 is a flowchart showing the special notification process in this modified example. As already explained, the special notification process is the process executed in step S1806 in the full stop effect setting process.

In step S2901, it is determined whether the current game is a favorable zone transition game. If it is a favorable zone transition game, in step S2902, a process is executed to determine the trigger skip counter value. Then, in step S2903, a transition navigation lottery process is executed. The transition navigation lottery process is a process for conducting a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a transition navigation notification indicating that the lottery mode has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode. In the transition navigation lottery process, a transition navigation lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and a lottery is conducted to execute the transition navigation notification. As shown in FIG. 70, the transition navigation lottery table is set so that the winning rate of the transition navigation lottery varies depending on the trigger skip counter and the setting value. The larger the value of the trigger skip counter, the easier it is to win, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. Furthermore, when the trigger skip counter value is small, an even number setting is more likely to win than an odd number setting, and as the trigger skip counter value increases, an odd number setting is more likely to win than an even number setting.

In step S2904, it is determined whether the transition navigation lottery in step S2903 above has been won, and if so, in step S2905, a process is executed to set a navigation flag in the various flag storage area 183a. The navigation flag is a flag used to know in advance that a special notification will be issued when the lottery mode transitions to the first mode or the second mode.

In other words, in this modified example, the display control device 81 does not know in real time whether it is in first mode or second mode, but only knows that a transition to the first mode or second mode lottery mode has occurred. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 71, in the AT lottery mode notification process in this modified example, if a first mode transition command or a second mode transition command is received in step S3001, it is determined in step S3002 whether the above-mentioned navigation flag is set. If the navigation flag is set, a special notification flag is set in the various flags storage area 183a in step S3003.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3001 or step S3002, or after the processing of step S3003 is performed, processing for managing the trigger skip counter is performed in steps S3004 to S3007. The processing of these steps S3004 to S3007 is the same as the processing of steps S1705 to S1708 above.

Returning to the explanation of the special notification processing, if a negative judgment is made in step S2901 or step S2904, or if the processing of step S2905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2906. In step S2906, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special notification flag is set. If the special notification flag is set, the special notification flag is cleared in step S2907, and in step S2908, effect settings are executed so that a special notification is executed on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 as an effect when all the balls are stopped, and then the special notification processing ends.

In other words, in this modified example, a special notification can be executed as an effect when all reels have stopped in a game that has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode, or from the second mode to the first mode. Therefore, a player who sees the special notification can predict whether the lottery mode has transitioned from the first mode to the second mode or from the second mode to the first mode based on the lottery results of the game, the presence or absence of special notifications in previous games, the lottery results, etc. If the player predicts a transition to the second mode, the next game can be switched to limited play, and a specific trigger can be generated while maintaining the second mode. This adds the fun of considering the lottery results of the game when predicting mode transitions, compared to a configuration in which the second mode is directly notified by a special notification, and increases the excitement of predicting the lottery mode.

In other words, a transition from first mode to second mode is likely to occur with a specific role, known as a rare role, and can also occur with some normal RIP A through normal RIP C. Meanwhile, a transition from second mode to first mode does not occur with a specific role, but occurs with normal RIP A through normal RIP C. If a special notification occurs in a game in which a specific role is won, a transition to second mode is confirmed. In contrast, if a special notification occurs in a game in which a normal RIP A through normal RIP C are won, a transition to first mode may occur, or a transition to second mode may occur. For example, if a special notification occurs in a game in which a specific role is won, and then a special notification occurs in a game in which a normal RIP A through normal RIP C are won, the special notification in that game in which a normal RIP A through normal RIP C are won is likely to correspond to a transition to first mode. In this way, it becomes necessary to predict the lottery mode by taking into account not only the game in which the special notification occurred, but also the game content of games prior to that game. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the above configuration, the display control device 81 does not know whether the first mode or second mode is active, but is instead configured to notify the transition to lottery mode. Therefore, while processing related to the player's interests, such as the lottery processing for each game, management of advantageous zones, and whether or not to transition to display mode, is concentrated on the main control device 101, by consolidating the processing related to presentation on the display control device 81, it is possible to achieve playability using lottery mode while maintaining the benefits of distributing the processing load and facilitating fraud prevention measures by consolidating the control devices that should take fraud prevention measures.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, the manner in which the AT mode transition lottery is executed is changed. Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the reel control process in this embodiment.

This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that after the second section display process is executed, a random number acquisition process (step S3117) is executed before the winning result command is executed. The other processes (steps S3101 to S3116, step S3118) are the same as the processes in steps S401 to S417 in the first embodiment.

<Random number acquisition process>
The random number acquisition process of step S3117 is a process for acquiring in advance a random number for use in the AT mode transition lottery. As described above, the random number acquisition process is performed after the stop operation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been performed in the reel control process. In other words, the random number acquisition process is performed based on the third stop OFF operation in the third stop operation among the stop operations of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, in step S3201, it is determined whether the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set. If neither of the BB state flags is set, it is determined in step S3202 whether the game to be ended this time is a three-bet game. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S3201 that either of the BB state flags is set, it is determined in step S3203 whether the game to be ended this time is a two-bet game. In other words, the processing in steps S3201 to S3203 is processing to determine whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, and processing to determine whether the state is a permissive state in which execution of processing related to the instruction function is permitted or a restricted state in which execution is restricted. If it is determined in step S3202 that it is a two-bet game, or if it is determined in step S3203 that it is a three-bet game, the random number acquisition processing is terminated without executing the processing to acquire random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery from step S3204 onwards.

If step S3202 determines that the game is a three-bet game, or if step S3203 determines that the game is a two-bet game, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, a process is executed to obtain the AT counter stored in the various counter area 106e of RAM 106. The AT counter corresponds to a random number used in the AT mode transition lottery, and is a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 1 to 128 each time the timer update process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process is initiated, and returns to 1 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 128).

In addition, like the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit may be used, and the hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter before the processing of step S3204 (for example, when the third stop ON operation is performed), and the latched value may be read in step S3204.In addition, the latched value may be temporarily stored in a specified area of RAM 106 until the processing of step S3204 is performed.

In step S3205, the AT counter value acquired in step S3204 is stored in the lottery information storage area 106g of RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 74, the lottery information storage area 106g includes a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The storage area RE consists of multiple storage areas, including a first storage area RE1 to a tenth storage area RE10.

When the AT counter acquisition conditions are met, the AT counters are stored in chronological order in the first memory area RE1 to the tenth memory area RE10, in the order of the first memory area RE1 → second memory area RE2 → third memory area RE3, etc. By having ten memory areas as multiple memory areas, up to ten random numbers used in the AT mode transition lottery can be stored.

In step S3205, the AT counter value acquired in step S3204 is stored in the area with the smallest number (lowest area) among the free areas in the first storage area RE1 to the tenth storage area RE10. For example, if AT counter values are stored in each of the first storage area RE1 to the ninth storage area RE9 and the tenth storage area RE10 is a free area, in step S3205 the AT counter value acquired in step S3204 is stored in the tenth storage area RE10.

Note that the configuration is not limited to storing the AT counter value as is, but may also store information corresponding to the AT counter value, and may, for example, convert the AT counter value into a value for AT mode lottery before storing it.

In step S3206, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number acquisition process is terminated. The AT command contains information corresponding to the AT counter value stored this time, as well as information corresponding to the AT counter values stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10. Therefore, by receiving the AT command, the display control device 81 can grasp the information in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 in the lottery information storage area 106g.

The above random number acquisition process is initiated regardless of the lottery results of each game, and the AT counter is acquired regardless of the lottery results of each game. In other words, the AT counter is acquired independently of the lottery results of the game at the time of acquisition.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the lottery result response processing in this embodiment.

This embodiment differs from the lottery result response processing of the first embodiment in that it performs random number shift processing to update the AT counter storage area acquired in the random number acquisition processing for each game in which an AT mode transition lottery may be executed. That is, in steps S3301 to S3303, similar to steps S601 to S603 above, processing is performed to determine whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number corresponding to the gaming status, and then in step S3304, random number shift processing is performed. After the random number shift processing is performed, in steps S3305 to S3313, similar to steps S604 to S612 above, processing related to the instruction function is performed, such as processing for transitioning to an advantageous zone, processing for AT mode, and processing for notifying the push order.

<Random number shift processing>
The random number shifting process in step S3304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S3401, the random number information for the lottery (information corresponding to the AT counter) stored in the first memory area RE1 of the memory areas RE1 to RE10 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the random number information stored in the first memory area RE1 is cleared. The execution area AE is an area for storing random number information used in the AT mode transition lottery if an AT mode transition lottery is held in the current game. When the AT mode transition lottery is held, the information corresponding to the AT counter stored in the execution area AE is obtained as the random number information to be used in the current AT mode transition lottery. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery is held based on the information shifted to the execution area AE from the AT counter information previously obtained.

In the following step S3402, the information stored in each of the storage areas RE2 to RE10 is shifted to the lower area. Specifically, the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the first storage area RE1, and the information stored in the second storage area RE2 is cleared. The information in each area is then shifted in order, from the third storage area RE3 to the second storage area RE2, the fourth storage area RE4 to the third storage area RE3, ... the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9. In this case, only information is shifted from the tenth storage area RE10 to the ninth storage area RE9; no new information is shifted. In other words, the information in the tenth storage area RE10 is cleared, and the tenth storage area RE10 becomes an empty area.

In the following step S3403, a process is executed to set the shift command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process is terminated. The shift command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to know that the above-mentioned shift of the AT counter has occurred.

Next, the AT lottery processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 77.

In this embodiment, first, processing for the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S3501 to S3505, and then processing for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in steps S3506 to S3518.

In this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger described in the first embodiment above is not set, nor is the configuration (step S1313) in which the advantageous zone ends if the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won. In other words, as shown in FIG. 78, in the second zone display process in this embodiment, similar to steps S1301 to S1307, processing during the advantageous zone is executed in steps S3601 to S3607, and then a determination is made in step S3608 as to whether the forced termination condition for the advantageous zone is met. If the condition is met, processing for terminating the advantageous zone is executed in steps S3609 to S3611, similar to steps S1309 to S1311. If the forced termination condition is not met, a determination is made in step S3612 as to whether the AT mode termination flag is set. If the flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3609 and processing for terminating the advantageous zone is executed. If the AT mode termination flag is not set, the second zone display process is terminated.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery is determined by the mode transition table and the number of advantageous zone games AG, as in Variation 1 of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 80, the mode transition table in this embodiment, like the mode transition table in Variation 1 of the first embodiment, is configured with a first mode on the low probability side and a second mode on the high probability side depending on the value of the number of advantageous zone games AG. In this embodiment, the last two digits of the value of the number of advantageous zone games AG correspond to the lottery mode. More specifically, for example, in the mode transition table for address information M0001, if the last two digits of the number of advantageous zone games AG are 1 to 59, the first mode is selected, and if the last two digits are 60 to 99, the second mode is selected. In this embodiment, with respect to the mode transition tables with multiple types, each mode transition table is configured so that regardless of the value of the number of advantageous zone games AG, either the first mode or the second mode occurs. In other words, the type of lottery mode is not determined solely by the number of advantageous zone games AG. Furthermore, the mode transition table in this embodiment is also set to include at least a section that is the second mode, and no mode transition table is set to the first mode regardless of the value of the advantageous zone game count AG. In contrast, the mode transition table for address information MXXXX is set to the second mode for all advantageous zone game count AG values from 1 to 99, and is a mode transition table that does not include a section that is the first mode.

The mode transition table is updated every predetermined number of games, and in this embodiment, it is configured to be updated every 100 games after a transition to the favorable zone. In the processing for the favorable zone transition game performed in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79(a), a lottery process for the mode transition table is executed in step S3701. In the following step S3702, based on the processing result of step S3701, the address information of the determined mode transition table is stored in the address information storage area 106f. Then, in step S3703, the table command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Then, in step S3704, 100 is entered into the mode transition trigger counter in the various counter area 106e, and the processing for this favorable zone transition game is terminated. The mode transition trigger counter is a counter that the CPU 102 uses to determine the trigger for the lottery for the mode transition table. It is decremented by one each time a game is played, and when it reaches 0, a lottery trigger for the mode transition table occurs. In other words, in this embodiment, the mode transition table can be updated not only when transitioning to an advantageous zone, but also every time 100 games are played.

In the lottery trigger determination process of this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79(b), first, in step S3711, a subtraction process is performed on the mode transition trigger counter set in step S3704 above. Then, in step S3712, it is determined whether the mode transition trigger counter has reached 0. If it has reached 0, in step S3713, a process is performed to set a mode transition trigger flag in the various flags storage area 106d. Then, in step S3714, 100 is entered into the mode transition trigger counter, and the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If the mode transition trigger counter is not 0 in step S3712, it is determined in step S3715 whether the mode transition trigger counter is 5. If it is not 5, the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. If the mode transition trigger counter is 5, in step S3716, a process is performed to set a notification restriction command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the lottery trigger determination process is terminated. The notification restriction command will be described in detail later.

Returning to the explanation of the AT lottery process, in step S3501, it is determined whether the above-mentioned mode transition trigger flag is set. If the mode transition trigger flag is set, in step S3502, processing is executed to clear the mode transition trigger flag. Then, in step S3503, lottery processing for the mode transition table is executed in the same manner as in step S3701. Thereafter, in step S3504, address information for the mode transition table is stored based on the processing result of step S3503, and in step S3505, the table command is set as an output target to the display control device 81.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3501, or after the processing of step S3505 is executed, a process is executed in step S3506 to determine the current mode transition table. Then, in step S3507, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is determined, and based on the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, it is determined in step S3508 whether the current lottery mode is the first mode. If it is the first mode, in step S3509, a process is executed to obtain the first AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a. If it is the second mode, in step S3510, a process is executed to obtain the second AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in Figure 81, the AT mode transition lottery table for first and the AT mode transition lottery table for second determine the AT counter value that will result in a winning AT mode transition lottery depending on the lottery results of each game. For example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for first, if the lottery result of the game is normal reply A, the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the AT counter is 128, and will not be won if the AT counter is 1 to 127. Also, if the lottery result of the game is chance eye B, the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the AT counter is 1 to 8, and will not be won if the AT counter is 9 to 128.

In contrast, the AT mode transition lottery table for second use is set up so that there are more types of AT counter values associated with the lottery results of each game than in the AT mode transition lottery table for first use. For example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for second use, if the lottery result of the game is normal reply A, the AT mode transition lottery will be won not only if the AT counter is 128 but also if it is 1 to 4, but will not be won if the AT counter is 5 to 127. Also, if the lottery result of the game is chance eye B, the AT mode transition lottery will be won not only if the AT counter is 1 to 8 but also if it is 9 to 64, but will not be won if the AT counter is 65 to 128.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step S3509 or step S3510, the game lottery results are determined in step S3511, and in step S3512, processing is executed to obtain information corresponding to the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE in the random number shift processing described above as random number information to be used in this AT mode transition lottery.

Then, in step S3513, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and in step S3514, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery has been won, in step S3515, a process is executed to set the AT mode win flag, and in step S3516, a process is executed to set the AT win notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. If it is determined in step S3514 that the player has not won, in step S3517, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game used in this AT mode transition lottery was a specific role, known as a rare role. If it was a specific role, in step S3518, a process is executed to set the trigger non-win command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. If it is not a specific role, the AT lottery process is terminated as is.

Next, we will explain the processing on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, compared to the first embodiment described above, the processing configuration for notifying the lottery mode of the AT mode transition lottery and the processing configuration for executing the notification effect of the AT mode transition lottery result are different, and a processing configuration for notifying the AT counter obtained in advance as described above has also been added.

In other words, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, the start-up effect setting process in this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the AT lottery mode notification process (step S3808) and the configuration for executing the AT mode transition lottery result notification effect (steps S3809 to S3810). Also, in this embodiment, after performing the process for executing the AT mode transition lottery result notification effect, step S3811 adds a hold display process for notifying the previously acquired AT counter before executing other start-up effect setting processes (step S3812).

Furthermore, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 83, in the full stop effect setting process in this embodiment, the configuration of the lottery trigger notification process (step S3905) and the configuration of the special notification process (step S3906) differ from those in the first embodiment described above. Also, in this embodiment, after executing the process for setting the AT end notification effect (step S3902) and the special notification process (step S3906), and before executing other full stop effect setting processes (step S3908), a hold shift process for notifying a pre-acquired AT counter is added in step S3907.

<Hold display processing>
First, the hold display processing executed in step S3811 of the start-up performance setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 84.

In step S4001, it is determined whether or not the system is in AT mode. If it is in AT mode, the pending display processing is terminated. If it is not in AT mode, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not an AT command has been received. If an AT command has not been received, the pending display processing is terminated. If an AT command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4003. As already explained, an AT command is received when the random number acquisition processing (Figure 73) on the main control unit 101 determines that the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the gaming status.

In step S4003, based on the information contained in the received AT command, a process is performed to store the AT counter information corresponding to each memory area RE1 to RE10 in the pending information memory area of RAM 183. Although detailed explanation using figures is omitted, the pending information memory area on the display control device 81 side has a configuration similar to the lottery information memory area 106g on the main control device 101 side, and has memory areas (1st memory area to 10th memory area) capable of storing AT counter information for 10 games (10 AT mode transition lotteries), as well as an execution area for storing AT counter information for the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. In step S4003, based on the received AT command, the AT counter information in the first storage area RE1 on the main control unit 101 side is stored in the first storage area in the hold information storage area, the AT counter information in the second storage area RE2 is stored in the second storage area in the hold information storage area, the AT counter information in the tenth storage area RE10 is stored in the tenth storage area in the hold information storage area, and the AT counter information in the execution area AE is stored in the execution area in the hold information storage area.

In the following step S4004, a pending display lottery process is performed. The pending display lottery process is a lottery process in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the display corresponding to the AT counter acquired at the current acquisition opportunity will be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Here, we will explain the hold display shown on the auxiliary display unit 65 with reference to Figure 85.

As shown in Figure 85 (a), a hold display area Dr is set at the bottom as a specified display area in the auxiliary display unit 65. The hold display area Dr is partitioned so that unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10, the same number as the maximum number of AT counters that can be stored in the hold information storage area, are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the hold display area Dr is set to include the first unit hold display area Dr1, the second unit hold display area Dr2, the third unit hold display area Dr3, the fourth unit hold display area Dr4, the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, the sixth unit hold display area Dr6, the seventh unit hold display area Dr7, the eighth unit hold display area Dr8, the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and the tenth unit hold display area Dr10. Additionally, adjacent to the hold display area Dr is an execution display area Dp, set to the left of the hold display area Dr (to the left of the first unit hold display area Dr1), for displaying the hold of the AT counter stored in the execution area of the hold information storage area. The execution display area Dp is partitioned as an area larger than each of the unit hold display areas Dr1-Dr10, allowing the player to clearly distinguish between the hold display for the AT mode transition lottery for the current game and the hold display for the AT mode transition lottery for a later game.

As shown in Figure 85 (b), the first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 are set as hold displays to be displayed in the execution display area Dp and the hold display area Dr. The first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 are displayed in a manner that corresponds to the value of the AT counter: if the AT counter is 1 to 4, the first special image P1 is displayed; if the AT counter is 5 to 8, the second special image P2 is displayed; if the AT counter is 9 to 64, the third special image P3 is displayed; if the AT counter is 65 to 94, the fourth special image P4 is displayed; if the AT counter is 95 to 127, the fifth special image P5 is displayed; and if the AT counter is 128, the sixth special image P6 is displayed.

The first special image P1 to the sixth special image P6 are displayed with different characters and colors so that players can distinguish between them. Figure 85(a) shows the second special image P2 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, the fifth special image P5 displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3, the sixth special image P6 displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Dr8, the first special image P1 displayed in the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and the first special image P1 displayed in the execution display area Dp.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is conducted using the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE and the game lottery results. In this case, for example, if the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp for a game and the game is in first mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won if any of Chance Eye A to Chance Eye C, Cherry A to Cherry C, or Watermelon appears; otherwise, the AT mode transition lottery is not won (Figure 81(a)). Also, for example, if the sixth special image P6 is displayed in the execution display area Dp for a game and the game is in second mode, the AT mode transition lottery is won if any of Normal Lip A to Normal Lip C, Chance Eye C, Cherry C, Common Bell, or Push Order Bell appears; otherwise, the AT mode transition lottery is not won (Figure 81(b)).

Returning to the explanation of the hold display processing, the hold display lottery process performed in step S4004 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to display the hold display corresponding to the AT counter currently acquired from the currently received AT command (basically the hold display corresponding to the 10th unit hold display area Dr10). In this embodiment, the winning probability of this lottery is set to approximately a 1 in 5 probability, resulting in the display of the hold display. In this case, the winning probability of the hold display lottery is set to be greater than the reciprocal of the number of unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10, and is set to a probability such that, on average, at least one hold display (two in the above case) will be displayed in each of the multiple unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr10.

After executing the processing of step S4004, in step S4005, it is determined whether or not the pending display lottery has been won. If not, the pending display processing is terminated; if so, the processing proceeds to step S4006. In step S4006, processing is executed to read image data corresponding to the special image corresponding to the AT counter acquired at the current acquisition trigger from ROM 182. Then, in step S4007, processing is executed to display the special image corresponding to the read image data in the unit pending display area corresponding to the AT counter acquired at the current acquisition trigger. More specifically, the currently acquired AT counter is stored in the empty area with the lowest number (basically the 10th storage area) among the empty areas in the pending information storage area, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the special image corresponding to the currently acquired AT counter is displayed in the unit pending display area corresponding to the area where the AT counter is stored (basically the 10th unit pending display area Dr10). After executing the processing of step S4007, the pending display processing is terminated.

<Processing for holding shift>
Next, with reference to Figure 86, we will explain the hold shift processing for shifting the display area of the hold display started as described above in accordance with the progress of the game.

In step S4101, it is determined whether a shift command has been received from the main control unit 101. If a shift command has not been received, the pending shift process is terminated. As already explained, the shift command is a command output in the random number shift process when the number of bets in the lottery result response process on the main control unit 101 is a specific prescribed number corresponding to the gaming status.

If a shift command has been received, in step S4102, a process is performed to clear the hold display in the execution display area Dp. More specifically, if a special image is displayed as a hold display in the execution display area Dp, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the special image; if no special image is displayed in the execution display area Dp, this state is maintained. Then, in step S4103, a process is performed to shift the hold display in the first unit hold display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp. More specifically, if a hold display of a special image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, this hold display is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to erase the hold display displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1; if no hold display is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, this state is maintained. In the following step S4104, a process is performed to shift the hold display in each unit hold display area to a lower display area. More specifically, the hold display of the special image displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, and the hold display displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 is erased. The hold display in each unit hold display area is shifted in order from the third unit hold display area Dr3 to the second unit hold display area Dr2, the fourth unit hold display area Dr4 to the third unit hold display area Dr3, ... the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 to the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and so on. In this case, for unit hold display areas where a hold display is not being displayed, the state where no hold display is being displayed is shifted to the lower unit hold display area. Then, the hold display is simply shifted from the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 to the ninth unit hold display area Dr9, and no new hold display is shifted. In other words, the hold display in the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 is cleared, and the tenth unit hold display area Dr10 is left in a state where no hold display is being displayed. If no shift command is received in step S4101, or after the processing of step S4104 is executed, this pending shift processing ends.

<Relationship between AT mode transition lottery and hold display>
The manner in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the AT counter acquired in advance will be described with reference to Figures 87 and 88.

In Figures 87(a1) and 87(b1), in the situation before (at the start of) the game, Figure 87(a1) shows the hold display area Dr and the execution display area Dp in the auxiliary display unit 65, and Figure 87(b1) shows the memory area RE and execution area AE in the lottery information memory area 106g. For example, "73" is stored in the execution area AE as information corresponding to the AT counter, and the execution display area Dp displays the fourth special image P4 as a hold display corresponding to that AT counter. Furthermore, as a random number used in the AT mode transition lottery for the next game, "35" is stored in the first memory area RE1 as information corresponding to the AT counter, and the first unit hold display area Dr1 displays the third special image P3 as a hold display corresponding to that AT counter. In this situation, we will explain what happens when the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game and a watermelon is won in the lottery process for the next game.

If the number of bets on the current game is a specific specified number according to the game status, random number shift processing and reserve shift processing are performed based on the operation of the start lever 41. Figures 87(a2) and 87(b2) show a situation in which the AT counter information and reserve display have been shifted by one game from the situation in Figures 87(a1) and 87(b1). The AT counter information stored in the first memory area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the third special image P3 displayed in the first unit reserve display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp. Figures 87(a1) and 87(b2) also show how the tenth memory area RE10 and the tenth unit reserve display area Dr10 become empty areas as a result of the random number shift processing and reserve shift processing.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is conducted based on the information from the AT counter shifted to the execution area AE, the lottery result information for the current game, and the AT mode transition lottery table. The AT mode transition lottery table is set up with a first AT mode transition lottery table on the low probability side and a second AT mode transition lottery table on the high probability side. In this case, when an AT mode transition lottery is conducted using the AT counter (35) shifted to the execution area AE in Figure 87 (a2) above, the result will be a non-winning result in the first AT mode transition lottery table, but a winning result in the second AT mode transition lottery table (Figure 81).

As described above, in a game in which a watermelon win occurs (a game in which the AT mode transition lottery is won), if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a watermelon win can be achieved, as shown in Figure 88. The random number acquisition process is performed based on the third stop OFF operation, and Figure 88(b) shows that the AT counter for the tenth memory area RE10 is acquired based on the third stop OFF operation that achieves a watermelon win. Then, by storing the AT counter in the tenth memory area RE10, the sixth special image P6 can be displayed as a hold display corresponding to that AT counter, as shown in Figure 88(a).

As described above, in a configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is conducted using a pre-acquired AT counter, a hold display corresponding to that AT counter is displayed, allowing the player to proceed with the game while knowing in advance the lottery results for games that could win the AT mode transition lottery. For example, if the sixth special image P6 corresponding to a normal role, such as a normal lip A to normal lip C, a common bell, or a push order bell, is displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3 as a hold display corresponding to three games later, the player can play three games in the hope of winning a normal role three games later, rather than one or two games later, significantly increasing the enjoyment of each game. In this case, when the sixth special image P6 is displayed as described above, in the first mode (low probability side), only a normal role corresponds to a win for AT mode transition, but in the second mode (high probability side), in addition to a normal role, a cherry C or a chance eye C also corresponds to a win for AT mode transition.

In particular, when the first special image P1 or the second special image P2 is displayed for normal roles such as normal replies A to C and the push order bell, which have a high probability of winning in non-internal states and in each game during internal states, in the first mode, none of the normal roles correspond to a win for transition to AT mode. However, in the second mode, if the first special image P1 is displayed, any normal role corresponds to a win for transition to AT mode, and if the second special image P2 is displayed, the push order bell, which is a normal role, corresponds to a win for transition to AT mode.

As already explained above, pre-acquisition and shifting of the AT counter are performed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, and pre-acquisition and shifting of the AT counter are restricted when the number of bets is not the specific prescribed number. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first mode and second mode are determined by the number of games in the advantageous zone AG, and transitions between the first mode and the second mode occur regardless of whether the number of bets is the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. In other words, by playing in a restricted state with a bet other than the specific prescribed number, it is possible to transition between the first mode and the second mode while retaining the pre-acquisition AT counter.

In other words, for example, the above-mentioned first special image P1 and second special image P2 are hold displays that are displayed when the AT counter value is 1 to 8, and are obtained with a probability of 8 in 128 and displayed if the hold display lottery is won (50%). Therefore, their appearance rate is relatively lower than other special images. Therefore, if you can enter the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter corresponding to the first special image P1 or second special image P2, there is an advantage to playing in a restricted state in which the AT counter shift is restricted until the AT mode transition lottery using that AT counter is executed in second mode. Therefore, this embodiment realizes gameplay that allows the player to decide whether or not to play in a restricted state in relation to the hold display.

<AT lottery mode notification processing>
Figure 89(a) is a flowchart showing the AT lottery mode notification process in this embodiment.

In step S4201, it is determined whether a table command has been received. As already explained, a table command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the mode transition table is updated in the advantageous zone transition game processing (Figure 79) or the AT lottery processing (Figure 77). If a table command has been received, in step S4202, a process is executed to store the address information of the mode transition table in the address information storage area 183c. In the following step S4203, a process is executed to increment the table update counter provided in the various counter area 183b by 1. The table update counter is a counter that allows the CPU 181 to keep track of the number of consecutive times the mode transition table has been updated without winning the AT mode transition lottery. In the following step S4204, a process is executed to clear the notification restriction flag provided in the various flag storage area 183a.

The notification restriction flag is a flag used to restrict the execution of a suggestive effect in lottery mode when that suggestive effect is being performed. The notification restriction flag is set when a notification declaration command output from the main control unit 101 is received when the mode transition trigger counter reaches 5. That is, as shown in FIG. 89(b), in this embodiment, the notification restriction process is performed as part of the other all-stop effect setting process (step S1808) in the all-stop effect setting process. In this process, a determination is made in step S4211 as to whether a notification restriction command has been received, and if so, the notification restriction flag is set in step S4212. If a negative determination is made in step S4211, or after the process of step S4212 has been executed, the notification restriction process is terminated. The process for restricting the execution of a suggestive effect in lottery mode when the notification restriction flag is set will be described in detail later. Note that if the notification restriction flag is not set in step S4204, its state is maintained.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4201, or after executing the processing of step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4205, where it is determined whether or not a trigger non-winning command has been received. As already explained, the trigger non-winning command in this embodiment is a command output from the main control unit 101 when the lottery result of the game used in the AT mode transition lottery is a specific combination and the AT mode transition lottery is not won. If a trigger non-winning command has been received, processing is executed in step S4206 to increment the trigger skip counter by 1. In this embodiment, the trigger skip counter is a counter that allows the CPU 181 to keep track of the consecutive number of times the AT mode transition lottery using a specific combination has not been won.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4205, or after the processing of step S4206 is executed, it is determined in step S4207 whether an AT winning notification command has been received. If an AT winning notification command has been received, in step S4208, the above-mentioned table update counter and trigger through counter are cleared to 0, and then the AT lottery mode notification processing is terminated. If an AT winning notification command has not been received in step S4207, the AT lottery mode notification processing is terminated as is.

<Lottery opportunity notification processing>
In the lottery trigger notification process in this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, a process is executed to notify that the number of bets is not a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, but is in a limited state.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 90, in step S4301, it is determined whether the current game is a three-bet game, and if it is a three-bet game, in step S4302 it is determined whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state. If it is a three-bet game and the first BB state or the second BB state is not present, the lottery trigger notification process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a two-bet game, or if it is a three-bet game but the first BB state or the second BB state and the restricted state is present, in step S4303, settings are executed to display a random number update restriction notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or speaker 64, and then the lottery trigger notification process is terminated. As a random number update restriction notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 95(b), the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the word "HOLD!!" to notify that the restricted state is present. In this embodiment, the random number update restriction notification effect is described as being similar to the mode transition restriction notification effect described above, but these effects may be different from each other as long as they at least allow the player to understand that each restriction state exists.

<Special notification processing>
In the special notification process of this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 91, in step S4401, a process is executed to grasp the current mode transition table by referencing the address information storage area 183c. In the following step S4402, a process is executed to grasp the number of advantageous zone games AG based on the received advantageous zone game command. Then, in step S4403, it is determined whether the lottery mode for the current AT mode transition lottery is the second mode. If it is the first mode and not the second mode, in step S4404, an effect setting is executed to perform an effect for the first mode on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. For example, as shown in FIG. 93(a), an effect for displaying the main character on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set as the effect for the first mode.

In contrast, if it is determined in step S4403 that the mode is second mode, second mode notification lottery processing is executed in step S4405, and if the notification lottery is won (step S4406: YES), effect settings are executed in step S4407 to display second mode effects on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64. As the second mode effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 93(b), an effect is set in which flames burn behind the main character on the auxiliary display unit 65, showing the main character becoming more and more motivated.

In other words, the player can tell whether the current game mode is first mode or second mode based on the presence or absence of a flame behind the main character displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In the second mode notification lottery process of step S4405, the second mode notification lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and the setting value and table update counter set in the winning probability setting process are obtained to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a second mode effect in the current game. As shown in FIG. 92(a), the second mode notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the second mode notification lottery differs depending on the setting value and the table update counter. Specifically, the larger the table update counter value, the easier it is to win, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. More specifically, with an odd setting, if the table update counter value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (2), the winning probability is higher than with an even setting. With an even setting, if the table update counter value is less than the predetermined value, the winning probability is higher than with an odd setting.

If the second mode notification lottery process in step S4405 results in a non-winning result, the first mode effect setting process is performed in step S4404. Note that the second mode notification lottery process may not be executed, and the second mode effect may always be performed if the second mode is selected.

After executing the processing of step S4404 or step S4407, step S4408 determines whether the notification restriction flag is set. If the notification restriction flag is set and there are five games remaining until the mode transition table update game, and the mode transition table has not been updated since then, the processing of steps S4410 to S4414 to execute the mode prediction effect as a prediction effect for the future lottery mode is not performed, and the special notification processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4408, a prediction notification lottery process is executed in step S4409. In the prediction notification lottery process, a prediction notification lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a, and the table update counter and trigger pass counter are grasped to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a mode prediction effect in the current game. As shown in Figure 92 (b), the prediction notification lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the prediction notification lottery differs depending on the table update counter and the trigger pass counter. Specifically, the higher the value of the table update counter, the easier it is to win, and the higher the value of the trigger pass counter, the easier it is to win.

In step S4410, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in step S4409 resulted in a win. If not, the special notification process is terminated. If a win has occurred, the process proceeds to step S4411, where the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG are used to determine whether or not the lottery mode will be updated after a predetermined number of games (after five games). An update trigger game is a game in which the first mode is updated to the second mode, or a game in which the second mode is updated to the first mode. Specifically, it is a game in which the last two digits of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG are 01, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90 (Figure 80). If the game five games later is not an update trigger game, the special notification process is terminated. If an update trigger game is determined, in step S4412, the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG are used to determine whether or not the mode will be updated to the second mode after five games. If the mode is updated to the first mode instead of the second mode, in step S4413, effect settings are executed to display the first mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then the special notification process is terminated. As the first mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(b), an effect is set in which a candle character with its flame extinguished is displayed in an area of the auxiliary display unit 65 different from the area in which the main character is displayed.

If it is determined in step S4412 that the mode will be updated to the second mode after the predetermined number of games, in step S4414, effect settings are executed to display the second mode prediction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64, and then the special notification process is terminated. As the second mode prediction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 94(a), an effect is set to display a candle character with a burning flame in an area different from the area where the main character is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

<Game flow and hold display>
The relationship between the game flow using the restricted state game and the reserved display will be described with reference to Figures 95 to 98. Figure 95 shows the game flow when the restricted state game is not played, and Figure 96 shows the game flow when the restricted state game is played.

Figure 95(a) shows, for example, a situation in which the first special image P1 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, the fifth special image P5 is displayed in the third unit hold display area Dr3 and the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, and the first mode is in effect for three games including the current game (the last two digits of the advantageous zone game count AG value are 17-19), and the second mode is in effect from the fourth game onwards (the last two digits of the advantageous zone game count AG value are 20-29).

When such a situation is played in a non-internal state or a 3-bet game in an internal state, the lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery will shift as the advantageous zone game count AG is counted, and the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g will also shift. As a result, as shown in Figure 95(b), when one game progresses from the situation in Figure 95(a), the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserve display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, and the current game will enter the AT mode transition lottery in the first mode. In this case, if the lottery result corresponding to AT counter 1-4 corresponding to the first special image P1 in the first mode is a win, which is a specific role as a so-called rare role, the AT mode transition lottery will be won, but if the lottery result is any other, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.

If one game progresses from the situation in Figure 95(b), as shown in Figure 95(c), the first mode will end with the current game, and the AT mode transition lottery in the second mode will be held from the next game. Then, if one more game progresses from the situation in Figure 95(c), as shown in Figure 96(d), the AT mode transition lottery in the first mode will be held from the current game. The fifth special image P5 has shifted to the execution display area Dp, and if the AT counter corresponding to the fifth special image P5 in the second mode is a chance eye C or cherry C win, which are lottery results corresponding to 95 to 127, the AT mode transition lottery will be won, but if the lottery result is any other, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.

Figure 96(a) shows the same situation as Figure 95(a). However, in the situation shown in Figure 96(a), the second mode prediction effect is being executed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in Figure 97(a), for example. Note that in Figure 97(a), the first mode effect is also being executed in accordance with the current lottery mode. Incidentally, in this figure, the special notification as the mode prediction notification after a predetermined number of games is shown as the mode prediction notification after three games. Therefore, it can be understood from these first mode effects and second mode prediction effects that the AT mode transition lottery in the AT counter corresponding to the first special image P1 waiting for the next game will be executed in the first mode, which has a low probability, and that after three games it will be in the second mode, which has a high probability.

Figure 96(b) shows the case where the game is switched to a two-bet game and one game is played in a restricted state. In this case, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is counted and the number of games remaining until the lottery mode switches is also counted, while the shift of the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is restricted. As a result, the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1 in Figure 96(a) remains in the first unit hold display area Dr1 even after one game has progressed. In this case, as shown in Figure 97(b), a random number update restriction notification effect is executed, allowing the player to understand that the hold display will not be shifted. However, since the current lottery mode is still the first mode, a main character without flames is displayed and the first mode effect is being executed.

If one game is played in the restricted state from Figure 96 (b), the first mode will be in effect up to the current game, and the second mode will be in effect from the next game, as shown in Figure 97 (c). However, because the restricted state is in effect as described above, the AT counter will not shift, and the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserve display area Dr1 will not shift either. Then, if one game is played in the restricted state, the lottery mode will change to the second mode, as shown in Figure 97 (d).

When the lottery mode becomes the second mode and, for example, as shown in Figure 98(a), a second mode effect is executed, by playing the next game as a three-bet game instead of a two-bet game, the first special image P1 displayed in the first unit reserve display area Dr1 is shifted to the execution display area Dp, as shown in Figure 98(b), and the game is placed in the second mode and an AT mode transition lottery is executed.

Here, the second mode effects are configured to be executed when the game is in the second mode and the second mode notification lottery process is won. Therefore, when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, the second mode effects may not be executed in the game in which the mode transition occurs. Similarly, the second mode prediction effects are configured to be executed when the second mode is executed after a predetermined number of games and the prediction notification lottery is won. Therefore, the second mode prediction effects may not be executed in the game before the predetermined game in which the game transitions to the second mode. However, since the prediction notification lottery is executed regardless of the lottery mode after the predetermined game, winning the prediction notification lottery makes it clear whether the game after the predetermined game will be in the first mode or the second mode, making it a more reliable notification than the first mode effects or the second mode effects. As a result, for example, as shown in Figure 97(a), when a second mode prediction effect occurs in the situation of Figure 96(a), the player will be able to predict that the lottery mode will be the second mode, at least in the game after a predetermined number of games in which the last two digits of the advantageous zone game count AG are 22, even if a second mode effect has not occurred.

In other words, a player who tries to determine the lottery mode by counting the number of games since the game in which the second mode prediction effect occurred will be able to confirm the transition to second mode sooner than a player who tries to determine the lottery mode from the first mode effects and second mode effects. Therefore, by increasing attention to the second mode prediction effect and ensuring the advantage of a high level of understanding of the game content and effects, it is possible to further immerse players in the game.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The system is configured to perform an AT mode transition lottery using a pre-acquired AT counter value and the game lottery results. The lottery mode for the AT mode transition lottery can be either a permissible game, such as a non-internal state or a 3-bet game in an internal state, or a restricted game, such as a 2-bet game or a BB state in an internal state. While the AT counter is updated (shifted and acquired) in a permissible game, the AT counter is not updated in a restricted game. This allows for a game in which, when the pre-acquired AT counter is provided for the AT mode transition lottery, AT counter updates are restricted in a restricted game until the lottery mode becomes the high-probability second mode. In other words, the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery include a low-probability first mode and a high-probability second mode. For each mode, a corresponding AT counter value (corresponding information) is determined for the game lottery results. The game is played in a standby state in a restricted game until the pre-acquired AT counter value becomes the corresponding information for the AT mode transition win. This makes it possible to realize innovative gameplay features, such as using the relationship between the AT counter and corresponding information acquired in advance to determine whether the game will proceed with allowed play or restricted play.

In this embodiment, too, switching from allowable play to restricted play can be done by switching from a 3-bet game to a 2-bet game or by winning a BB. In this way, by allowing the player to switch between allowable play and restricted play at their own will, it is possible to effectively avoid situations where the AT mode transition lottery or AT counter updates are unintentionally restricted.

In this case, the information from the AT counter obtained in advance can be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a hold display, making it possible to decide whether or not to switch to limited play based on the content of that hold display. Furthermore, switching to limited play notifies the player of a random number update limit and limits the shift in the hold display itself, making it clearer that the player is playing limited play. By doing this, for example, when playing by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 45, if the player accidentally starts play when two medals are inserted instead of three, it becomes easier to notice if the player unintentionally switches to limited play as a two-bet game, and the amusement hall manager can easily identify that limited play is being played.

Furthermore, since the system is configured to execute first mode and second mode effects as special notifications indicating the current lottery mode, it is possible to grasp the current lottery mode, predict games in which the pre-acquired AT counter will provide corresponding information for the lottery mode, and adjust the restricted play and allowed play accordingly.

The special notification suggesting the future lottery mode is configured to execute a second mode prediction effect if there is a game in which a transition from second mode to first mode occurs a predetermined number of games in the future, and execute a second mode prediction effect if there is a game in which a transition from first mode to second mode occurs a predetermined number of games in the future. By doing this, it is possible to determine the lottery mode a predetermined number of games in the future, predict the game in which the previously acquired AT counter will provide corresponding information corresponding to the lottery mode, and adjust the restricted play and allowed play accordingly.

In this case, the special notification suggesting the current lottery mode and the special notification suggesting a future lottery mode are configured so that the content of the special notification suggesting a future lottery mode is more likely to match the actual lottery mode and is therefore more reliable. In other words, for a special notification suggesting the current lottery mode, even if a first mode effect is being performed, it may still be second mode, and even when that special notification is performed, it may not be clear which lottery mode the player is currently in. In contrast, for a special notification suggesting a future lottery mode, if a first mode prediction effect is performed, it is confirmed that a transition to first mode will occur, and if a second mode prediction effect is performed, it is confirmed that a transition to second mode will occur. Therefore, if one is trying to identify a lottery mode transition earlier in the game, first mode prediction effects and second mode prediction effects contribute more to early identification than first mode effects and second mode effects. By doing this, it is possible to optimally enhance the excitement of games that switch between restricted play and permitted play by using the AT counter obtained in advance and knowing in advance when the lottery mode will be switched.

Special notifications such as first mode effects, second mode effects, first mode prediction effects, and second mode prediction effects are all configured to be executed regardless of whether the game is allowed or restricted, making it possible for the player to determine the timing to switch to restricted play during allowed play, and also to determine the timing to switch to allowed play during restricted play.

In the second embodiment, the occurrence rate of special notifications in allowed play and in restricted play was the same, but they may be different. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which special notifications are more likely to occur in restricted play than in allowed play. Since the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in restricted play, if the occurrence rate of special notifications is low, there is a possibility that, even though the consumption of AT counters is restricted until the desired lottery mode is reached in restricted play, the player may become impatient and switch to allowed play before the desired lottery mode is reached, in an attempt to receive the AT mode transition lottery. In this regard, increasing the occurrence rate of special notifications in restricted play can calm the player's impatience and allow the player to wait until the desired lottery mode is reached before consuming AT counters.

In this embodiment, the lottery mode is determined using the mode transition table and the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. Therefore, it can be said that the corresponding information, which is the value of the AT counter set to result in an AT mode transition win for each lottery result of the game, differs depending on the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. In this way, for example, as in the first embodiment, when a player understands the current mode transition table from the table notification effect for the mode transition table, it is possible to play limited play until a game in which the previously acquired AT counter is likely to indicate corresponding information is reached, while taking into account the number of games since the transition to the advantageous zone occurred and the number of games since the mode transition table was updated. In other words, it is possible to determine whether the AT counter is likely to indicate corresponding information from the previously acquired AT counter and number of games, and it is possible to realize innovative gameplay by playing limited play until a game in which the corresponding information is likely to be reached is reached.

Here, while it is possible to determine the number of games played in the advantageous zone based on whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is displayed as a zone indicator, this slot machine 10 is configured so that the advantageous zone transition game and the display start game of the eighth display segment N8 do not match (the display starts upon transition to AT mode), making it difficult to determine the number of games played after transitioning to the advantageous zone. Therefore, as described above, the relationship between the number of games played after transitioning to the advantageous zone (the number of games played since the mode transition table was set) and the AT counter obtained in advance makes it difficult to determine the number of games played when switching between limited play and allowable play. This makes it difficult to clearly determine when to switch between limited play and allowable play, making it more interesting to determine the timing of the switch and also increases attention to the special notification suggesting lottery mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the mode transition table is updated every predetermined number of games (100 games) after a transition to the advantageous zone. Therefore, even if a mode transition table that is undesirable to the player is set, there is a chance that the table will be updated to a different mode transition table after the predetermined number of games have been played, thereby reducing the possibility of the player ending play just because an undesirable mode transition table has been set.

Here, the mode transition table is updated for each predetermined game under the condition that the AT lottery process is permissible play, not restricted play. By doing this, even if restricted play is being performed because of an undesirable mode transition table, it is necessary to switch to permissible play at least if the mode transition table is to be updated. This effectively prevents the total number of inserted medals from decreasing as a result of endless play in restricted play.

The more frequently the mode transition table is updated, the more likely it is that a special notification indicating the lottery mode will occur. Therefore, the more games are played after transitioning to the advantageous zone, the more likely it is that a special notification will occur. By doing this, it is possible to use the special notification to help players understand the lottery mode, and then encourage them to switch between restricted play and permissible play, thereby increasing the probability of winning the AT mode transition. This makes it possible to optimally implement a ceiling function using the special notification.

<Modification 1>
In this embodiment, the contents of the first AT mode shift lottery table and the second AT mode shift lottery table are different from those in the second embodiment. Figure 99 shows the AT mode shift lottery tables in this modified example.

As shown in Figure 99, when comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for first use with the AT mode transition lottery table for second use, the lottery results associated with AT counter values of 1-4 and 5-8 are different, while the lottery results associated with other AT counter values of 9-128 are the same. More specifically, as shown in Figure 99(a), in the AT mode transition lottery table for first use, if the AT counter value is 1-4, the AT mode transition lottery is won for any lottery result excluding duplicate 1-coin roles, BB1, and BB2, and if the AT counter value is 5-8, the AT mode transition lottery is won for any specific role. In contrast, as shown in Figure 99(b), in the AT mode transition lottery table for second use, if the AT counter value is 1-4, the AT mode transition lottery is won for any specific role, and if the AT counter value is 5-8, the AT mode transition lottery is won for any lottery result excluding duplicate 1-coin roles, BB1, and BB2.

In other words, in this modified example, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is the same for both the first mode and the second mode, but in the first mode, an AT counter value of 1 to 4 is more likely to result in a win, and in the second mode, an AT counter value of 5 to 8 is more likely to result in a win. Therefore, although the likelihood of an AT counter value (corresponding information) resulting in an AT mode transition winning result for a game's lottery result differs depending on the lottery mode, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery for each game remains the same and is the same. Therefore, while technically the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery for each game remains unchanged, a configuration can be achieved that makes it possible to effectively change the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery for each game by utilizing the pre-acquired AT counter, lottery mode transition, and switching between restricted play and permitted play.

<Modification 2>
100(a) is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this modified example. As already explained, the random number acquisition process is executed when all the reels have stopped in the reel control process.

In step S4501, it is determined whether there is an empty area in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE10 of the lottery information storage area 106g. If there is an empty area and a positive determination is made in step S4501, processing for acquiring the AT counter is performed in steps S4502 to S4504, and then the random number acquisition processing is terminated. The processing in steps S4502 to S4504 is the same as the processing in steps S3204 to S3206 above. If there is no empty area and a negative determination is made in step S4501, the random number acquisition processing is terminated.

As already explained, if the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the game status, random number shift processing is executed when the game starts, and the tenth memory area RE10 basically becomes an empty area. A negative judgment is made in step S4501, for example, when the number of bets in a game started in a situation where information corresponding to an AT counter is stored in the tenth memory area RE10 is in a restricted state that is not a specific prescribed number according to the game status, and random number shift processing is not executed when the game starts.

In contrast, if, for example, information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored in the tenth memory area RE10, the number of bets on the started game is in a limited state that is not a specific prescribed number according to the game status, and even if the random number shift process was not executed at the start of the game, a positive judgment will be made in step S4501.

As already explained, in this slot machine 10, when the reset switch 72 is operated upon power-on and the winning probability setting process is executed in the main process, the RAM 106 is initialized. In this case, the information corresponding to each AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is also cleared. In other words, immediately after the winning probability setting process is executed, no AT counters are stored in the lottery information storage area 106g, and the AT mode transition lottery is not executed, at least for the first game.

In response to this, by using the above configuration, the game after the winning probability setting process is performed as a two-bet game, making it possible to obtain only the information corresponding to the AT counter without consuming the information corresponding to the AT counter. This makes it possible to quickly resolve a situation where information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored in the lottery information storage area 106g.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the second BB hit flag can also be cleared when the RAM 106 is initialized, etc., when playing regular game while a second BB hit is still pending, it is necessary to wait for the second BB hit by playing several two-bet games. In this regard, with the above configuration, information corresponding to the AT counter can be obtained even while waiting for the second BB hit, which simplifies the preparation work for regular game play.

The circumstances under which the AT counter stored in the lottery information storage area 106g is erased are not limited to the initialization process associated with the process of setting the winning probability; for example, the AT counter may be erased during the initialization process of the advantageous zone information that is carried out at the end of the advantageous zone. Even in this case, by taking advantage of the fact that the AT mode transition lottery is not carried out in the normal zone and the AT counter is not consumed, it is possible to configure the AT counter to only be acquired and accumulate.

Figure 100(b) shows a comparison of the relationship between the permissive state in which the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming status and the execution of processing related to the instruction function is permitted, the restricted state in which the specific prescribed number is not, and whether or not each process related to the AT mode transition lottery is executed, between a situation immediately after RAM 106 has been initialized and a situation not like that.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the first and second modes as lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery are defined by the mode transition table and the number of advantageous zone games AG, and the lottery mode can be transitioned in either the permissive state or the restricted state. This lottery mode transition occurs in either state, even immediately after initialization of RAM 106. However, because the advantageous zone flag is cleared when RAM 106 is initialized, the lottery mode transition occurs after transition to the advantageous zone.

In contrast, the random number shift process, which is one of the processes in the lottery result response process, is executed in the permissive state but not in the restricted state. Similarly, regardless of whether RAM 106 has just been initialized, the random number shift process is executed in the permissive state but not in the restricted state.

The random number acquisition process, which is one process in the reel control process, is executed in the permitted state but not in the restricted state. However, if there is an empty area in the lottery information storage area 106g, such as immediately after initialization of RAM 106 as described above, the process for acquiring the AT counter in the random number acquisition process is executed even in the restricted state. This makes it possible to resolve situations where information corresponding to the AT counter is not stored, as described above.

Furthermore, in this slot machine 10, the AT counter is configured to be updated during the timer update process (step S108) of the timer interrupt process, and the AT counter update is performed not only in the permitted state or restricted state, but also regardless of whether RAM 106 has been initialized. This prevents the inconvenience of the AT counter being acquired even in the restricted state immediately after RAM 106 has been initialized, but the acquired AT counter remaining untouched. Therefore, an event will not occur in which the results of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter acquired in such a situation are all the same (either both winning or both non-winning), preventing players or gaming halls from suffering undue disadvantages.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number for a lottery related to the instruction function and the random number shift process for shifting the random number according to the progress of the game are different from those in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in order to clearly distinguish between the random number for a lottery related to the instruction function (AT counter) and the AT game counter by which the CPU 102 grasps the number of games remaining in the AT mode, the random number for a lottery related to the instruction function is expressed as an AT random number.

<Various processes for AT random numbers>
Figure 101(a) is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this embodiment, Figure 101(b) is a flowchart showing the random number shift process in this embodiment, and Figure 101(c) is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the lottery information storage area 106g in this embodiment.

As already explained, the random number acquisition process is performed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped during the reel control process (Figure 72) (step S3117).

In the random number acquisition process of this embodiment, step S5001 acquires an AT random number, and step S5002 stores the AT random number acquired in step S5001 in the reserved memory area RE in the lottery information memory area 106g. Here, the lottery information memory area (Figure 101 (c)) in this embodiment is configured to be able to store AT random numbers for only one game. In other words, the configuration in the second embodiment, in which AT random numbers for multiple games were acquired in advance, has been changed to a configuration in which AT random numbers for one game are acquired in advance.

Then, in step S5003, a process is executed to set an AT command containing information about the acquired AT random number as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this random number acquisition process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, the process of obtaining an AT random number is executed regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming status.

Next, we will explain the random number shift process in this embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the random number shift process was configured to be executed when the number of bets was a specific prescribed number in the lottery result response process (Figure 75), but this embodiment changes this. That is, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 102, in this embodiment, the random number shift process is executed before the process for determining whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number in the lottery result response process (steps S5102 to S5104) is executed.

In the random number shift process in this embodiment, in step S5011, the AT random number stored in the execution area AE is erased, and the AT random number stored in the reserved memory area RE is shifted to the execution area AE. Then, in step S5012, a shift command indicating that the shift process has been executed is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this random number shift process is executed.

<Lottery result processing>
Next, the lottery result response process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S5101, the random number shift process described above is executed. Then, in steps S5102 to S5104, a process is performed to determine whether the number of bets is a specific specified number corresponding to the gaming state. That is, in step S5102, it is determined whether or not the state is one of the BB states, and if the state is not one of the BB states, it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the number of bets is "3". Furthermore, if the state is one of the BB states, it is determined in step S5104 whether or not the number of bets is "2". If the number of bets is not "3" in step S5103 or if the number of bets is not "2" in step S5104, this lottery result response process is terminated.

If the number of bets is "3" in step S5103, or if the number of bets is "2" in step S5104, it is determined in step S5105 whether the advantageous zone flag is set. If the advantageous zone flag is not set, the advantageous zone transition lottery process is executed in step S5106, and then this lottery result response process is terminated. The advantageous zone transition lottery process has already been explained.

If the advantageous zone flag is set in step S5105, proceed to step S5107. In step S5107, it is determined whether the AT mode win flag or any of the AT mode flags are set. If any of the flags are set, AT lottery processing is executed in step S5108. If neither flag is set, in step S5109 it is determined whether the first specialized zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and if not set, in step S5110 it is determined whether the second specialized zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a first specialized zone and a second specialized zone are set in the AT mode, with high additional win rates, etc., and these first specialized zone flags and second specialized zone flags are flags that allow the CPU 102 to determine that the corresponding specialized zone is in effect. If none of the specialized zone flags are set, AT add-on processing is executed in step S5111; if the second specialized zone flag is set and the zone is the second specialized zone, processing for the second specialized zone is executed in step S5112; and if the first specialized zone flag is set and the zone is the first specialized zone, processing for the first specialized zone is executed in step S5113. The processing for the first specialized zone and the second specialized zone will be explained in detail later.

<AT lottery processing>
Here, the AT lottery processing executed in step S5108 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5201, processing is performed to determine the game lottery results. Then, in steps S5202 to S5211, processing is performed to set the first and second modes, which have different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery, similar to steps S802 to S811 above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5206, or after the processing of step S5209 or step S5211 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S5212. In step S5212, it is determined whether the first mode flag is set, and if the first mode flag is set, the process executes a process to acquire the first AT mode transition lottery table (Figure 81(a)) in step S5213. Furthermore, if the first mode flag is not set in step S5212 and the mode is second mode, the process executes a process to acquire the second AT mode transition lottery table (Figure 81(b)) in step S5214.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained in step S5213 or step S5214, processing is performed in step S5215 to obtain the AT random number stored in the execution area AE. Then, in step S5216, AT mode transition lottery processing is performed.

In step S5217, it is determined whether the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If not, the AT lottery processing is terminated. If the AT mode transition lottery has been won, in step S5218, lottery processing for the number of premonition games is executed. In this embodiment, after the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the player is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won after going through the premonition mode. The number of premonition games corresponds to the number of premonition mode games played from the time the AT mode transition lottery is won until the time the player is notified that the AT mode transition lottery has been won. For example, a number ranging from 0 to 32 games is randomly determined by lottery. Note that the number of premonition games is not limited to the above and may include 33 or more games. Furthermore, a number of premonition games that is likely to be selected and a number of premonition games that is unlikely to be selected or not selected may be set, and these numbers of premonition games with different selection rates may vary depending on the game lottery result and the mode of the AT mode transition lottery (first mode or second mode).

In step S5219, a process is executed in which a value equivalent to the number of premonition games determined in step S5218 above is input into the premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The premonition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to determine the game in which a notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery should be made, and is a counter that is decremented by one each time a game is played. Then, in step S5220, a process is executed in which a premonition command including information on the number of premonition games is set as an output target to the display control device 81. Thereafter, in step S5221, a process is executed in which an AT mode winning flag is set, and the AT lottery process is terminated.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S5111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 104. In this embodiment, the AT random number is used not only for the AT mode transition lottery but also for the AT mode addition process.

In step S5301, the game lottery results are determined. In the following step S5302, a process is executed to obtain an AT random number from the execution area AE. Then, in step S5303, it is determined whether the first AT mode flag is set, and if it is set, in step S5304, a process is executed to obtain an additional lottery table for the first AT. On the other hand, if the first AT mode flag is not set and the mode is the second AT mode, in step S5305, a process is executed to obtain an additional lottery table for the second AT.

As shown in Figures 105 and 106, the first AT add-on lottery table and the second AT add-on lottery table have different AT random number values associated with the lottery results of games that result in an add-on win. Specifically, as in the second embodiment above, the AT random number is set to be any value between "1" and "128," and the lottery results of games that result in an add-on win are set to differ depending on the value of the AT random number.

For example, in the first AT add-on lottery table (Figure 105), when the AT random number value is "1," the special roles of Chance Eyes A-C, Cherries A-C, Common Bell, and Watermelon, as well as Normal Replies A-C, and Push Order Bell are set to be add-on wins. Also, when the AT random number value is "2" to "3," the special roles and Normal Replies A-C are set to be add-on wins. And when the AT random number value is "4" to "128," the special roles are set to be add-on wins.

In contrast, in the second AT add-on lottery table (Figure 106), when the AT random number value is between "1" and "5," the special role, normal replies A to C, and push order bells are set to be added wins. Also, when the AT random number value is between "6" and "18," the special role and normal replies A to C are set to be added wins. And when the AT random number value is between "19" and "128," the special role is set to be an added win.

In other words, the AT addition lottery table for second use is set to have more AT random number values associated with specific roles, normal replies A to C, and push order bells than the AT addition lottery table for first use. Also, the AT addition lottery table for second use is set to have more AT random number values associated with specific roles and normal replies A to C than the AT addition lottery table for first use. On the other hand, the AT addition lottery table for second use is set to have fewer AT random number values associated with specific roles than the AT addition lottery table for first use.

In the following explanation, these specific roles, normal replies A to C, and push order bells will be referred to as first corresponding roles, specific roles and normal replies A to C will be referred to as second corresponding roles, and specific roles will also be referred to as third corresponding roles. Furthermore, AT random numbers associated with first corresponding roles to result in additional wins will also be referred to as first number range random numbers, AT random numbers associated with second corresponding roles to result in additional wins will also be referred to as second number range random numbers, and AT random numbers associated with third corresponding roles to result in additional wins will also be referred to as third number range random numbers.

As a result of the game's lottery, in normal play mode, the first specific role appears with a probability of approximately 85%, the second specific role appears with a probability of approximately 17%, and the third specific role appears with a probability of approximately 3%. In other words, if the pre-acquired AT random number is a random number in the first number range, an additional win occurs with a probability of approximately 85%, if the AT random number is a random number in the second number range, an additional win occurs with a probability of approximately 17%, and if the AT random number is a random number in the third number range, an additional win occurs with a probability of approximately 3%. Therefore, if the pre-acquired AT random number is a random number in the first number range, the expected additional win is highest, and if it is a random number in the third number range, the expected additional win is lowest. Furthermore, because the numerical range of the first number range is set so that the probability (acquisition rate) of obtaining an AT random number in the first number range is approximately 0.8% in the first AT mode and approximately 4% in the second AT mode, the expected additional win is higher in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode.

In this embodiment, the number of games added when an additional win occurs varies depending on which AT random number is used to win, with 5 games being added when a random number in the first number range is used to win, 10 games being added when a random number in the second number range is used to win, and 20 games being added when a random number in the third number range is used to win, with the number of games being set to be the lowest when a random number in the first number range is used. Note that the number of games added for each number range is not limited to the above and may be other numbers of games. For example, the number of games added may be set to be the highest when a random number in the first number range is used to win. The number of games added may also be set to differ depending on which value in each number range is used, or the number of games added may be set to differ depending on the result of the game lottery.

After the add-on lottery table is obtained in step S5304 or step S5305, add-on lottery processing is executed in step S5306. Then, in step S5307, it is determined whether an add-on win has been achieved, and if not, the AT add-on processing is terminated. If an add-on win has been achieved, set stock lottery processing is executed in step S5308.

Here, we will provide an overview of the AT mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the AT mode is a mode that continues with one set consisting of a minimum of 30 games. If there are stocks at the end of one set, those stocks are used to transition to the AT mode for the next set; if there are no stocks, the AT mode ends. If an additional lottery is won during one set, the number of games in that set is increased and the set stock lottery described above is held.

In the set stock lottery processing of step S5308, the probability of winning the set stock lottery is set to differ depending on the type of AT mode and the AT random number at the time of the additional win. In this embodiment, in the first AT mode, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the first number range, there is a 1.0% chance of winning the set stock lottery, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the second number range, there is a 1.0% chance of winning the set stock lottery, and if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the third number range, there is a 2.0% chance of winning the set stock lottery. Also, in the second AT mode, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the first number range, there is a 2.0% chance of winning the set stock lottery, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the second number range, there is a 2.0% chance of winning the set stock lottery, and if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the third number range, there is a 3.0% chance of winning the set stock lottery. In other words, not only is it easier to win the bonus lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode, but it is also easier to win the set stock lottery that is held if the bonus lottery is won.

After the set stock lottery is conducted in step S5308, it is determined in step S5309 whether or not the set stock lottery has been won. If the set stock lottery has been won, in step S5310, a process of adding 1 to the set counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The set counter is a counter that the CPU 102 uses to keep track of the number of sets stocked. Note that in this embodiment, if the set stock lottery in step S5308 is won, one set is stocked, but the number of sets to be stocked may also be determined by lottery. In this case, the number of sets may vary depending on the value of the AT random number at the time of winning or the lottery result of the game at the time of winning.

If it is determined in step S5309 that the set stock lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S5310 has been executed, processing is executed in step S5311 to add the number of added games to the AT game counter. Then, processing is executed in step S5312 to set an add-on command containing information such as the number of added games and whether the stock lottery was won or lost as an output target to the display control device 81.

In the following step S5314, the second specialized zone transition lottery process is executed.

Here, we will provide an overview of the first and second specialized zones.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a transition to the first specialized zone occurs at the start of one set of AT mode. As described above, the AT mode is configured so that sets of a minimum of 30 games can be repeatedly executed, and the first specialized zone to which a transition occurs at the start of one set is set to increase the probability of winning the lottery to add to the number of games in AT mode, and is a zone for determining the number of games in that set. In contrast, the second specialized zone is a zone where the probability of winning the set stock lottery is higher, and a transition is made if the second specialized zone transition lottery is won during AT mode.

The probability of winning the second specialized zone transition lottery is set to vary depending on the type of AT mode and the AT random number at the time of the additional win. In this embodiment, in the first AT mode, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the first number range, there is a 0.1% chance of winning the second specialized zone transition lottery, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the second number range, there is a 0.2% chance of winning the second specialized zone transition lottery, and if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the third number range, there is a 0.3% chance of winning the second specialized zone transition lottery. Also, in the second AT mode, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the first number range, there is a 0.3% chance of winning the second specialized zone transition lottery, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the second number range, there is a 0.5% chance of winning the second specialized zone transition lottery, and if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the third number range, there is a 1.0% chance of winning the second specialized zone transition lottery. In other words, not only is it easier to win the bonus lottery and set stock lottery in the second AT mode than in the first AT mode, but it is also easier to win the second specialized zone transition lottery that takes place if you win the bonus lottery.

After the second specialized zone transition lottery is conducted in step S5313, it is determined in step S5314 whether or not the second specialized zone transition lottery has been won. If the lottery has not been won, the AT addition process is terminated. If the lottery has been won, in step S5315 a process is executed to set a second specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d. Then, in step S5316 a process is executed to input 10 into the second specialized zone counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The second specialized zone counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games in the second specialized zone, and in this embodiment, the second specialized zone is set to continue for 10 games. Then, in step S5317, the second specialized zone command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and the AT addition process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result response processing, after executing the AT lottery processing (step S5108), the AT additional processing (step S5111), the second specialized zone processing (step S5112), or the first specialized zone processing (step S5113), the process proceeds to step S5114. In step S5114, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a win for the push order bell. If a win for the push order bell is achieved, in step S5115 it is determined whether any of the AT mode flags are set. If any of the AT mode flags are set, in step S5116 it is determined whether the first specialized zone flag is set. If the first specialized zone flag is not set, in step S5117, processing for the push order notification corresponding to the first to sixth minor roles is performed, and in step S5118, processing is executed to set the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, after which the lottery result response processing ends.

In contrast, if the push order bell is not won or if none of the AT mode flags are set, the lottery result response process ends without performing the push order notification process. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the AT mode is in effect, if the first specialized zone flag is set and the first specialized zone is in effect, the lottery result response process ends without performing the push order notification process.

<Processing for winning results>
Next, the winning result response processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S5401, specialized zone counting processing is executed. The specialized zone counting processing is processing for counting the number of games played in the first specialized zone or second specialized zone as the game progresses, and for ending the first specialized zone or second specialized zone. The specialized zone counting processing will be explained in detail later.

Steps S5402 to S5404 are processes that determine whether the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state. That is, in step S5402, it is determined whether or not the current state is one of the BB states, and if the current state is not the BB state, it is determined in step S5403 whether or not the number of bets is "3." If the current state is the BB state, it is determined in step S5404 whether or not the number of bets is "2." If the number of bets is not "3" in step S5403 or if the number of bets is not "2" in step S5404, the winning result response processing ends. If the number of bets is "3" in step S5403 or if the number of bets is "2" in step S5404, the processing proceeds to step S5405.

In step S5405, it is determined whether the premonition counter is greater than 0 and whether the game is in premonition mode after winning the AT mode transition lottery but before notification of the win has been made. If a positive determination is made in step S5405, processing is executed in step S5406 to subtract 1 from the premonition counter. Then, in step S5407, it is determined whether the premonition counter has reached 0, and if so, processing for starting the AT is executed in step S5408.

<AT start processing>
The AT start processing in step S5408 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S5501, a process is executed to clear the AT mode selection flag. Then, in step S5502, an AT type determination process is executed. The AT type determination process is the same as the process in step S1004 above. Then, in step S5503, it is determined whether the current AT mode has been determined as the first AT mode, and if it is the first AT mode, a process is executed to set the first AT mode flag in step S5504. Thereafter, in step S5505, a process is executed to set the first AT mode command as an output target to the display control device 81. On the other hand, if it has been determined as the second AT mode, a process is executed to set the second AT mode flag in step S5506, and then a process is executed to set the second AT mode command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S5507. The first AT mode command and second AT mode command are commands that allow the display control device 81 to determine the type of AT mode currently being used. Upon receiving these first AT mode command and second AT mode command, the display control device 81 notifies the user of the type of AT mode that will be started on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc.

After executing the processing of step S5505 or step S5507, processing is executed in step S5508 to input 30 into the AT game counter. Then, processing is executed in step S5509 to set the first specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and processing is executed in step S5510 to input "10" into the first specialized zone counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first specialized zone counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to keep track of the number of games in the first specialized zone, and in this embodiment, the first specialized zone is set to continue for 10 games. Then, in step S5511, the first specialized zone command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and the AT start processing is terminated.

In other words, in the AT start process, when the AT mode starts, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is set to 30, and a transition to the first specialized zone, which will be played for 10 games, is set.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result response processing, if a negative judgment is made in step S5405 or step S5407, or after the processing of step S5408 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S5409. In step S5409, it is determined whether any of the AT mode flags are set. If they are set, it is determined in step S5410 whether any of the specialized zone flags are set, and if none of the specialized zone flags are set, the AT game counter is decremented in step S5411. In other words, the decrementing process of the remaining number of games in the AT mode is not performed during the first specialized zone or second specialized zone.

After executing the processing of step S5411, step S5412 determines whether the AT game counter has reached 0. If it has reached 0, step S5413 determines whether the set counter is at 0. If it is at 0, steps S5414 to S5416 execute processing to end the AT mode, and if it is not at 0, steps S5417 to S5421 execute processing to start the next set.

That is, in the AT mode termination process, in step S5414, the corresponding AT mode flag is cleared, and in step S5415, the AT mode termination flag is set. Then, in step S5416, the AT termination command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and this winning result response process is terminated.

In the process for starting the next set, step S5417 executes a process to subtract 1 from the set counter, and step S5418 executes a process to input 30 into the AT game counter. Then, step S5419 executes a process to set the first specialized zone flag, and step S5420 executes a process to input 10 into the first specialized zone counter. Then, step S5421 executes a process to set the first specialized zone command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this winning result response process is terminated.

<Specialized Zone Counting Process>
Next, the specialized zone counting process executed in step S5401 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5601, the second specialized zone flag is set and it is determined whether or not the second specialized zone is in progress. If the second specialized zone is in progress, in step S5602, a process is executed to decrement the second specialized zone counter by 1. Then, in step S5603, it is determined whether the second specialized zone counter has reached 0, and if it is not 0, the specialized zone counting process is terminated. If it is determined in step S5603 that the second specialized zone counter has reached 0, in step S5604 the second specialized zone flag is cleared and a process is executed to terminate the second specialized zone, and then the specialized zone counting process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S5601 that the game is not in the second specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S5605. In step S5605, the first specialized zone flag is set and it is determined whether the game is in the first specialized zone. If the game is not in the first specialized zone, the specialized zone counting process ends. If the game is in the first specialized zone, steps S5606 to S5608 determine whether the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state. That is, in step S5606, it is determined whether the game is in any of the BB states, and if the game is not in any of the BB states, it is determined in step S5607 whether the number of bets is "3". Furthermore, if the game is in any of the BB states, it is determined in step S5608 whether the number of bets is "2". If the game is not in the BB state and the number of bets is not "3", or if the game is in the BB state and the number of bets is not "2", the specialized zone counting process ends. On the other hand, if the player is not in BB state and the number of bets is "3", or if the player is in BB state and the number of bets is "2", proceed to step S5609.

In step S5609, a process is executed to decrement the first specialized zone counter by 1. Then, in step S5610, it is determined whether the first specialized zone counter has reached 0, and if it has not reached 0, the specialized zone counting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the first specialized zone counter has reached 0, in step S5611, a process is executed to clear the first specialized zone flag and terminate the first specialized zone, and then the specialized zone counting process is terminated.

In other words, the second specialized zone is a zone in which the number of remaining games is counted as games are played, regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the gaming state. In contrast, the first specialized zone is a zone in which the number of remaining games is counted as games are played if the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the gaming state, but is not counted if the number of bets is not a specific specified number according to the gaming state.

<Treatment for the first specialized zone>
The first specialized zone process executed in step S5113 in the lottery result response process (Fig. 102) will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 110. As described above, the first specialized zone is a specialized zone that is set at the start of one set of the AT mode, and is a zone for determining the number of games in that set.

In step S5701, a process is executed to set a consumption command as an output target to the display control device 81. As described above, in the first specialized zone, if the number of bets on a game is a specific specified number according to the gaming status, the number of games is counted, but if it is not the specific specified number according to the gaming status, the game is not counted. Processing for the first specialized zone is performed when the number of bets on the current game is the specific specified number according to the gaming status (see Figure 102), and the consumption command set in step S5701 is a command for causing the display control device 81 to understand that the game in the first specialized zone has been consumed with the specific specified number of bets according to the gaming status.

In the following step S5702, a process is executed to ascertain the lottery results for this game. Then, in step S5703, a process is executed to obtain the AT random number stored in the execution area AE, and in step S5704, a process is executed to obtain the additional lottery table for the first specialized zone from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 112, the bonus lottery table for the first specialized zone sets AT random numbers with values of "1" to "51" as AT random numbers in the first number range associated with the first corresponding role, AT random numbers with values of "52" to "64" as AT random numbers in the second number range associated with the second corresponding role, and AT random numbers with values of "65" to "128" as AT random numbers in the third number range associated with the third corresponding role. In other words, in the first specialized zone, if the pre-acquired AT random number value is a random number in the first number range of "1" to "51," there is an approximately 85% chance of winning an bonus; if it is a random number in the second number range of "52" to "64," there is an approximately 17% chance of winning an bonus; and if it is a random number in the third number range of "65" to "128," there is an approximately 3% chance of winning an bonus.

In the first specialized zone, there is an approximately 40% probability that the AT random number obtained in advance will correspond to the first number range, an approximately 10% probability that it will correspond to the second number range, and an approximately 50% probability that it will correspond to the third number range. Therefore, the settings make it relatively easy to obtain an AT random number in the first number range. More specifically, there is an approximately 40% probability that an AT random number in the first number range will be obtained, an approximately 60% probability that an AT random number other than the first number range will be obtained, and just under half of the time an AT random number in the first number range will be obtained.

In step S5705, an additional lottery process is executed. Then, in step S5706, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the result is not a win, the processing for this first specialized zone is terminated. If the additional lottery has been won, the processing for adding the number of additional games to the AT game counter is executed in step S5707. Note that in this embodiment, if an additional lottery win occurs with an AT random number in the first number range in the first specialized zone, an additional 5 games are added, if an additional lottery win occurs with an AT random number in the second number range, an additional 6 games are added, and if an additional lottery win occurs with an AT random number in the third number range, an additional 13 games are added. In step S5707, a value equivalent to the corresponding number of additional games is added to the AT game counter. Then, in step S5708, a process is executed to set the additional lottery command as an output target to the display control device 81, and the processing for this first specialized zone is terminated.

<Treatment for the second specialized zone>
Next, the second specialized zone processing executed in step S5112 in the lottery result response processing (Fig. 102) will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 111. As described above, the second specialized zone is a specialized zone that is set as part of the case where the additional lottery in the additional processing during AT mode is won, and is a zone where the probability of winning the set stock lottery is high.

In step S5801, the process of setting a consumption command is executed in the same manner as in step S5701. Note that the second specialized zone is a zone in which the number of games is counted regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming status, and in the second specialized zone, a consumption command is output regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming status.

In the following step S5802, a process is executed to ascertain the lottery results for this game. Then, in step S5803, a process is executed to obtain the AT random number stored in the execution area AE, and in step S5804, a process is executed to obtain the additional lottery table for the second specialized zone from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 113, the additional lottery table for the second specialized zone has AT random numbers with values of "1" to "17" set as AT random numbers in the first number range associated with the first corresponding role, AT random numbers with values of "18" to "64" set as AT random numbers in the second number range associated with the second corresponding role, and AT random numbers with values of "65" to "128" set as AT random numbers in the third number range associated with the third corresponding role. In other words, in the second specialized zone, if the pre-acquired AT random number value is a random number in the first number range of "1" to "17," there is an approximately 85% chance of winning a set stock (additional win), if it is a random number in the second number range of "18" to "64," there is an approximately 17% chance of winning a set stock, and if it is a random number in the third number range of "65" to "128," there is an approximately 3% chance of winning a set stock.

In the second specialized zone, there is an approximately 13% probability that the pre-acquired AT random number will correspond to the first number range, an approximately 37% probability that it will correspond to the second number range, and an approximately 50% probability that it will correspond to the third number range. Therefore, the settings make it relatively difficult to acquire an AT random number in the first number range. More specifically, there is an approximately 13% probability that an AT random number in the first number range will be acquired, and an approximately 87% probability that an AT random number in a range other than the first number range will be acquired.

In step S5805, a set stock lottery process is executed. Then, in step S5806, it is determined whether or not the set stock lottery has been won. If the set stock lottery has not been won, the process for the second specialized zone is terminated. If the set stock lottery has been won, in step S5807, a process is executed to add the number of stocks to the set counter. Note that in this embodiment, in the second specialized zone, if a set stock is won with an AT random number in the first numerical range, one set of stocks is generated; if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the second numerical range, one set of stocks is generated; and if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the third numerical range, five sets of stocks are generated. In step S5807, a value equivalent to the corresponding number of stocks is added to the set counter. Then, in step S5808, a process is executed to set the additional command as an output target to the display control device 81, and the process for the second specialized zone is terminated.

<Remaining Game Number Management Process and Remaining Coin Number Management Process>
Next, the remaining game number management process and remaining coins management process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 114 and 115. These remaining game number management process and remaining coins management process are processes performed in steps S3605 and S3606 in the second interval display process (Figure 78), and are processes for determining in advance whether the conditions for forcibly terminating the advantageous interval will be met.

In the remaining game management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 114, in step S5901, a process is executed to determine the current number of games in the advantageous zone AG. Then, in step S5902, a process is executed to determine the number of remaining sets based on the set counter. In the following step S5903, a process is executed to calculate the number of remaining AT mode games based on the number of remaining sets determined in step S5902. More specifically, the number of remaining AT mode games (G1) is calculated by multiplying the set counter (S) by the minimum number of games in one set (30 games).

In the following step S5904, the remaining number of games in the first specialized zone is calculated based on the set counter. More specifically, the remaining number of games in the first specialized zone (G2) is calculated by multiplying the set counter (S) by the minimum number of games in the first specialized zone (10 games).

Then, in step S5905, a process is executed to calculate the number of games remaining in the second specialized zone. In this process, if the second specialized zone flag is set, the number of games remaining in the second specialized zone (G3) can be determined by counting the second specialized zone counter. Note that in a configuration where unexecuted second specialized zones can be accumulated (stocked) multiple times, the number of times they have been stocked is multiplied by the minimum number of games in the second specialized zone to calculate the number of games remaining in the second specialized zone.

In the following step S5906, the number of remaining games in the current set (G4) is determined from the AT game counter. Then, in step S5907, the process calculates the planned number of games to be completed in the current AT mode (GS). In this process, the planned number of games to be completed is calculated by adding up the game numbers determined in steps S5901 to S5906. Note that the processes in steps S5902 to S5906 are explained assuming that the mode has been switched to AT mode; however, before the mode has been switched to AT mode, the processes in steps S5902 to S5906 determine 0 games, and the planned number of games to be completed is equal to the number of games in the advantageous zone AG.

In the following step S5908, it is determined whether the planned number of games to end (GS) is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games (1,500) in the advantageous zone. A positive determination is made in step S5908 when it has already been determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached, even if no additional games or set stocks in the AT mode occur. In this case, in step S5909, it is determined whether the first excess flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The first excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that it has already been determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached, even if no additional games or set stocks in the AT mode occur. If a negative determination is made in step S5908 or an affirmative determination is made in step S5909, the remaining game number management process is terminated. If the planned number of games to be completed is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games and the first excess flag is not set, step S5910 executes processing to set the first excess flag, and step S5911 executes processing to set the first excess command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this remaining game number management processing ends.

In the remaining coin management process, as shown in the flowchart in Figure 115, in step S6001, a process is executed to determine the current advantageous zone coin increase/decrease coin number MY. Then, in step S6002, the expected coin increase/decrease coin number in the AT game (M1) is calculated by multiplying the number of remaining games in the AT mode (G1 + G4) by the expected coin increase/decrease per game in the AT mode (approximately +6.00 coins in this embodiment).

In the following step S6003, the expected increase or decrease in the first specialized zone (M2) is calculated by multiplying the number of games remaining in the first specialized zone (G2) by the expected increase or decrease in one game in the first specialized zone (approximately -1.77 in this embodiment). Then, in step S6004, the expected increase or decrease in the second specialized zone (M3) is calculated by multiplying the number of games remaining in the second specialized zone (G3) by the expected increase or decrease in one game in the second specialized zone (approximately +6.00 in this embodiment). Then, in step S6005, a process is executed to calculate the expected increase or decrease in the current AT mode (MS). In this process, the expected increase or decrease is calculated by adding up the numbers determined in steps S6001 to S6004.

In the following step S6006, it is determined whether the expected increase/decrease number of coins (MS) is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase number of coins in the advantageous zone (2400). A positive determination in step S6006 means that there is a high probability that the upper limit increase number will already be reached, even if no additional games or set stocks in the AT mode occur. In this case, in step S6007, it is determined whether the second excess flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d. The second excess flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to understand that there is a situation in which it has already been determined that there is a high probability that the upper limit increase number will be reached, even if no additional games or set stocks in the AT mode occur. If a negative determination is made in step S6006 or a positive determination is made in step S6007, the remaining coin management process is terminated. If the planned increase/decrease is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase and the second excess flag is not set, step S6008 executes a process to set the second excess flag, and step S6009 executes a process to set the second excess command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this remaining game count management process ends.

<Start-up performance setting process>
Next, the start-time performance setting process on the display control device 81 side in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Figure 116.

In step S6101, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a press order role win. If a press order role win is determined, and a press order notification command has been received (step S6102: YES), processing is performed to set the press order notification effects for the first to sixth minor roles (step S6103).

As mentioned above, in AT mode, a push order notification command is generally output when a push order role is won. However, in the first specialized zone at the start of a set in AT mode, a push order notification command is not output even if a push order role is won. In other words, in the first specialized zone, even in AT mode, no increase in medals is expected, and medals may actually decrease (approximately minus 1.77 medals per game).

If the push order role is not a win, step S6104 determines whether a specific role has been won, and if so, step S6105 performs processing to set up a specific role notification effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6102 or step S6104, or after executing the processing of step S603 or step S6105, the process proceeds to step S6106. In step S6106, it is determined whether an ending flag has been set in the various flag storage area 183a. In this embodiment, if any of the excess flags is set on the main control device 101 side, the subsequent effects in the AT mode may be rewritten to ending effects until forced termination, and such ending flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to understand that the situation has been rewritten to the ending effect. Incidentally, by the execution of an ending effect, the player understands that the AT mode and the first specialized zone will continue to be repeated until forced termination, that is, that there is a set stock until forced termination, and further understands that there is no point in adding any more games or sets in the AT mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, when an ending effect is being executed, the execution of additional effects is restricted.

In other words, if the ending flag is not set in step S6106, it is determined in step S6107 whether an additional command has been received. If an additional command has been received, the additional effect is set in step S6109, provided that the game is not in any of the specialized zones (step S6108: NO). In the following step S6110, the first specialized process, which is a process for specialized zones, is executed. The first specialized process will be explained in detail later. In contrast, if the ending flag is set, the additional effect is not set and the first specialized process is not performed, even if the additional command has been received outside of the specialized zone. Incidentally, the first specialized flag and the second specialized flag, which are set in the various flag storage area 183a when the respective specialized zone command is received, are used to determine whether the game is in a specialized zone.

If the ending flag is set, or after the first specialized process has been executed, other start-up effect setting processes are executed in step S6111, and then this start-up effect setting process is terminated.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the full stop effect setting process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 117.

In step S6201, a determination is made as to whether a favorable zone game command has been received and whether the game is in a favorable zone. If the game is in a favorable zone, in step S6202, a determination is made as to whether a first AT mode command has been received. Furthermore, in step S6204, a determination is made as to whether a second AT mode command has been received. As already explained, the first AT mode command and the second AT mode command are commands that are output when the AT type determination process is performed on the main control unit 101 side. If the first AT mode command has been received, in step S6203, a process is executed to set a first AT start notification effect. Furthermore, if the second AT mode command has been received, in step S6205, a process is executed to set a second AT start notification effect. The first AT start notification effect is an effect that allows the player to understand that the AT mode that is about to start is the first AT mode, and the second AT start notification effect is an effect that allows the player to understand that the AT mode that is about to start is the second AT mode. As in the above embodiments, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be rotated along with the AT start notification effects.

If the first AT mode command or the second AT mode command has not been received, step S6206 determines whether an AT end command has been received. If an AT end command has been received, step S6207 executes processing to set the AT end notification effect.

After executing the processing of step S6203, step S6205, or step S6207, or if a negative judgment is made in step S6206, the process proceeds to step S6208. In step S6208, it is determined whether the first excess command or the second excess command has been received. If either excess command has been received, the process sets an excess flag in the various flags storage area 183a in step S6209.

In the following step S6210, an ending lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute an ending performance. In this lottery process, the winning probability may be set, for example, according to the number of games remaining until forced termination or the number of remaining coins. More specifically, the winning probability may be set so that the fewer the number of games remaining until forced termination or the number of remaining coins, the easier it is to win. The winning probability of the ending lottery may also be set according to the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. More specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the ending lottery.

After executing the ending lottery process in step S6210, it is determined in step S6211 whether or not the lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, the ending effect setting process is executed in step S6212. Then, the ending flag is set in step S6213. Incidentally, if the ending flag is set, the ending effect will continue until the advantageous zone ends. Also, as mentioned above, if the ending flag is set, the execution of additional effects and the setting of effects in the specialized zone will no longer be performed.

If it is determined in step S6208 that an excess command has not been received for the current game, step S6214 determines whether the excess flag is set and whether an excess command has already been received. If the excess flag is set, step S6215 determines whether the ending flag is set. If the ending flag is not set, step S6216 executes an excess notification lottery process. The excess notification lottery process is a process of drawing lots to determine whether to execute an excess notification effect as a suggestive effect suggesting that a specific situation has occurred, even if no additional games or set stocks are added to the AT mode or a set stock occurs, and this situation has not been notified as an ending effect. The excess notification lottery is set, for example, to have a predetermined probability (e.g., a 1 in 10 probability) in each game in the specific situation. Note that in each game in a situation other than the specific situation, it is preferable to have an excess notification effect occur at a lower occurrence rate than in the specific situation.

After executing the overage notification lottery process in step S6216, it is determined in step S6217 whether or not the overage notification lottery has been won. If the result is a win, in step S6218, the effect is set so that an overage notification effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., as an effect when all reels have stopped for this game. As the overage notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 126, an overage notification image EDP corresponding to the above-mentioned specific situation is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6211, step S6214, or step S6217, if a positive judgment is made in step S6215, or after the processing of step S6213 or step S6218 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S6219. In step S6219, a second specialized process, which is a process for the specialized zone, is executed. The second specialized process will be described in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6201, or after the processing of step S6219 is executed, other all-stop effect setting processing is executed in step S6220, and then this all-stop effect setting processing is terminated.

<First specialized treatment>
Next, the first specialization process performed in step S6110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S6301, it is determined whether a first specialized zone command has been received. If a first specialized zone command has been received, a process of setting a first specialized flag is executed in step S6302. If a first specialized zone command has not been received, it is determined in step S6303 whether a second specialized zone command has been received. If a second specialized zone command has been received, a process of setting a second specialized flag is executed in step S6304. After setting either the specialized flag in step S6302 or step S6304, a process of inputting 10 into the specialized counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed in step S6305, and then the first specialized process is terminated. The specialized counter is a counter for notifying the number of games remaining in the specialized zone. The number of games remaining in the specialized zone is displayed in a game number image GP, such as "8 games remaining," in a specified area of the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. 121.

If no specialized zone command has been received, step S6306 determines whether any specialized flag has been set and whether a specialized zone command has already been received. If any specialized flag has been set, step S6307 determines whether a consumption command has been received. As already explained, in the first specialized zone, a consumption command is output when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming status, while in the second specialized zone, a consumption command is output regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming status.

If a consumption command has been received, it is determined in step S6308 whether or not an additional command has been received. If an additional command has been received, in step S6309 a setting process is performed so that the additional effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Note that in the first specialized zone, the number of games in AT mode may be increased, so the additional effect may be a notification such as "+5 games" as shown in Figure 121 (b1), and in the second specialized zone, set stocks in AT mode may be performed, so the additional effect may be a notification such as "+1 set".

In contrast, if an add-on command has not been received, step S6310 performs setting processing to display a disappointment effect (Fig. 121 (b2)) on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. Incidentally, if the second specialized zone is consumed with a number of bets other than the specific specified number according to the gaming status, the number of games in the second specialized zone is counted, but a set stock lottery is not performed. Therefore, although a consumption command is output, an add-on command is not output, and a disappointment effect is always executed.

After performing either the effect setting process in step S6309 or step S6310, a process is executed in step S6311 to decrement the specialized counter by 1. Then, in step S6312, a process is executed to update the display of the remaining number of games in the specialized zone in accordance with the decrement of the specialized counter. In the following step S6313, it is determined whether the specialized counter has reached 0. If it has reached 0, a setting process is executed in step S6314 to display the specialized zone end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., and then the first specialization process is terminated.

On the other hand, if no consumption command was received in step S6307 and the first specialized zone was consumed with a bet number other than the specific specified number according to the gaming status, the process proceeds to step S6315. As described above, if the first specialized zone is consumed with a bet number other than the specific specified number according to the gaming status, no additional lottery is conducted, but the number of games in the first specialized zone is not counted either. In other words, in this case, the consumption of one game in the first specialized zone has been avoided. Therefore, in step S6315, a setting process is executed so that an avoidance effect (Figure 121 (b3)) corresponding to the avoidance of one game in the first specialized zone is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. After that, the first specialization process is terminated.

Incidentally, when an additional effect or disappointing effect is performed as described above, the display of the remaining number of games in the specialized zone is updated by subtracting one game (Fig. 121 (b1) and Fig. 121 (b2)). On the other hand, when an avoidance effect is performed, the display of the remaining number of games in the specialized zone is not updated (Fig. 121 (b3)). This also makes it clear to the player that the consumption of one game in the first specialized zone has been avoided.

<Specialized Second Treatment>
Next, the second specialization process performed in step S6219 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S6401, it is determined whether an AT command has been received. As already explained, an AT command is a command that is output when an AT random number is acquired in the random number acquisition process. If an AT command has been received, in step S6402, a process is executed to store the AT random number corresponding to the received AT command in a reserved memory area corresponding to the reserved memory area RE on the main control unit 101 side. Incidentally, the AT random number stored in the reserved memory area is the AT random number used for the AT mode transition lottery for the next game, the additional lottery, and the set stock lottery.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6401, or after the processing of step S6402 has been executed, in step S6403 it is determined whether any of the specialization flags have been set. If none of the specialization flags have been set, the second specialization processing is terminated. If any of the specialization flags have been set, the processing proceeds to step S6404, where processing is performed to determine the AT random number stored in the reserved memory area. Then, in step S6405, processing is performed to obtain the notification type table from the various table memory area 182a, and in step S6406, processing is performed to determine the notification type of the specific notification that suggests the AT random number to be used for the next game's additional lottery, etc.

As shown in Figure 120(a), the notification type table is set up so that the first specific notification is likely to be selected if the AT random number is in the first numerical range associated with the first corresponding role that results in an additional win or the like in the first specialized zone or the second specialized zone; the second specific notification is likely to be selected if the AT random number is in the second numerical range associated with the second corresponding role; and the third specific notification is likely to be selected if the AT random number is in the third numerical range associated with the third corresponding role. In other words, the first specific notification is a notification that suggests an additional win or the like will occur if the lottery result of the next game is the first corresponding role; the second specific notification is a notification that suggests an additional win or the like will occur if the lottery result of the next game is the second corresponding role; and the third specific notification is a notification that suggests an additional win or the like will occur if the lottery result of the next game is the third corresponding role. The presentation of the first to third specific notifications is set so that they can be clearly identified by the player; for example, in the first specific notification, as shown in FIG. 121 (a1), a close-up of the motivated main character's face is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65; in the second specific notification, as shown in FIG. 121 (a2), a close-up of the normal main character's face is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65; and in the third specific notification, as shown in FIG. 121 (a3), a close-up of the depressed main character's face is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65.

For more details about the notification type table, in the second specialized zone, if the AT random number is in the first numerical range, the first specific notification will always be selected, if the AT random number is in the second numerical range, the second specific notification will always be selected, and if the AT random number is in the third numerical range, the third specific notification will always be selected.

In contrast, in the first specialized zone, if the AT random number in the first numerical range is between "1" and "30," the first specific alert is selected, but if it is between "31" and "40," the second specific alert is selected, and if it is between "41" and "51," the third specific alert is selected, so that even in the first numerical range, the second or third specific alert can be selected. Furthermore, if the AT random number in the second numerical range is between "55" and "60," the second specific alert is selected, but if it is between "52" and "54," the first specific alert is selected, and if it is between "61" and "64," the third specific alert is selected, so that even in the second numerical range, the first or third specific alert can be selected. If the AT random number in the third number range is between "85" and "128", the third specific notification will be selected, but if it is between "65" and "74", the first specific notification will be selected, and if it is between "75" and "84", the second specific notification will be selected, meaning that even in the third number range, the first or second specific notification may be selected.

Incidentally, the CPU 181 can determine which numerical range an AT random number corresponds to based on the value of the AT random number as well as the specialization flag that is set.

After determining the type of notification in step S6406, step S6407 determines whether it is the first specific notification. If it is the first specific notification, step S6408 executes a setting process to display the first specific notification on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., before terminating the second processing for this specialization. If it is not the first specific notification, step S6409 determines whether it is the second specific notification. If it is the second specific notification, step S6410 executes a setting process to display the second specific notification on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., before terminating the second processing for this specialization. Then, if it is not the second specific notification, step S6411 executes a setting process to display the third specific notification on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., before terminating the second processing for this specialization.

<The first and second specialized zones in action>
The manner in which the first specialized zone and the second specialized zone are carried out will be explained with reference to the summary table of the first specialized zone and the second specialized zone in Figure 120(b) and the timing charts in Figures 122 and 123.

As described above, the first specialized zone is a specialized zone transitioned to at the start of one set of AT mode and is a specialized zone for determining the number of AT mode games in one set. In this first specialized zone, the probability of winning the lottery for adding the number of AT mode games is higher than in other states and continues for 10 games. The lottery for adding the number of AT mode games is executed based on the AT random number obtained in the previous game and the lottery results of the current game. If the AT random number is a random number in the first number range and the lottery result is a first corresponding role, an additional win is awarded. If the AT random number is a random number in the second number range and the lottery result is a second corresponding role, an additional win is awarded. If the AT random number is a random number in the third number range and the lottery result is a third corresponding role, an additional win is awarded. The lottery results for the game are set so that the second corresponding role is more likely to be won than the third corresponding role, and the first corresponding role is more likely to be won than the second corresponding role, with the first corresponding role being the most likely to be won. In other words, if the pre-obtained AT random number is a random number in the first number range, there is a high probability of winning an additional prize.

In this embodiment, in the first specialized zone, a specific notification is made that suggests information about the pre-acquired AT random number. Furthermore, if the first specialized zone is played with a bet number other than the specified number, no additional lottery is conducted, but the number of games played in the first specialized zone is not counted either. Furthermore, the acquisition and shifting of AT random numbers is carried out regardless of whether the bet number is the specified number. In other words, by predicting whether the pre-acquired AT random number is a random number in the first number range, and playing with the specified number of bets in the event that an AT random number in the first number range is acquired, the player can enjoy the benefits of a high probability of winning an additional prize.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, if the first game in the first specialized zone is a game that starts at timing 1a and ends at timing 1b, and the first game is played with a specific prescribed number of bets (3 bets), the AT random number obtained at the end timing (-1b) of the game one game before the first game is used for the additional lottery for the first game. Furthermore, the AT random number obtained at the end timing (1b) of the first game is used for the additional lottery for the second game in the first specialized zone. However, the figure shows a case where the second game is played with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number (2 bets). In this case, random number shift processing is performed at the start of the second game (2a) and random number acquisition processing is performed at the end (2b), but the additional lottery processing is not executed at the start of the second game. In this case, the number of games in the first specialized zone is not counted. The diagram shows a case where, after moving to the first specialized zone, the second, third, sixth to ninth, tenth, and eleventh games are consumed with bets outside the specified number, meaning that it effectively takes 15 games to complete the first specialized zone.

Here, in the first specialized zone, even if the AT mode flag is set, the execution of the push order notification is restricted. In other words, when the push order bell is won, the push order corresponding to the first through sixth minor roles is not notified, resulting in a potential loss of approximately 1.77 medals per game in a three-bet game, and approximately 0.64 medals per game in a two-bet game. In this embodiment, the acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first number range is 40%, and if the 10-game first specialized zone is played with only games in which AT random numbers in this first number range are acquired at a specific prescribed number, it will take an average of approximately 25 games to complete the first specialized zone. In other words, if you try to use only the AT random numbers in the first number range, an average loss of approximately 27.3 medals (1.77 medals x 10 games + 0.64 medals x 15 games) may occur.

In contrast, the number of additional games played when an additional win is achieved using the AT random numbers in the first number range is 5, as shown in Figure 112. Given that the probability of the game's lottery result being the first corresponding role is approximately 85%, the expected number of additional games played when only AT random numbers in the first number range are played in the first specialized zone is approximately 42.7 games (5 games x 85% x 10 games). Furthermore, given that the expected number of medals won per game in AT mode is approximately 6.00, the expected number of medals won when this expected number of additional games is played in AT mode is 256.2 (42.7 games x 6.00), which is more than the medal loss mentioned above, and an increase of approximately 228.9 medals can be expected. In other words, by only playing AT random numbers in the first number range in the first specialized zone, players can gain an advantage.

By the way, if the first specialized zone is played entirely in three bet games, the medal loss will be approximately 17.7 medals (1.77 medals x 10 games). Also, if not only the first number range AT random numbers but also AT random numbers in other number ranges are played, the expected number of added games is approximately 20.1 games, and if this expected number of added games is played in AT mode, the expected number of medals won is 120.6 medals, which means an increase of approximately 102.9 medals can be expected. In other words, although playing the first specialized zone entirely in three bet games is advantageous for the player, the expected number of medals won will be greater if only the first number range AT random numbers are played.

In the following explanation, a game in which only the AT random numbers in the first number range are consumed by switching between a specific specified number of bets and a number of bets other than the specific specified number is also referred to as advantageous play, and a game in which the AT random numbers in each number range are consumed without switching the number of bets is also referred to as normal play.

In contrast, the second specialized zone is a specialized zone that is entered during some of the additional wins during AT mode, and is a zone where a game in which the probability of winning the set stock lottery is higher than in other states continues for 10 games. Similar to the additional lottery described above, the set stock lottery is executed based on the AT random number obtained in the previous game and the lottery result of that game. If the AT random number is a random number in the first number range and the lottery result is the first corresponding role, a set stock is won. If the AT random number is a random number in the second number range and the lottery result is the second corresponding role, a set stock is won. If the AT random number is a random number in the third number range and the lottery result is the third corresponding role, a set stock is won. In other words, similar to the first specialized zone described above, if the AT random number obtained in advance is a random number in the first number range, a high probability of winning the set stock can be expected.

In this embodiment, a specific notification is also made in the second specialized zone, suggesting information about the previously acquired AT random numbers. However, similar to the additional lottery in the first specialized zone, if the second specialized zone is played with a number of bets other than the specific specified number, a set stock lottery is not held. However, unlike the first specialized zone, the number of games in the second specialized zone is counted even if the second specialized zone is played with a number of bets other than the specific specified number. In other words, in the second specialized zone, even if you try to consume only the AT random numbers in the first number range by switching between the specific specified number of bets and a number of bets other than the specific specified number, as in the advantageous play described above, playing with a number of bets other than the specific specified number will result in the consumption of the number of games in the second specialized zone, and you will not be able to receive the benefits of the second specialized zone.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 123, if the first game in the second specialized zone is a game that starts at timing 1a and ends at timing 1b, and the first game is played with a specific prescribed number of bets (3 bets), the set stock lottery for the first game uses the AT random number obtained at the end timing (-1b) of the game one game before the first game. Similarly to the first specialized zone, the set stock lottery for the second game in the second specialized zone uses the AT random number obtained at the end timing (1b) of the first game. Meanwhile, the figure shows a case where the second game is played with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number (2 bets). In this case, although the random number shift process and random number acquisition process are performed, the set stock lottery process is not executed at the start of the second game, and the number of games in the second specialized zone is counted. The diagram shows a case where, after transitioning to the second specialized zone, the second, third, and fifth games were consumed with bets outside the specific required number, meaning that the player was effectively unable to enjoy the benefits of the second specialized zone for three games. In other words, in the second specialized zone, regardless of the type of specific notification, playing regular games is more advantageous for the player than playing advantageous games.

<About the advantage when playing the first special zone with advantage play and normal play>
The degree of advantage when playing the first specialized zone in normal play and when playing in advantageous play will be explained with reference to the timing charts in Figures 124 and 125. In Figures 124 and 125, (a1) and (b1) indicate normal play, and (a2) and (b2) indicate advantageous play.

As shown in FIG. 124, after one set of AT mode from ta1 to ta2 is executed, if the first specialized zone is entered, the first specialized zone is executed in normal play, where push order notification is not performed from ta2 to ta3 (for 10 games). In contrast, in advantageous play, the first specialized zone is executed in which push order notification is not performed from ta2 to ta4 (for approximately 25 games), and the medal loss is greater in advantageous play than in normal play. Meanwhile, the next set of AT mode in normal play is from ta3 to ta5 (approximately 50 games, 30 initial games, approximately 20 additional games), while the next set of AT mode in advantageous play is from ta4 to ta7 (approximately 73 games, 30 initial games, approximately 43 additional games), and the medal increase during AT mode is greater in advantageous play than in normal play. Similarly, although the first specialized zone from ta7 to ta9 in advantageous play results in greater medal loss than the first specialized zone from ta5 to ta6 in normal play, the AT mode from ta9 to ta10 in advantageous play results in greater medal gain than the AT mode from ta6 to ta8 in normal play. In this way, it is generally more advantageous for the player to play the first specialized zone in advantageous play than in normal play.

In this embodiment, the acquisition rate of AT random numbers for the first number range (40%) is set so that the medal increase from the number of additional games played when advantageous play is performed (256.2 medals = 42.7 games x 6.00 medals) is greater than the medal loss from completing the first specialized zone with advantageous play (27.3 medals = 1.77 medals x 10 games + 0.64 medals x 15 games). Furthermore, the acquisition rate of AT random numbers for the first number range is set so that the difference between the medal loss from completing the first specialized zone with advantageous play and the medal increase from the number of additional games is greater than the difference between the medal loss from completing the first specialized zone with normal play and the medal increase from the number of additional games.

In other words, in this embodiment, the expected increase in number of medals per game in AT mode is set so that the increase in medals due to the number of additional games played when advantageous play is performed is greater than the loss of medals due to the first specialized zone being completed through advantageous play. Furthermore, the expected increase in number of medals per game in AT mode is set so that the difference between the loss of medals due to the first specialized zone being completed through advantageous play and the increase in medals due to the number of additional games is greater than the difference between the loss of medals due to the first specialized zone being completed through normal play and the increase in medals due to the number of additional games.

The average number of games played when the first specialized zone is played with advantageous play is calculated by dividing the number of games played in the first specialized zone (10 games) by the rate of obtaining AT random numbers in the first number range (40%). Furthermore, the amount of medal loss when the first specialized zone is played with advantageous play is calculated by multiplying the average number of games played when the first specialized zone is played with advantageous play by the expected increase or decrease in medals for each bet amount. The expected number of additional games played when the first specialized zone is played with advantageous play is calculated by multiplying the probability of winning the additional lottery using the AT random numbers in the first number range by the number of additional games played per game and the number of games played in the first specialized zone. In other words, the lower the rate of obtaining AT random numbers in the first number range, the higher the average number of games played when the first specialized zone is played with advantageous play. This will result in a greater loss of medals in the first specialized zone, and in order to ensure the advantage of advantageous play, it will be necessary to increase the number of added games in the first number range, increase the expected increase in coins per game in AT mode, and increase the expected increase or decrease in coins for each bet amount when the first specialized zone is played with advantageous play. Also, the smaller the expected increase in coins per game in AT mode, the more necessary it will be to increase the number of added games in the first number range, increase the acquisition rate in the first number range, and increase the expected increase or decrease in coins for each bet amount (reduce the decrease) in order to ensure the advantage of advantageous play.

If the parameters, such as the rate of obtaining AT random numbers in the first number range and the expected increase in coins per game in AT mode, are related as described above, there is an advantage to playing the first specialized zone with advantageous play, and it becomes possible to realize innovative gameplay, such as using specific notifications to receive additional draws only for desired games.

However, for example, if a large number of set stocks are generated by the second specialized zone, etc., and the upper limit of the number of games or the upper limit of the increase in coins in the advantageous zone is reached even without additional bonuses or set stocks, it would be more advantageous for the player to play through the first specialized zone through normal play rather than through advantageous play. This situation will be explained with reference to Figure 125.

When a transition is made to the first specialized zone after one set of AT mode from tb1 to tb2 is made, the first specialized zone is executed in normal play, where push order notifications are not provided from tb2 to tb3 (for 10 games). In contrast, in advantageous play, the first specialized zone is executed in normal play, where push order notifications are not provided from tb2 to tb4 (for approximately 25 games), resulting in greater medal losses in advantageous play than in normal play. Meanwhile, the next set of AT mode in normal play is executed from tb3 to tb5 (approximately 50 games, 30 initial games, approximately 20 additional games), while the next set of AT mode in advantageous play is executed from tb4 to tb7 (approximately 73 games, 30 initial games, approximately 43 additional games), resulting in greater medal gains during AT mode in advantageous play than in normal play. Similarly, although the first specialized zone from tb7 to tb9 in advantageous play results in greater medal loss than the first specialized zone from tb5 to tb6 in normal play, the AT mode from tb9 to tb13 in advantageous play results in greater medal gain than the AT mode from tb6 to tb8 in normal play. The flow up to this point is the same as in Figure 124 above.

As noted above, Figure 125 shows a situation in which the upper limit of games and the upper limit of increased coins in the favorable zone will be reached even if no additional bonuses or set stocks occur. More specifically, it shows a case in which it is confirmed that the upper limit of games will be reached at tb16. In other words, in normal play, after the AT mode ends at tb8, the first specialized zone is executed from tb8 to tb10, the AT mode is executed from tb10 to tb12, the first specialized zone is executed from tb12 to tb14, and the AT mode is executed from tb14 to tb16. Also, in favorable play, after the AT mode ends at tb13, the first specialized zone is executed from tb13 to tb15, and the AT mode is executed from tb15 to tb16. In this case, fewer games are played in the first specialized zone in normal play than in favorable play, and the amount of medal loss in the first specialized zone is reduced. As a result, the total medal increase at tb16, when the upper limit of games is reached, is greater in normal play than in favorable play. In other words, in situations where there are many stocks in this type of AT mode and it is certain that the upper limit number of games will be reached, it is more advantageous for the player to play the first specialized zone through normal play rather than through advantageous play.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the AT mode ends without a set stock, the AT mode end flag is set and the advantageous period ends. Furthermore, as described above, when the upper limit number of games or upper limit increase number of coins in the advantageous period is reached, the advantageous period ends even if there are remaining AT mode, etc. If the period until the end of the advantageous period is a predetermined period, as shown in Figure 124, a situation in which it is advantageous to complete the first specialized zone through advantageous play is a situation in which playing a larger number of games in the first specialized zone makes it possible to increase the proportion of AT mode in the predetermined period until the end of the advantageous period, which is advantageous. In contrast, as shown in Figure 125, a situation in which it is advantageous to complete the first specialized zone through normal play is a situation in which playing a smaller number of games in the first specialized zone than in the case of advantageous play makes it possible to increase the proportion of AT mode in the predetermined period until the end of the advantageous period, which is advantageous. In other words, in this embodiment, there are situations where it is advantageous to play a larger number of games in the first specialized zone, and situations where it is advantageous to play a smaller number of games in the first specialized zone, and it is possible to realize innovative gameplay by having the player determine which situation exists and play the exact opposite game.

Explaining the relationship with the presentation on the auxiliary display unit 65, as described above, even if no additional game count or set stock occurs in the AT mode, in certain situations where the upper limit of the number of games or the upper limit of the increase in coins is reached and this is not notified as an ending presentation, the excess notification image EDP may be displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as an excess notification presentation (Fig. 126(a)). In this case, for example, in the first specialized zone, if the third specific notification is made as shown in Fig. 126(b1) and it is understood that an AT random number in the third number range has been obtained, if the excess notification image EDP is not displayed, the player can play with two bets other than the specific specified number to avoid the additional lottery for the AT random number in the third number range. Alternatively, if the third specific notification is made as shown in Fig. 126(b2) and the excess notification image EDP is displayed, the player can play with three bets, the specific specified number, to have the additional lottery for the AT random number in the third number range.

In this embodiment, the excess notification effect can be executed not only when the maximum number of games is reached, but also when the maximum number of coins is likely to be reached. In other words, as mentioned above, when it is certain that the maximum number of games will be reached, completing the first specialized zone through normal play rather than advantageous play will result in a higher final number of medals. However, when the maximum number of coins is likely to be reached, even if the first specialized zone is completed through normal play rather than advantageous play, the final number of medals won is the maximum number of coins, and this does not change regardless of the type of play through which the first specialized zone is completed. However, even if the maximum number of coins is ultimately reached, completing the first specialized zone through normal play requires fewer games to reach the maximum number of coins than completing it through advantageous play, making normal play more beneficial to the player in terms of time efficiency. Therefore, when the excess notification effect is executed, completing the first specialized zone through normal play is beneficial to the player regardless of the forced termination condition, making it possible to suggest beneficial gameplay to the player without complicating the game.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent effects:

The system uses pre-acquired AT random numbers and game lottery results to draw lots for additional AT mode games and set stocks. When the excess flag is not set, it is advantageous for the player to complete the first specialized zone through advantageous play, which avoids the execution of the additional lottery according to the pre-acquired AT random number. When the excess flag is set, it is advantageous for the player to complete the first specialized zone through normal play, which allows the execution of the additional lottery regardless of the AT random number. This allows for innovative gameplay, such as having the player decide which game to play in the first specialized zone. In this case, the decision depends on whether the upper limit of the advantageous zone has been reached, and set stocks that occurred before that serve as criteria for making the decision. This draws attention not only to whether or not a set stock has occurred, but also to the occurrence of set stocks, including their cumulative number and the relationship with the number of games played in the advantageous zone, thereby favorably increasing attention to the game.

By configuring the system to issue a specific notification corresponding to a pre-acquired AT random number, it becomes possible to determine whether or not to avoid the execution of an additional lottery in the first specialized zone through this specific notification.

When the excess flag is set, an excess notification effect can be displayed for each game. Therefore, even if the number of set stocks cannot be determined, the excess notification effect can be used to determine whether or not the first specialized zone should be consumed with advantageous play.

The excess notification effect can be executed when an ending effect is not being performed. When an ending effect is being performed, even if an additional bonus occurs, the additional bonus notification effect will not be executed, and since the player is aware that the upper limit of the advantageous zone will be reached, the player can easily determine that there is no point in playing advantageously in the first specialized zone. Therefore, by not executing the excess notification effect in such a situation, the annoyance of overlapping ending effects and excess notification effects can be eliminated, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy an ending effect that would be difficult to see.

Even if the first specialized zone is played with a bet number other than the specified number, the number of games played in that first specialized zone will not be counted. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the execution of the additional lottery in the first specialized zone by betting a number other than the specified number from eroding the number of games played in the first specialized zone, allowing players to play in this avoided manner with peace of mind.

During the first specialized zone, even if the AT mode flag is set, no additional bonus notifications will be issued. As a result, even if the first specialized zone is completed through advantageous play, an increase in medals in the first specialized zone cannot be expected. This allows players to decide whether or not to avoid the additional bonus lottery during advantageous play based on the balance with medal reductions, making the avoided play more enjoyable and preventing the completion of the first specialized zone through advantageous play from being directly advantageous.

When the excess flag is not set, if the number of plays in the first specialized zone is likely to be high and the play is completed through advantageous play, it is possible to increase the proportion of AT mode in the specified period until the end of the advantageous zone.Furthermore, when the excess flag is set, if the number of plays in the first specialized zone is completed through normal play, which is likely to be lower than in advantageous play, it is possible to increase the proportion of AT mode in the specified period until the end of the advantageous zone.In other words, the configuration makes it possible to increase the proportion of AT mode in the specified period by either increasing or decreasing the number of plays in the first specialized zone, making it possible to realize innovative gameplay in which the first specialized zone is completed after determining in which play the proportion of AT mode should be increased.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the execution rate of the ending effect and the excess notification effect differs depending on whether the condition for the forced termination of the advantageous zone is that the upper limit number of games is reached or that the upper limit increase number of coins is reached. Figure 127 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process when all the reels stop in this modified example.

Steps S6501 to S6507 are the same as steps S6201 to S6207 above. In step S6508, it is determined whether a first exceedance command has been received. If a first exceedance command has been received and it is known that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone will be reached, then in step S6509, a process is executed to set a first exceedance flag in the various flags storage area 183a. Then, in steps S6510 to S6513, processing for the ending presentation is executed. On the other hand, if a second exceedance command has been received instead of a first exceedance command (step S6514: YES), then in step S6515, a process is executed to set a second exceedance flag, and processing for the ending presentation is not executed.

In other words, in this modified example, if it is known in advance that the maximum number of games will be reached, the ending effect can be initiated, but if it is known in advance that the maximum increased number of coins will be reached, the ending effect will not be initiated. This is because, as mentioned above, depending on the game content in the first specialized zone, a large number of medals may be lost, and it takes into account the possibility that even if the ending effect has started, the maximum increased number of coins may not be reached depending on the amount of medals lost. In this way, it is possible to avoid any contradiction between the execution of the ending effect and whether or not to force a termination.

If the second excess command has not been received, step S6516 determines whether any excess flags are set. If any excess flags are set, the excess notification lottery process is executed (step S6518), provided that the ending performance has not been performed (step S6517: NO).

In this modified example, the overage notification lottery process determines whether or not to execute an overage notification based on the overage notification table shown in FIG. 128. The overage notification table is configured so that winning the overage notification lottery is easier when only the first overage flag is set than when only the second overage flag is set, and winning the overage notification lottery is easiest when both overage flags are set. In other words, even if it is determined that the upper limit increase in coins will be reached, the overage notification effect may not be executed, and this possibility is higher than when it is determined that the upper limit number of games will be reached. Therefore, even if the upper limit increase in coins would have been reached if the first specialized zone had been played without changing the number of bets, it is more likely that the upper limit increase in coins will not be reached due to medal losses incurred by changing the number of bets. This increases interest in the set stock number and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY, and allows players to change the number of bets in the first specialized zone while predicting whether the upper limit increase in coins will be reached, significantly increasing the enjoyment of the game.

If the excess notification lottery is won during the full stop effect setting process (step S6519: YES), the excess notification effect setting process is performed in step S6520. Furthermore, after executing the process of step S6513, step S6515, or step S6520, if a positive judgment is made in step S6517, or a negative judgment is made in step S6512 or step S6519, the second specialized process is executed in step S6521. The processes of steps S6521 and S6522 are the same as the processes of steps S6219 and S6220 described above.

<Modification 2>
In this modification, the excess notification table used in the excess notification lottery is different from that in the third embodiment etc. Fig. 129 is a diagram showing an example of the excess notification table in this modification.

In this modified example, the excess notification table has parameters set for the game lottery results and the setting values set in the win probability setting process. In other words, for chance numbers A to C, the excess notification effect is generally more likely to occur in a game with chance number B than chance number A, and more likely to occur in a game with chance number C than chance number B. The settings are such that the less likely a game result is to win, the more likely the excess notification effect will occur. Also, in relation to the setting values, the settings are such that the excess notification effect is more likely to occur when chance numbers A to C are set as triggers than when odd numbers are set.

In games that result in Cherry A, the overage notification effect does not occur at settings of 3 or lower, but occurs at settings of 4 or higher. On the other hand, in games that result in Cherry B, the overage notification effect only occurs at settings of 3 or lower, and does not occur at settings of 4 or higher. In games that result in Cherry C, the overage notification effect occurs with a flat 30% probability, regardless of the setting value.

In addition, the overtime notification effect triggered by the watermelon is more likely to occur with odd number settings than with even number settings, and the overtime notification effect triggered by the push order bell is more likely to occur with even number settings than with odd number settings.

As already explained, when the game's lottery result is a specific role known as a rare role, it is set up so that it is easier to win the bonus lottery or set stock lottery. In this modified example, however, the lower the game's winning probability, the more likely the excess notification effect is to occur. By doing this, when there are already enough remaining games or stocks to reach the upper limit, winning a specific role is not wasted, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. More specifically, when there are enough remaining games or stocks to reach the upper limit, there is no point in winning these specific roles and generating bonus games or set stocks. Therefore, by generating the excess notification effect as described above, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy the benefit of not having to play unnecessary games in the first specialized zone as an alternative to bonus games or set stocks.

In addition, by setting a setting difference in the overage notification lottery, players can guess the setting value even in situations where it is clear that the upper limit will be reached, which increases the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the circumstances under which the excess notification effect can be performed differ from those in the third embodiment, etc. Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing the full stop effect setting process in this modification.

The difference in the full stop effect setting process in this modified example is that before executing the excess notification lottery process (step S6617), the presence or absence of the first specialization flag is checked, and if the first specialization zone is in effect, the excess notification effect processing (steps S6617 to S6619) is not performed.

In other words, even if the excess flag is set and it is known that the maximum number of games or maximum increase in coins will be reached, no excess notification effect indicating this situation will occur during the first specialized zone. By doing this, before reaching the first specialized zone, the player is prompted to decide whether or not to play advantageously if they reach the first specialized zone, and in the first specialized zone, the player is prompted to reconsider whether or not to play advantageously while judging the winning rate of the additional lottery from each specific notification. In this way, by providing points of interest for each game, it is less likely to confuse the player and it is possible to fully enjoy the fun of the game.

Note that while the configuration is such that excess notification effects do not occur during the first specialized zone, it is not limited to a configuration that completely prevents them from occurring. Any configuration that limits excess notification effects during the first specialized zone may be used, such as making the winning probability of the excess notification lottery during the first specialized zone lower than the winning probability of the excess notification lottery outside the first specialized zone, or making excess notification effects during the first specialized zone more difficult for players to see than excess notification effects outside the first specialized zone.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the correspondence between the AT random number and the specific notification differs from that in the third embodiment etc. Fig. 131 is a flowchart showing the second specialization process in this modification.

In this modified example, in steps S6701 and S6702, the AT random number of the received AT command is stored in the reserved memory area, similar to steps S6401 and S6402. In the following step S6703, it is determined whether any of the specialization flags are set. If any of the specialization flags are set, in step S6704, the AT random number in the reserved memory area is obtained, and in step S6705, it is determined whether the AT random number is an AT random number of the first value range. If it is an AT random number of the first value range, in step S6706, processing is executed to perform the first specific notification, and then the second specialization processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT random number is not an AT random number of the first value range, it is determined in step S6707 whether the excess flag is set.

If the excess flag is set, that is, if the situation is such that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit number of increased coins in the advantageous zone will be reached even if no additional bonuses or set stocks occur, then even if the AT random number provided for the next game's additional bonus lottery or set stock lottery is not a random number in the first number range, proceed to step S6706 and execute processing to make the first specific notification. In other words, in this case, even if the AT random number is in the second or third number range, the first specific notification corresponding to the AT random number in the first number range will be executed. By doing this, in a situation where the upper limit number of games or the upper limit number of increased coins in the advantageous zone will be reached even if no additional bonuses or set stocks occur, the player will play with the specified number of bets without hesitation, even if the AT random number is in the second or third number range. This makes it easier to ensure the player's profits in such situations.

If the excess flag is not set, step S6708 determines whether the AT random number is in the second number range. If the AT random number is in the second number range, step S6709 executes a pseudo-announcement lottery. A pseudo-announcement lottery is a lottery in which a pseudo-first specific announcement corresponding to an AT random number in the first number range is executed when the AT random number is in the second number range, even if the situation is not such that the upper limit number of games or upper limit increase number of coins in the advantageous zone as described above will be reached. As shown in FIG. 132, this pseudo-announcement lottery is set up so that some random numbers in the second number range ("52" to "57") can win, and the type of random number that can win differs depending on the setting value set in the winning probability setting process. More specifically, odd number settings make it easier to win the pseudo notification lottery than even number settings; with odd number settings, you will win the pseudo notification lottery if the number is between "52" and "57" in the second number range, and with even number settings, you will win the pseudo notification lottery if the number is between "52" and "54" in the second number range.

After the pseudo notification lottery is executed in step S6709, it is determined in step S6710 whether or not the pseudo notification lottery has been won. If the result is a win, then in step S6706, a setting process for issuing a first specific notification is executed, and then the second process for this specialization is terminated. On the other hand, if the pseudo notification lottery is not won, then in step S6711, a setting process for issuing a second specific notification is executed, and then the second process for this specialization is terminated. Also, if in step S6708 the AT random number is not in the second number range but in the third number range, then in step S6712, a setting process for issuing a third specific notification is executed, and then the second process for this specialization is terminated.

As described above, according to this modified example, if the excess flag is set, even if the AT random number is not in the first numerical range but in the second or third numerical range, a first specific notification corresponding to the AT random number in the first numerical range is issued. Therefore, the first specific notification can be trusted and it can be expected that the first specialized zone will be consumed as is. Therefore, by using the specific notification, it is possible to effectively avoid situations in which the consumption of the first specialized zone should be avoided, and to tolerate situations in which it should be tolerated.

In this case, if the pseudo notification lottery is won during normal play, the first specific notification may be made even if the AT random number is in the second number range. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt when the first specific notification is made and an additional win is not made even though the first specific role has been won.

If the excess flag is set, the first specific notification will always be issued even if the AT random number is in the second or third number range. On the other hand, if the excess flag is not set, the first specific notification will be issued even if the AT random number is in the second number range by winning the pseudo notification lottery. In other words, the probability of the first specific notification being issued when the AT random number is in the second number range is higher when the excess flag is set than when the excess flag is not set, and in situations where the excess flag is not set, the reliability of the first specific notification is ensured to a certain extent. It is precisely because of this configuration that issuing the first specific notification when the excess flag is set effectively encourages players to play with a specific prescribed number of bets.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the number of additional games to be played when an additional win occurs in the first specialized zone is varied depending on the lottery results of the games. Figure 133 shows an example of an additional lottery table for the first specialized zone in this modified example.

In this modified example, even if the lottery result of the game when an additional win occurs is the same, the number of additional games is set to differ depending on the value of the AT random number.Also, even if the lottery result of the AT random number when an additional win occurs is the same, the number of additional games is set to differ depending on the lottery result of the game.

For example, if an additional win is made with chance numbers A to C, 35 games will be added if the AT random number is in the first number range, 23 games will be added if the AT random number is in the second number range, and 13 games will be added if the AT random number is in the third number range. Also, if an additional win is made with an AT random number in the first number range, if the game lottery result is chance numbers A to C, 35 games will be added as above, but if it is cherries A to C, 35 games will be added, if it is a common bell, 50 games will be added, if it is a watermelon, 35 games will be added, and if it is a normal lip A to C or push order bell, 4 games will be added.

By doing this, even when an additional lottery is conducted using AT random numbers in the first number range when advantageous play is performed, the game lottery results will have a significant impact on the number of additional games, dramatically increasing the enjoyment of advantageous play.

In addition, even if the result of the lottery for a game in which an additional lottery using AT random numbers in the first number range is the first corresponding role, if a specific role (third corresponding role) is won, the number of additional games will be greater than other results. This makes it less likely that players will be dissatisfied with winning a specific role, as they will not or will find it difficult to feel the benefit.

<Modification 6>
In the third embodiment, the gameplay was described in which the first specialized zone was advanced or its advancement was avoided depending on the AT random number acquired in advance, but in this modified example, the criteria for advancing or avoiding the first specialized zone are different. Specifically, in this modified example, the value of the advantageous zone game number AG is involved in the AT mode additional lottery, and if the advantageous zone game number AG is in the first numerical range, the additional lottery is won with a high probability, and if the advantageous zone game number AG is in the second numerical range or the third numerical range, the probability of winning the additional lottery is lower than when it is in the first numerical range.

Figure 134 is a flowchart showing the processing for the first specialized zone in this modified example.

In step S6801, a process for setting a consumption command is executed. In addition, in step S6802, a process for determining the lottery results of the game is executed. The processes in steps S6801 and S6802 are the same as the processes in steps S5701 and S5702 described above.

In the following step S6803, a process is executed to determine the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. Then, in step S6804, a process is executed to obtain the bonus lottery table for the first specialized zone from the various table storage area 105a.

In the bonus lottery table for the first specialized zone in this modified example, as shown in Figure 135, the value of the advantageous zone game count AG that will result in an bonus win is set depending on the lottery result of the game. Specifically, if the value of the advantageous zone game count AG is in the first numerical range and the last digit is 1, 3, 5, or 7, an bonus win will occur if the first corresponding role is played; if the last digit is 9 in the second numerical range and the second corresponding role is played, an bonus win will occur; and if the last digit is 0, 2, 4, 6, or 8 in the third numerical range and the third corresponding role is played, an bonus win will occur.

Then, in step S6805, an additional lottery process is executed, and if an additional win is found (step S6806: YES), in step S6807 the number of additional games is added to the AT game counter, and in step S6808, an additional command is set. The processes in steps S6805 to S6808 are the same as those in steps S5705 to S5708 above.

Although detailed explanation using diagrams will be omitted, in this modified example, the specific notification can be configured to correspond to the value of the advantageous zone game count AG rather than the value of the AT random number. Specifically, if the advantageous zone game count AG is in the first numerical range, the first specific notification can be executed; if the advantageous zone game count AG is in the second numerical range, the second specific notification can be executed; and if the advantageous zone game count AG is in the third numerical range, the third specific notification can be executed.

In this way, the information used for the additional lottery in the first specialized zone is not limited to the game lottery results and AT random numbers, but may be information that is updated regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, such as the number of games in the advantageous zone AG. In other words, if the lottery uses at least information that is updated regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, and if the lottery is allowed for a specific prescribed number of bets but is restricted for a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number, gameplay is achieved in which the player waits until the updated information becomes the desired information after a bet other than the specific prescribed number. In this case, the probability that the updated information becomes the desired information should be set so that the medal gain from the number of additional games when advantageous play is performed is greater than the medal loss when the first specialized zone is completed with advantageous play. The probability that the updated information will be the desired information can be set so that the difference between the medal loss when the first specialized zone is played with advantageous play and the medal increase when the number of additional games is played is greater than the difference between the medal loss when the first specialized zone is played with normal play and the medal increase when the number of additional games is played.

In the above-described modified example, the advantageous zone game counts AG for the first to third numerical ranges were set as non-consecutive values. However, they may be set as consecutive values, such as when the last digit is 0 to 3 it corresponds to the first numerical range, when the last digit is 4 it corresponds to the second numerical range, and when the last digit is 5 to 9 it corresponds to the third numerical range. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player if the advantageous zone game count AG for a game transitioning to the first specialized zone is at or close to the beginning of the first numerical range (last digit is 0) than if it is at or close to the end of the first numerical range (last digit is 3). More specifically, depending on the advantageous zone game count AG at the time of transition to the first specialized zone, when playing a game that avoids the additional lottery until the advantageous zone game count AG for the first numerical range is reached, the amount of medal loss due to consumption of bets other than the specified number will differ. This makes it possible to get players interested not only in whether or not they will transition to the first specialized zone, but also in the transition game to the first specialized zone, making it possible to significantly increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 7>
In this modified example, the mechanism for the additional lottery in the first specialized zone is different from that of the third embodiment, etc. In the first specialized zone, if the lottery result of the game is an additional result and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is a predetermined specific operation mode, an additional lottery will be generated, and even if the lottery result of the game is an additional result, if the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 is an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, an additional lottery will be generated for a smaller number of games than in the case of the specific operation mode. Also, the first specialized zone is configured to end when a predetermined number of games that result in an additional lottery have been played.

Figure 136 shows the processing for the first specialized zone in this modified example.

In step S6901, a completion command is set, and in step S6902, a process is executed to determine the game's lottery results. Then, in step S6903, it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is one of the normal replies A to C as a result eligible for addition. If it is not a normal reply A to C, the processing for the first specialized zone is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a normal reply A to C, processing is executed in step S6904 to set an additional target flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S6905 to set an additional target command as a target for output to the display control device 81, and then the processing for the first specialized zone is terminated. The additional target flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to determine that the lottery result for this game is a result eligible for addition in the first specialized zone. Furthermore, the additional target command is a command that allows the display control device 81 to determine that the lottery result for this game is a result eligible for addition in the first specialized zone.

Figure 137 is a flowchart showing the specialized zone counting process in this modified example.

Steps S7001 to S7004 are similar to steps S5501 to S5504 above and are for the second specialized zone. In step S7005, it is determined whether the first specialized zone flag is set.

If the game is in the first specialized zone, the above-mentioned bonus target flag is set in step S7006, and it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a normal reply A to C. If the result is not a normal reply A to C, the specialized zone counting process ends. In other words, if the result is not a normal reply A to C, no bonus processing is performed in the first specialized zone, and no counting is performed in the first specialized zone.

If the winning combination is normal replay A-C, the corresponding bonus target flag is cleared in step S7007, and in step S7008, it is determined whether the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44 for this game was a specific operation mode (bonus operation mode). More specifically, if normal replay A-C is won, the first replay win included in normal replay A-C is achieved by stopping the "replay" symbol in the middle row of the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol in the top row of the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7," "white 7," "white shell," or "young man" symbol in the top row of the right reel 32R. In this embodiment, it is determined that a specific operation mode has been performed if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the "replay" symbol reaches the middle row of the left reel 32L, resulting in the first replay win. In this case, for example, if it is determined in the reel control process (FIG. 22) that the stop switch 42 corresponding to the left reel 32L has been operated (step S403), and the number of slips required to establish the first replay win is calculated as 0 in the slip count calculation process (step S407), information that a specific operation mode has been performed is stored, and the presence or absence of this information is determined in step S7008.

If the operation mode is a specific operation mode, in step S7009, the current number of added games is set to a number greater than the specified number of added games (for example, 4 games) (for example, 6 games, which is 1.5 times the specified number of added games), and a value corresponding to this number of games is added to the AT game counter. On the other hand, if the operation mode is not a specific operation mode, in step S7010, the current number of added games is set to the specified number of added games, and a value corresponding to this number of games is added to the AT game counter. Then, after executing the processing of step S7009 or step S7010, in step S7011, a process is executed to set the added command as an output target to the display control device 81.

Steps S7012 to S7014 are similar to steps S5509 to S5511 above, and are processes for managing the number of games played in the first specialized zone.

Figure 138 is a flowchart showing the first specialization process in this modified example.

Steps S7101 to S7105 are the same as steps S6301 to S6305 above. In step S7106, it is determined whether any of the specialization flags are set, and if they are set, it is determined in step S7107 whether a digest command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S7106 or step S7107, the first specialization process is terminated.

If a consumption command has been received, step S7108 determines whether an additional command has been received, and determines whether the lottery result of the game in the first specialized zone is a normal replay A to C as an additional result. If a positive determination is made in step S7108, step S7109 determines whether the ending flag is set, and checks whether an ending effect is being performed. If an ending effect is not being performed, step S7110 executes a setting process to display a stop mode instruction effect on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. As shown in Figure 139(a), the stop mode instruction effect displays content such as "Stop the replay exactly in the middle of the left reel!!" to inform the player that performing the specific operation mode described above will give them an advantage, and the content of the specific operation mode.

Then, in step S7111, it is determined whether the excess flag is set, and if the excess flag is set, in step S7112, a setting process is executed to display an excess notification effect (Figure 139 (c)).

If no command to be added is received in step S7108, the game is in the second specialized zone, or the result is not to be added even if it is in the first specialized zone, the ending flag is set in step S7109, the excess flag is set in step S7111, or after the processing of step S7112 is executed, the specialized counter management processing is executed in steps S7113 to S7116. The processing of steps S7113 to S7116 is the same as the processing of steps S6311 to S6314 above.

For example, when a stop mode instruction effect occurs as shown in Figure 139(a), operating the stop switches 42-44 in a specific operation mode (Figure 139(b1)) will result in an additional number of games being played than usual, and operating the stop switches 42-44 in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode (Figure 139(b2)) will result in an additional number of games being played than usual. Therefore, when a stop mode instruction effect occurs, it is generally more advantageous for the player to operate in a specific operation mode.

In contrast, when the excess flag is set and the upper limit of the number of games or the upper limit of the increased number of coins in the advantageous zone is likely to be reached even without an additional game count or set stock in AT mode, performing a specific operation mode will not change the final number of coins won, and performing that specific operation mode may actually result in a loss of time. In this situation, when an excess notification effect (Figure 139 (c)) is occurring, it is advantageous for the player in terms of time to not perform the specific operation mode even if a stop mode instruction effect is occurring, and it can be said that playing in a mode other than the specific operation mode is more advantageous for the player than playing in the specific operation mode.

In other words, playing the first specialized zone using the above-mentioned specific operation modes is included in advantageous play in the third embodiment, and playing the first specialized zone in modes other than the above-mentioned specific operation modes is included in normal play in the third embodiment. While it is assumed that using specific operation modes in the first specialized zone will be advantageous to the player, such as making it possible to add to the number of games in AT mode, there are also situations in which it is advantageous for the player not to use specific operation modes in the first specialized zone. Therefore, even with this configuration, it is expected that the effect of making play enjoyable by requiring the player to make a situational judgment about which operation to use in the first specialized zone can be achieved.

Furthermore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple results eligible for addition in the first specialized zone are provided, the difficulty levels of the specific operation modes are varied, and the number of games to be added is set according to the difficulty levels. For example, a first result eligible for addition and a second result eligible for addition may be set, and if the first result eligible for addition is obtained by operating a specific operation mode, a number of games greater than the specified number of games to be added may be added; and if the second result eligible for addition is obtained by operating a specific operation mode that is more difficult than the specific operation mode described above, an even greater number of games may be added than in the case of the first result eligible for addition. In this case, if the second result eligible for addition is obtained and no specific operation mode is performed, a number of games less than the specified number of games to be added may be added in the case of the first result eligible for addition.

More specifically, for example, in the case of the first result eligible for addition, it is possible to add a number of games (6 games) greater than the specified number of games (4 games) for additional addition by performing a specific operation mode (an operation to stop the target symbol with a slip count of 0) on one reel 32L of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In the case of the second result eligible for addition, it is possible to add a number of games (10 games) greater than the first result eligible for addition by performing a specific operation mode on all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Furthermore, in the case of the second result eligible for addition, when an operation mode different from the specific operation mode is performed, it is possible to add a specified number of games (2 games) less than the first result eligible for addition.

Furthermore, even if the lottery result of a game in the first specialized zone is a result eligible for bonus play, a configuration may be adopted in which, by performing a predetermined avoidance operation, bonus play will not occur and the number of games played in the first specialized zone will not be counted. This allows, for example, a configuration in which multiple bonus play results, each with a different number of bonus games when operated in a specific operation mode, as described above, are set. This allows for gameplay in which a player can attempt to operate in a specific operation mode if the desired bonus play result is achieved, while performing an avoidance operation to forgo the bonus play result if a different bonus play result is achieved. Furthermore, even without setting multiple bonus play results, gameplay can be achieved in which a player can choose to attempt bonus play in a specific operation mode or even avoid bonus play depending on the player's condition. With this configuration, a configuration can be created in which a player can choose between a game that allows a player to determine whether or not to bonus play in the first specialized zone and a game that avoids bonus play, as in the third embodiment above. The predetermined avoidance operation may involve, for example, first operating the right stop switch 44 as a predetermined one of the stop switches 42-44, or may involve operating the credit insertion switch 56 while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning and before operating the stop switches 42-44.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, when the first specialized zone or the second specialized zone is played with a bet number other than the specific specified number in the third embodiment, the number of games played affects the number of additional games and the number of set stocks.

Figure 140 is a flowchart showing the specialized zone counting process in this modified example.

In this modified example, step S7201 determines whether the second specialized zone flag is set. If the second specialized zone flag is set and the game is in the second specialized zone, steps S7202 to S7204 determine whether the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state. That is, step S7202 determines whether the game is in BB state, and if the game is not in BB state, step S7203 determines whether the number of bets is "3". If the game is in BB state, step S7204 determines whether the number of bets is "2".

If a negative judgment is made in step S7203 or step S7204 and the number is not the specific specified number, the process proceeds to step S7205, where the CPU 102 increments the avoidance counter provided in the various counter area 106e by 1 and sets the first avoidance command as an output target to the display control device 81. The avoidance counter is a counter that the CPU 102 uses to keep track of the number of consecutive games played in the specialized zone with a bet amount other than the specific specified number. The first avoidance command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to know that the avoidance counter increment process has been performed. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S7203 or step S7204 and the number is the specific specified number, the process proceeds to step S7206, where the above-mentioned avoidance counter is cleared to its initial value of 0 and a second avoidance command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The second avoidance command is a command that causes the display control device 81 to know that the avoidance counter initialization process has been performed.

After executing the processing of step S7205 or step S7206, the number of games played in the second specialized zone is managed in steps S7207 to S7209, and then the specialized zone count processing ends.

If it is determined in step S7201 that the player is not in the second specialized zone, the process proceeds to step S7210, where it is determined whether the player is in the first specialized zone. If the player is in the first specialized zone, it is determined in steps S7211 to S7213 whether the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the game state. That is, in step S7211 it is determined whether the player is in BB state, and if the player is not in BB state, it is determined in step S7212 whether the number of bets is "3". Furthermore, if the player is in BB state, it is determined in step S7213 whether the number of bets is "2".

If a negative judgment is made in step S7212 or step S7213 and the number is not the specific specified number, the process proceeds to step S7214, where the avoidance counter is incremented by 1 and the first avoidance command is set as the command to be output to the display control device 81. After step S7214 is executed, the specialized zone count process ends. On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S7212 or step S7213 and the number is the specific specified number, the process clears the avoidance counter to its initial value of 0 and the second avoidance command is set as the command to be output to the display control device 81 in step S7215.

After executing the processing of step S7215, the number of games played in the first specialized zone is managed in steps S7216 to S7218, and then the specialized zone count processing ends.

The processing for the first specialized zone (Figure 141) and the processing for the second specialized zone (Figure 142) in this modified example differs from the processing in the third embodiment in that the value of the avoidance counter is referenced when an additional win or set stock win occurs.

In other words, in the processing for the first specialized zone in this modified example, if it is determined in step S7306 that an additional win has occurred, processing is executed in step S7307 to determine the above-mentioned avoidance counter. In the following step S7308, processing is executed to calculate the number of additional games this time by adding the value of the avoidance counter to the number of additional games corresponding to the AT random number or game lottery result. Then, in step S7309, processing is executed to add the calculation result to the AT game counter, and in step S7310, processing is executed to set an additional command, after which processing for the first specialized zone is terminated.

In the processing for the second specialized zone in this modified example, if it is determined in step S7406 that a set stock has been won, processing is executed to determine the above-mentioned avoidance counter in step S7407. In the following step S7408, processing is executed to calculate the current set stock number by multiplying the set stock number corresponding to the AT random number or game lottery result by the value obtained by adding 1 to the avoidance counter. Then, in step S7409, processing is executed to add the calculation result to the set counter, and in step S7410, processing is executed to set an additional command, after which processing for the second specialized zone is terminated.

In other words, in this modified example, if you avoid betting a number other than the specified number in the first specialized zone, the number of consecutive bets you avoided will be added to the number of games you play when you win the bonus. However, even after avoiding bets, if you do not win the bonus when you bet the specified number of bets, the number of consecutive bets you avoided will be cleared to 0, and you will no longer be able to enjoy the benefits of that number of consecutive bets.

Also, in the second specialized zone, if you avoid using a bet number other than the specific required number, when you win a set stock, the number of consecutive times you avoided it will be multiplied by the number of stocks you avoided. However, even after avoiding it, if you do not win a set stock when you use the specific required number of bets, the number of consecutive times you avoided it will be cleared to 0, and you will no longer be able to enjoy the benefits of that consecutive number.

The avoidance count response processing on the display control device 81 side for notifying the number of consecutive avoidances will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 143. The avoidance count response processing is performed, for example, as part of the other all-stop effect setting processing in the all-stop effect setting processing.

In the avoidance count response process, step S7501 determines whether a first avoidance command has been received. As described above, the first avoidance command is a command that is output when a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number is consumed in the first specialized zone or second specialized zone. If a first avoidance command has been received, step S7502 determines whether the first specialized zone is in progress by checking whether the first specialized flag is set. If the first specialized zone is in progress, step S7503 executes a process to increment and update the special plus display BP1 in the auxiliary display unit 65, and then this avoidance count response process ends.

For example, as shown in Figure 144 (a1), when consumption is avoided in the first specialized zone and a game in which an avoidance effect is being performed ends, as shown in Figure 144 (b1), if a specific notification (first specific notification in the figure) corresponding to the AT random number is made, the number of games added when an additional win occurs, such as "+1," is displayed as special plus display BP1. Then, in step S7503, processing is performed to update the number of games displayed in this special plus display BP1 according to the number of the avoidance counter.

If the first specialization flag is not set in step S7502 and the game is in the second specialization zone, in step S7504, a process is executed to add and update the special multiplier display BP2 in the auxiliary display unit 65, and then this avoidance count response process is terminated.

For example, as shown in Figure 144 (a2), when consumption in the second special zone is avoided and the game in which the avoidance effect is being performed ends, as shown in Figure 144 (b2), if a special notification (third special notification in the figure) corresponding to the AT random number is made, the multiplier by which a set stock is won, such as "x2," is displayed as the special case number display BP2. Then, in step S7504, processing is performed to update the multiplier displayed in this special multiplier display BP2 according to the number of the avoidance counter.

If the first avoidance command has not been received in step S7501, it is determined in step S7502 whether the second avoidance command has been received. If the second avoidance command has been received, the initialization process for the special plus display BP1 and the special multiple display BP2 is performed in step S7506, and then this avoidance count response process is terminated. As described above, the second avoidance command is a command that is output when the first specialized zone or the second specialized zone has been consumed with a specific specified number of bets.

In this case, for example, if the first specialized zone is consumed with a specific prescribed number of bets and an additional win is made, as shown in FIG. 144 (c1), an effect will be produced in which the number of games displayed in the special plus display BP1 (1 game in the figure) is added to the normal number of additional games (5 games in the figure). Also, for example, if the second specialized zone is consumed with a specific prescribed number of bets and a set stock win is made, an effect will be produced in which a set stock is made by multiplying the normal number of set stocks by the multiple displayed in the special multiple display BP2. Furthermore, when these additional game number effects or additional set stock effects are produced, the display of the special plus display BP1 and special multiple display BP2 themselves is initialized (hidden in this embodiment).

Furthermore, for example, if the next game is played with a specific prescribed number of bets and the player does not win the bonus lottery or the set stock lottery, a disappointment effect will be displayed, as shown in Figure 144 (c2). When this disappointment effect is displayed, the special plus display BP1 and special multiple display BP2 themselves will be initialized (displayed in this embodiment).

As described above, this modified example is configured to be able to store information on avoiding the execution of additional draws or set stock draws in the first and second specialized zones. This avoidance information can be used when an additional draw or set stock draw is won, thereby improving the entertainment value of games in which players can choose whether to avoid or allow the execution of additional draws or set stock draws.

More specifically, in the above variant, avoiding a win results in a corresponding loss of medals, but the more you avoid a win, the greater the benefits you will receive when you win an additional bonus or set stock. Therefore, you can choose whether or not to avoid a win, taking into account the medal loss from avoiding a win and the additional benefits that can be obtained using the avoidance information.

In this case, the number of consecutive avoidances is stored as avoidance information (avoidance counter), and if an additional lottery or set stock lottery is allowed to be executed without an avoidance, the avoidance information is initialized. Therefore, even if the player does not win the additional lottery or set stock lottery, the player will not be able to obtain additional benefits using the avoidance information, which creates the need to determine more precisely when to allow these lotteries to be executed.

Furthermore, by using such avoidance information, it is possible to create benefits from avoiding the second specialized zone, where the number of games played is still counted even if the player avoids the zone.

Note that while the avoidance information is used to add benefits to players when they win an additional bonus or a set stock, the avoidance information may also be used to reduce the number of additional games or set stocks. In particular, in the first specialized zone, because avoidance does not result in a game count, if the avoidance information were used to add benefits when an additional bonus is won, the benefit of avoiding may be too great. Therefore, in the first specialized zone, the number of additional games is reduced by the amount of the avoidance information (avoidance counter), reducing the benefit of winning an additional bonus. This can encourage avoidance based on the specific notification, but also motivate players to accept the execution of the additional bonus lottery even if the AT random number is unfavorable, so that the benefit of winning an additional bonus is not reduced too much. This increases the number of parameters for determining whether or not to allow the execution of such an additional bonus lottery, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of making that decision.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. The following configurations may be applied individually to the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them to the above-described embodiments and modifications. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above-described embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be achieved) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. The following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration formed by combining the embodiments and modifications, or may be applied in combination with some or all of them.

(1) In the first embodiment, the advantageous zone is terminated if the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won. However, the advantageous zone may not be terminated even if the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger is not won. In this case, taking into consideration the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone (1,500 games) and the upper limit increase in the advantageous zone (2,400 coins), the advantageous zone may be terminated by not winning the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger at a specific number of games (e.g., 950 games) obtained by subtracting the number of games until the specific trigger occurs from the number of games (e.g., 1,000 games) that would reach the upper limit increase before the upper limit is reached if the AT mode is transitioned to.

(2) In a configuration in which the transition between the first mode and the second mode is performed via an AT lottery mode transition lottery process, the trigger results and winning probabilities for each lottery mode transition are not limited to those described above. For example, the transition from the second mode to the first mode may be caused by not only a normal role but also a specific role, or the transition from the first mode to the second mode may be caused only by a specific role.

(3) While the configuration is such that the execution of the lottery mode transition lottery is limited by limited play, it may also be limited by allowable play. For example, if a specific combination is won in the second mode, the execution of the lottery mode transition lottery may be limited for a predetermined number of games. This limits the transition from the second mode to the first mode for the predetermined number of games, making it possible to maintain the second mode through allowable play. In this case, the predetermined number of games may vary depending on the type of specific combination. For example, the transition lottery may be limited to five games for Cherry A, and ten games for Cherry B. In other words, the more difficult a specific combination is to win as a result of the game's lottery, the longer the number of games for which the transition lottery is limited.

Conversely, if a normal role is won in the first mode, the execution of the lottery to transition to the lottery mode may be restricted for a predetermined number of games.

(4) In the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger, the winning probability is set to a uniform value (10% for the first mode, 60% for the second mode) without taking into account the lottery results of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held. However, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery may be configured to differ depending on the lottery results of the game and the type of lottery mode in which the player is currently playing.

(5) The lottery mode may be taken into consideration in the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific role before the specific trigger. In other words, the configuration may be such that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery for the same specific role if the lottery mode at the time of winning the specific role is the second mode than if the lottery mode is the first mode.

(6) Even before the specific trigger, the AT mode transition lottery is held when a specific role is won, but the AT mode transition lottery may also be held when a normal role is won.

(7) Although the first BB is provided as a BB that can be won in a 3-bet game and the second BB is provided as a BB that can be won in a 2-bet game, it is also possible to have only one of the BBs; for example, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the second BB is won in a 2-bet game and neither BB is won in a 3-bet game.

(8) In the above example, the second BB is won in a two-bet game, but it may also be possible to win multiple types of BB in a two-bet game. For example, it may be possible to win both the first BB and the second BB in a two-bet game. In this case, it may be possible to win both the first BB and the second BB in a two-bet game, and in a three-bet game, neither the first BB nor the second BB is won, and further in a three-bet game, neither the first BB nor the second BB is won. Note that the relationship between the two-bet game and the three-bet game may be reversed from that described above.

(9) While the same lottery table is used in both the first BB state and the second BB state to result in the same game base, different lottery tables may be used to result in different game bases. Even in this case, it is preferable to configure the contribution rate to the execution rate of the special notification to be different by varying the value added to the trigger pass counter when the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won, and the lower the advantageous degree (game base), the greater the value added to the trigger pass counter.

(10) The first BB state and the second BB state are configured to be played as either a three-bet game or a two-bet game, but the number of bets may differ depending on the type of BB state, for example, the first BB state may be played as a three-bet game and the second BB state as a two-bet game.

(11) While play in both the first BB state and the second BB state is restricted play, the restricted play and permitted play may differ depending on the type of BB state, such as play in the first BB state being restricted play while play in the second BB state being permitted play. Furthermore, a CB state, SB state, and MB state may be provided, and any or all of these may be restricted play or permitted play.

(12) The gaming base in the BB state is set to be higher than the gaming base in a 2-bet game, but the gaming base in the BB state only needs to be higher than the gaming base in a 3-bet game, and may be lower than the gaming base in a 2-bet game.

(13) In the configuration defining the first mode and the second mode in the mode transition table, the number of unit games at which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs is primarily set to 10 games. However, the number of unit games at which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs may be configured to be different, for example, with the advantageous zone game number AG being 1 to 10, 11 to 13, 14 to 55, etc. In this case, the number of unit games at which switching occurs may be configured to be a repeat of different unit game numbers, such as the first number, second number, first number, second number, etc., and it is preferable to ensure that there is some regularity in the combination of unit game numbers.

(14) In a configuration in which the first mode and the second mode are defined by a mode transition table, the number of unit games at which switching between the first mode and the second mode occurs may be configured to vary depending on the type of mode transition table. For example, a first mode transition table (a mode transition table with address information MAAAA) may be configured to switch to the lottery mode at a first number of unit games (10 games), while a second mode transition table (a mode transition table with address information MBBBB) may be configured to switch to the lottery mode at a second number of unit games (25 games). Furthermore, a configuration in which switching occurs every game may be configured, such as the first mode for even-numbered games and the second mode for odd-numbered games.

(15) Although a first mode with a low probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery and a second mode with a high probability of winning are provided, it is sufficient that the second mode has an advantage over the first mode. For example, the first mode may be configured so that the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger is not won.

(16) While the lottery mode is suggested by the occurrence rate of a special notification that suggests the second mode, it is sufficient that the notification at least predicts whether the player is in the first mode or the second mode. For example, the lottery mode may be suggested by the occurrence rate of a special notification that suggests the player is in the first mode.

(17) While multiple types of mode transition tables are provided and the mode transition table to be set is determined by lottery, a uniform mode transition table may be used, or multiple types may be provided and there may be a pattern to the mode transition table to be set. For example, after the first mode transition table is set, the second mode transition table may be set more easily or more likely to be set. In this way, it is possible to predict the lottery mode from information on the uniform or previous mode transition table.

(18) The mode transition table may be configured to include a mode transition table associated only with the first mode.

(19) Depending on the type of mode transition table that has been set, the value added to the trigger skip counter when the player does not win the AT mode transition lottery based on a specific trigger may be different. For example, if a mode transition table that has more games associated with the second mode is set, the value added to the trigger skip counter when the player does not win the AT mode may be larger, making it possible to effectively compensate the player for their sense of loss through a special notification.

(20) The value to be added to the trigger skip counter when the AT mode is not won is not limited to information about the game that caused the specific trigger (number of bets, whether or not it is in BB state, type of BB state, etc.), and the value to be added to the trigger skip counter may be set using other information. For example, the value to be added may be set using information about the game that occurred before the specific trigger occurred. Specifically, if the game transitioned to BB state before the specific trigger was reached, the value to be added to the trigger skip counter may be decreased/increased even if the game that caused the specific trigger was not in BB state. Furthermore, the value to be added to the trigger skip counter may be set depending on the number of medals decreased/increased before the specific trigger occurred.

(21) Although it is possible to win a specific role even in a two-bet game, and the AT mode transition lottery is not held when a specific role is won in a two-bet game, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a specific role is not won in a two-bet game. Also, it is also possible to have a configuration in which a specific role can be won even in BB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is not held when a specific role is won in BB state.

(22) Although the configuration is such that a second BB win cannot be achieved in a three-bet game and a first BB win cannot be achieved in a two-bet game, the configuration may be such that a second BB win is more difficult to achieve in a three-bet game than in a two-bet game, and the configuration may be such that a first BB win is more difficult to achieve in a two-bet game than in a three-bet game.

(23) Although the configuration is such that the second BB is not won in a 3-bet game and the first BB is not won in a 2-bet game, the configuration may be such that the second BB is less likely to be won in a 3-bet game than in a 2-bet game, and the configuration may be such that the first BB is less likely to be won in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(24) When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, if the number of credits is less than the value set in the MAX bet counter, a configuration may be adopted in which no bet is made, or a configuration may be adopted in which a bet is made according to the number of credits that does not reach the MAX bet counter. However, the latter configuration increases the possibility of unintentional restricted play, so it is preferable to adopt the former configuration in which no bet is made if the number of credits does not reach the MAX bet counter.

(25) When the MAX bet counter is set to 3, it may be possible to set a bet of 2 by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 or other operating unit, and when the MAX bet counter is set to 2, it may be possible to set a bet of 3 by operating the second credit insertion switch 57 or other operating unit.

(26) An operation unit capable of setting one bet may be provided. In this case, the number of bets may be varied depending on the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, one operation of the operation unit may result in one bet, two operations may result in two bets, and three operations may result in three bets. Furthermore, even if the desired number of bets is exceeded, it may be possible to set the desired number of bets by operating the operation unit again, such that four operations result in one bet, and five operations result in two bets.

(27) The special notification as a suggestion of the lottery mode may not be executed in a game resulting in a replay win (a game resulting in a replay prize), or may be executed less frequently than in other winning or losing games. A replay prize requires that the next game be played with the same number of bets. Even if an attempt is made to change the number of bets for the next game based on the special notification for the game resulting in a replay prize, this is not possible.

(28) While the gameplay has been described in which the lottery mode transitions to the second mode before a specific trigger occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which predetermined points are awarded in each game played until the specific trigger occurs, and a lottery for transitioning to the AT mode based on the specific trigger is held according to those points. The predetermined points may be awarded according to the results of the game lottery. It is also advisable to configure the game so that predetermined points are awarded in permitted games such as three-bet games, but not in restricted games such as two-bet games.

(29) Although the explanation has been given assuming a configuration in which an AT mode transition lottery is conducted based on a specific trigger, the lottery conducted based on a specific trigger is not limited to an AT mode transition lottery. For example, it may be a lottery for transition to a favorable zone, a lottery for transition to a special zone for adding bonuses in AT mode, or a lottery for adding bonuses or the number of games added to AT mode. Furthermore, it may also be a lottery for executing a predetermined effect (for example, a setting value suggestion effect).

(30) In a configuration in which a random number for the lottery is obtained in advance and a lottery is conducted using that random number and the lottery results for each game, an AT counter used in the AT mode transition lottery has been described as an example of the random number for the lottery, but the above inventions may also be applied to random numbers used in other lotteries. For example, they may be applied to a configuration in which a lottery counter used in the advantageous zone transition lottery is obtained in advance, or a lottery counter used in the add-on specialization zone transition lottery is obtained in advance, or a lottery counter used in the add-on lottery or add-on game number lottery is obtained in advance, or a lottery counter used in the lottery for a specified effect (for example, a setting value suggestion effect) is obtained in advance.

In other words, the specific event whose occurrence is determined by lottery based on specific information (random numbers) obtained in advance is not limited to a transition to AT mode, but may also be a transition to an advantageous zone, a transition to a specialized zone, an addition of the number of games, an addition of a predetermined number of games (a large or small number of added games), or the occurrence of a predetermined effect.

(31) While the AT counter is configured to acquire the random number used in the AT mode transition lottery when the third stop OFF operation is performed among the operations of the stop switches 42-44, it may be configured to acquire it at other times. For example, it may be configured to acquire it when the first stop OFF operation, the second stop OFF operation, or the first to third stop ON operations. It may also be configured to acquire it based on the operation of the start lever 41, or based on the operation of the credit insertion switches 56-58. These operations may be valid operations that cause the game to progress based on the operation, or may be configured to acquire it based on invalid operations, such as during a period when the operation is invalid. Furthermore, it is not limited to being configured to acquire it immediately based on the operation, but may be configured to acquire it after a predetermined period based on the operation, or based on a combination of operations, such as acquiring it when the center stop switch 43 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated, but not when the right stop switch 44 is operated after the left stop switch 42 is operated.

(32) When an AT counter is acquired in the random number acquisition process, the AT counter is acquired independently of the lottery results of the game at the time of acquisition, without being influenced by the lottery results of the game at the time of acquisition. However, the AT counter acquired may be configured to differ based on the lottery results of the game. For example, if the lottery result of the game is a first result such as a strong cherry, an AT counter value of 1 within the first numerical range of "1" to "64" is acquired, and if the lottery result of the game is a second result such as a strong watermelon, an AT counter value of 1 within the second numerical range of "65" to "128" is acquired. In this way, the number acquired may be determined by the lottery results of the game.

Furthermore, the type of AT counter acquired may differ depending on the lottery mode. For example, in the first mode, an AT counter value of 1 within the first numerical range of "1" to "128" may be acquired, while in the second mode, an AT counter value of 1 within the second numerical range of "1" to "64" may be acquired. In this case, the superiority of the second mode over the first mode may be determined depending on the numerical range of the acquired AT counter.

(33) While a 3-bet game played while carrying over the second BB won in a 2-bet game has been described as a regular game, a 2-bet game played while carrying over the first BB won in a 3-bet game may also be a regular game, or a second or third bet game played without carrying over the first BB or second BB may also be a regular game. Furthermore, a 2-bet game played while carrying over the second BB may also be a regular game, or a 3-bet game played while carrying over the first BB may also be a regular game.

(34) Although the first and second modes are provided as the lottery modes for the AT mode transition lottery, there may be multiple types of lottery modes, and there may be three or more types.

(35) In the third embodiment, a configuration was described in which the execution of the AT mode game count addition lottery and the set stock lottery in the specialized zone is permitted or avoided depending on the AT random number and the advantageous zone game number AG. However, a configuration may also be adopted in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is permitted or avoided depending on the AT random number, etc. in the chance zone (second mode) where the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher. In this case, for example, after one set of AT mode ends, the system transitions to the chance zone instead of the first specialized zone, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won in the chance zone, the system transitions back to the AT mode. Furthermore, even if set stock exists at the end of one set of AT mode, the system may transition to the chance zone and then execute the next set of AT mode. Then, by specifying the number of times the AT mode transition lottery is to be held in the chance zone and issuing a specific notification in accordance with the AT random number obtained in advance in that chance zone, it is possible to avoid the execution of the AT mode transition lottery if the specific notification corresponds to an AT random number that is unlikely to win the AT mode transition lottery, and allow the execution of the AT mode transition lottery if the specific notification corresponds to an AT random number that is likely to win the AT mode transition lottery. In this way, in situations where it is known in advance that the conditions for forcibly ending the advantageous zone will be met, such as when there is a large amount of set stock, normal play that allows the execution of the AT mode transition lottery regardless of the AT random number is more advantageous to the player than playing advantageous play in the chance zone that avoids the execution of the AT mode transition lottery depending on the AT random number.

(36) Although the configuration is such that a transition to the first specialized zone is always made when the AT mode starts, a transition to the first specialized zone may also be made based on the fulfillment of certain conditions. For example, the above conditions may be fulfilled when the transition lottery to the first specialized zone is won during the previous set of AT mode, or when the transition lottery to the first specialized zone is won at the start of one set of AT mode or when the AT mode transition lottery is won.

(37) In the third embodiment, the initial number of games in one set in AT mode is not limited to 30 games, but may be less or more than that. Alternatively, the initial number of games may be set to 0, and the number of games won in the first specialized zone may be the number of games in one set.

(38) The configuration may be such that when the AT mode starts, the player transitions to the second specialized zone instead of the first specialized zone. In other words, when the AT mode starts, the player transitions to the second specialized zone, where the probability of winning the set stock lottery is higher. If there are no set stocks and the player wins the set stock lottery in the second specialized zone, the next set of AT mode will start. If the player does not win the set stock lottery in the second specialized zone, the advantageous zone will end. In this case, if a game is played in the second specialized zone to avoid the set stock lottery, the number of games in the second specialized zone should not be counted.

(39) Although the first specialized zone is configured so that no push order notification is made, it is not necessary to completely disable push order notification. It may also be possible to configure the push order notification to be implemented at a lower rate than in AT mode, or to configure the push order notification to be more difficult for the player to understand than in AT mode (for example, the stop switches 42-44 that should be operated first may be notified, but the stop switches 42-44 that should be operated second may not be notified).

(40) By notifying the push order in the first specialized zone, the expected increase or decrease in the number of coins per game is made negative. However, for example, the expected increase or decrease in the number of coins per game may be made negative by changing the lottery table for the game.

(41) Examples have been described in which the execution of additional lotteries in the first specialized zone is permitted or avoided. However, for example, the bonus state may be playable in two-bet games and three-bet games, and one of the bet games (for example, two-bet games) may be set to a specific prescribed number. The condition for ending the bonus state may be that the number of games played with that specific prescribed number of bets reaches a specific number. In games played with the specific prescribed number of bets, lotteries for transitioning to AT mode, additional lotteries, set stock lotteries, etc. are held, while the execution of these lotteries may be avoided in games played with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number.

(42) Although the configuration is such that an ending effect can be executed to notify players that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit number of coins in the advantageous zone has been reached when the excess flag is set, the configuration may also be such that the ending effect is not executed or is difficult to execute. By configuring the ending effect to not be executed or to be difficult to execute, it is possible to further enhance the significance of executing the excess notification effect.

(43) A configuration may be adopted in which no notification is made that the set stock lottery has been won. Furthermore, when a set stock lottery is won, the notification may not include the number of sets stocked. Furthermore, when a set stock exists and the set stock lottery is won, no notification of winning the set stock lottery is made, or the notification is made less frequently than when no set stock exists. In the third embodiment described above, whether the upper limit number of games or upper limit increase number for the advantageous zone is reached is determined based on how many set stocks remain. However, by configuring the system so that the existence and number of set stocks are difficult to grasp as described above, the significance of executing the excess notification effect is enhanced, and the excitement of choosing whether to play the first specialized zone through advantageous play or normal play is increased.

(44) We have explained a configuration in which advantageous additional lotteries and the like can be allowed or avoided by switching the number of bets and operating the stop switches 42-44, but the operating means for selecting whether to allow or avoid the execution of additional lotteries and the like is not limited to the credit insertion switches 56, 57 and the stop switches 42-44, and may be other operating means (such as the start lever 41). Furthermore, a separate operating means for this purpose may also be provided.

(45) The present invention can also be applied to so-called pachinko machines that have a ball entry section into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and in which a predetermined lottery is held when a game ball enters the ball entry section. For example, the present invention may be configured so that the player can select whether to allow or avoid the execution of the predetermined lottery by performing a firing operation that causes the game ball to enter the ball entry section, or a firing operation that prevents the game ball from entering the ball entry section or causes the game ball to enter a different ball entry section.

(46) The situation in which it is more advantageous for a player to play regular games rather than advantageous games in the first specialized zone is defined as a situation in which one of the overage flags is set. However, it may also be a situation in which the available play time or number of games is limited, such as when an amusement hall is about to close, and there is a set stock up to that available play time or number of games. In this case, for example, the closing time of the amusement hall may be configured to be set (input), and the available play time and number of games may be calculated from that closing time, and whether or not to execute the above-mentioned overage notification effect may be determined. Note that the number of games that can be played can be calculated from the number of games that can be played per unit time. Instead of the closing time of the amusement hall, a time limit may be set individually by the player or for each player, and whether or not to execute the overage notification effect may be determined based on that time limit.

(47) Although the configuration is such that an excess notification effect is triggered when the excess flag is set, the occurrence rate of the excess notification effect may be changed depending on the remaining number of games up to the upper limit or the number of coins up to the upper limit. For example, the occurrence rate of the excess notification effect may be increased as the number of coins up to the upper limit decreases. In this case, the remaining number of games up to the upper limit or the number of coins up to the upper limit can be determined by the remaining game number management process or the remaining coin number management process.

(48) Multiple first specialized zones may be provided, each with different AT random numbers and advantageous zone game count AGs that result in a first numerical range that is more likely to result in additional wins or set stock wins. For example, in a first specialized zone where the acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first numerical range is a first probability (40%) and a first specialized zone where the acquisition rate of AT random numbers in the first numerical range is a second probability (20%) that is lower than the first probability, the number of games required for advantageous play in the former first specialized zone (approximately 25 games) is fewer than the number required for advantageous play in the latter first specialized zone (approximately 50 games). As a result, the medal loss resulting from advantageous play in the former first specialized zone is less than the medal loss resulting from advantageous play in the latter first specialized zone. Therefore, advantageous play offers greater benefits in the former first specialized zone than in the latter second specialized zone, making advantageous play more meaningful. In this case, by making the number of added games in the first number range in the latter first specialized zone greater than the number of added games in the first number range in the former first specialized zone, it is possible to enhance the significance of playing in the latter first specialized zone as an advantageous game. Furthermore, multiple first specialized zones may be provided in which the AT random number acquisition rate for the first number range is the same, but the number of added games in the first number range is different.

(49) Although the number of games in the first specialized zone is increased or decreased depending on whether or not the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, the number of games may also be changed based on other factors. In this case, it is preferable to increase the number of games in the first specialized zone to increase the proportion of AT mode until the end of the advantageous zone, or to decrease the number of games in the first specialized zone to increase the proportion of AT mode until the end of the advantageous zone. The other factors mentioned above may be, for example, the number of wins or prizes for a predetermined result, or the number of coins paid out or the increased number of coins.

(50) The ball payout rate is configured to change depending on each setting value, with setting 1 having the lowest ball payout rate and setting 6 having the highest ball payout rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease in ball payout (game media) or the manner of increase or decrease changes depending on the setting value. For example, the ball payout rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 being the same, while the ball payout rates of other setting values may be different. Furthermore, settings 1, 3, and 5 may be configured to have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball payout, while settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball payout. Furthermore, settings 1 and 5 may be configured to increase ball payout by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease by a predetermined amount over a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 may take longer than settings 1 and 5 to increase by the predetermined amount and take less time than settings 1 and 5 to decrease by the predetermined amount, and setting 6 may have almost no increase or decrease in ball payout. In these cases, the ball payout rate of each setting value may be the same.

(51) While a slot machine has been described that has three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, be a slot machine that has five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the perspective of preventing erroneous operation when stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. Also, while a slot machine has been described that has one active line when the number of bets is three, it is not limited to this configuration and may, for example, have five active lines.

(52) While a specific example has been given of a slot machine 10, the present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the gaming machine may have ball insertion and ball payout functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the amusement hall can handle only balls as gaming value, thereby eliminating problems seen in current amusement halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value.

(53) In the above embodiment, an example was given of a gaming machine in which a game can be started by inserting medals as gaming media, setting the number of bets, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out as a prize corresponding to winning the game. However, this does not exclude medal-less gaming machines that do not use medals. In such medal-less gaming machines, for example, it is possible to set the number of bets on a game using virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) and start playing, and to award virtual gaming media (a predetermined gaming value) corresponding to the predetermined number of medals as a prize corresponding to winning the game. In this case, the number of virtual gaming media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual gaming media may be output to an external device.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned pachinko machines may not only be pachinko machines that dispense game balls, but also sealed-type pachinko machines in which game balls are not ejected outside the machine. In such sealed-type pachinko machines, it is advisable to configure them to announce information indicating, for example, the number of winning balls.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. Note that, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are indicated in parentheses as appropriate, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A game start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on a player's ending operation;
A game number grasping means (a function for executing a process for grasping the number of games played in the advantageous zone AG by the main control device 101) for grasping the number of games played from a predetermined start trigger (a game that transitions to the advantageous zone);
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches a specific number, a predetermined judgment opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs, and a granting judgment means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) is capable of executing a granting judgment as to whether or not to grant a bonus to a player;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process to cause the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that awards a bonus to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus corresponding result corresponding to awarding the bonus to the player;
Equipped with
A high-imparting state (second mode) in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low-imparting state (first mode) in which the result is less likely or not likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high-imparting state are set,
When a predetermined first transition trigger is established, a first transition means (a function of executing a process of clearing a first mode flag by the main control device 101) transitions from the low-power-added state to the high-power-added state;
When a predetermined second transition trigger is established, a second transition means (a function of executing a process of setting a first mode flag by the main control device 101) transitions from the high-power-added state to the low-power-added state;
Equipped with
As the games to be started by the game starting means, a first game (e.g., a 3-bet game) in which the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger may be realized, and a second game (e.g., a 2-bet game) in which the realization of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger is restricted are set,
The number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

In this configuration, in gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, where a game is initiated based on a start operation by a player and terminated based on an end operation, a predetermined determination trigger occurs when a specific number of plays from a predetermined start trigger is reached, and a determination is made as to whether to award a bonus to the player. The result of this determination is set to either a high-award state, which is more likely to result in a bonus, or a low-award state, which is less likely to result in a bonus. Therefore, the bonus award rate varies depending on the award state in which the determination is made, thereby diversifying the game. In this configuration, a transition between the high-award state and the low-award state occurs in the first game but not in the second game. Therefore, transitioning to the high-award state in the first game is a shortcut to obtaining a bonus. Furthermore, the number of plays required to trigger the determination trigger includes both the number of plays in the first game and the number of plays in the second game. Therefore, for example, if a transition to a high award state occurs in the first game, the second game can maintain that high award state and wait until a trigger for award determination occurs. This makes it possible to realize an interesting gameplay in which the player can choose which game to play depending on the situation, such as the award state or whether the trigger for determination has occurred, while utilizing a configuration in which both the first game and the second game exist as games that can be started by the player's start operation. This can thereby increase the enjoyment of the game.

The above "high-imparting state" may be expressed as the "first state," and the "low-imparting state" may be expressed as the "second state." In this case, the "second mode" shown in the first embodiment above corresponds to the "first state," and the "first mode" corresponds to the "second state." Furthermore, the "first transition trigger" may be expressed as the "first transition condition," and the "second transition trigger" may be expressed as the "second transition condition." These changes in expression can also be applied to other features or groups of features.

Feature A2. A gaming machine as described in Feature A1, wherein, in the first game, the execution of a grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is permitted, while, in the second game, the execution of a grant determination by the grant determination means based on the determination trigger is restricted.

With the above configuration, for example, after a judgment trigger occurs in the second game, it becomes necessary to switch to the first game in order to receive a prize judgment. In this way, in a series of games, such as transitioning to a high prize state in the first game and then switching to the second game, generating a judgment trigger in the second game and then switching back to the first game, not only is the gameplay of determining the timing to switch to the second game added, but so is the gameplay of determining the timing to switch back to the first game, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature A3. A gaming machine as described in Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the award determination means is configured to execute the award determination in the first first game after the number of games determination means determines that the specific number has been reached.

With the above configuration, even if the game in which the specific number is reached is the second game, by subsequently switching to the first game, the award determination will be made in the switched game. This makes it clear that even if the game progresses while maintaining a high award state in the second game, the award determination will be made by subsequently switching to the first game. This prevents inconveniences such as, for example, not making the award determination if the game in which the specific number is reached is the second game, or not making the award determination for a long time after switching to the first game.

Feature A4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A3, characterized in that the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger are not triggered once the number of games executed since the predetermined start trigger reaches the specific number.

With the above configuration, if the game transitions to a high payout state before the number of executions reaches a specific number, it will not transition to a low payout state in subsequent games. Conversely, if the game does not transition to a high payout state before the number of executions reaches a specific number, it will not transition to a high payout state in subsequent games and will be forced to receive a payout determination in the low payout state. Therefore, the key to the game is how the situation in which the specific number is reached is a high payout state, which can dramatically increase attention to the game up to the specific number.

Furthermore, for example, if the above configuration is applied to feature A2, transitioning from a high award state to a low award state can be avoided when switching to a second game after transitioning to a high award state in the first game, reaching a specific number, and then switching back to the first game to receive a award judgment. In this way, it is possible to more effectively realize innovative games such as transitioning to a high award state in the first game, maintaining that high award state in the second game until a specific number is reached, and then receiving a award judgment in the first game.

Feature A5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is equipped with special notification means (a function of executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification corresponding to the high payout state or the low payout state using a predetermined notification means based on the fulfillment of a predetermined notification trigger (winning the special notification lottery).

With the above configuration, the special notification can determine whether the current state for determining whether a prize is awarded is a high prize state or a low prize state. This allows for optimal play, such as transitioning to a high prize state in the first game and then switching to the second game to reach a specific number.

Note that "alert trigger" may also be expressed as "alert condition."

Feature A6. The gaming machine described in Feature A5, wherein the notification trigger is met when one of the conditions is that the result of the award determination by the award determination means is not the award-corresponding result.

With the above configuration, if the award determination means determines that a bonus is not awarded and a special notification is issued to compensate for the fact that a bonus was not awarded, it becomes easier to play a game that anticipates a transition to a high bonus state, and it becomes easier for the award determination to be executed in a high bonus state. This makes it possible to effectively address the player's decreased motivation to play when a bonus is not awarded.

Feature A7. The game state is set to a specific state (advantageous zone) in which the award by the awarding means is permitted, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the award by the awarding means is restricted,
When the specific state ends and transitions to the normal state, an initialization means (a function of executing initialization processing of advantageous zone information by the main control device 101) is provided to execute initialization processing of various information used in the specific state,
This gaming machine is
The system includes a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the grant determination means and the initialization means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the special notification means,
The gaming machine described in feature A5 or feature A6 is characterized in that the second control device is equipped with a memory means (trigger through counter) that can store specific information used to determine whether the notification trigger is successful (the consecutive number of times the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific trigger has not been won) across the specific state.

With the above configuration, the award determination means performs an award determination, and a specific state in which a bonus may be awarded and a normal state in which the award is restricted are set. When transitioning from a specific state to the normal state, various information used in that specific state is initialized. This prevents information from being carried over to the normal state, and assuming that gameplay begins in the normal state, fairness between players is ensured at the start of the game. However, in this attempt to ensure fairness, there is a higher likelihood that gameplay will be terminated when the specific state ends, raising concerns about a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Therefore, while assuming that initialization processing is performed when the specific state ends as described above, the specific information used to determine whether or not a notification trigger is successful when a special notification corresponding to a high or low bonus state is executed can be stored across specific states, making it possible to associate each specific state using the special notification. This can motivate players to continue playing across specific states, preventing a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Feature A8. The notification trigger is established when one condition is that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is not the grant correspondence result,
The gaming machine described in feature A7 is characterized in that the specific information is information corresponding to the number of times the award determination did not result in the award corresponding result.

With the above configuration, if the award determination means determines that a bonus is not awarded and a special notification is issued to compensate for the fact that a bonus was not awarded, it becomes easier to play a game that anticipates a transition to a high bonus state, and it becomes easier for the award determination to be executed in a high bonus state. This makes it possible to effectively address the player's decreased motivation to play when a bonus is not awarded.

In addition, the number of times that the award determination did not result in an award response is stored across specific states, making it possible to use this specific information to realize a so-called ceiling function for awarding a bonus across multiple specific states.

Feature A9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A5 to A8, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing, as the special notification corresponding to the high payout state or the low payout state, a notification that playing the second game is more advantageous to the player than playing the first game.

With the above configuration, rather than directly informing the player of a high or low payout state, the system informs the player that playing the second game is more advantageous to the player than playing the first game, and that the player should play the second game. This gives the player a strong impression that they have succeeded in maintaining the high payout state through their own operation, and that they have achieved a payout result. This effectively increases attention to the game.

Feature A10. A plurality of setting values are set that can cause changes in the rate or manner of increase/decrease of gaming media, and a setting means (a function that executes the process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the setting values of the plurality of setting values;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A5 to A9, characterized in that the likelihood of the notification trigger occurring differs when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means.

With the above configuration, a set difference is set for the execution rate of special notifications. By doing so, special notifications corresponding to high and low award states can be used to change the rate and pattern of increase/decrease in gaming media, contributing to the diversification of games.

Feature A11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A5 to A10, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification at a timing later than the timing at which the first transition means transitions to the high payout state or the second transition means transitions to the low payout state during a single game.

With the above configuration, a special notification is executed after a transition from a low payout state to a high payout state or from a high payout state to a low payout state in one game. This makes it possible to determine whether the next game will be the first game or the second game based on the special notification. In other words, if the order of the transition and notification were reversed and a transition in the payout state could occur after the special notification, an inconvenience could arise in which, even though the first game or the second game was switched to based on the special notification, the game following the special notification would be in a different payout state from the one indicated by the special notification. In contrast, with the above configuration, such inconveniences can be avoided and games using special notifications can be played in an optimal manner.

Feature A12. The first transition opportunity is established based on the game result of the first game,
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized in that the second transition trigger is established based on the game result of the first game.

With the above configuration, transitions between high and low award states occur based on the results of the first game, making it possible to switch to the second game while predicting the transition in award state from the results of the first game. This dramatically increases the level of attention paid to the results of the first game.

Feature A13. A gaming machine according to Feature A12, characterized in that if the gaming result of the first game is a predetermined first gaming result (specific combination), the first transition trigger may occur, but the second transition trigger is less likely to occur than the first transition trigger; and if the gaming result of the first game is a second gaming result different from the first gaming result (e.g., normal lip A to normal lip C), the second transition trigger may occur, but the first transition trigger is less likely to occur than the second transition trigger.

According to the above configuration, if the game result of the first game is the first game result, the first transition trigger occurs, making it easier to transition to a high award state, and if the game result is the second game result, the second transition trigger occurs, making it easier to transition to a low award state. Therefore, the player plays while hoping that the game result will be the first game result, and while hoping that the game result will not be the second game result. In this case, the second transition trigger may occur if the game result is the first game result, and the first transition trigger may occur if the game result is the second game result. Therefore, while the configuration allows for some degree of prediction of which award state the player will be in based on both game results, it is not determined. This increases the fun of predicting the award state, and improves the enjoyment of the first game.

Feature A14. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A13, wherein the award determination means is capable of executing the award determination if the game result of a game before the number of games grasped by the number of games grasped means is a predetermined specific result (specific combination).

With the above configuration, even if the number of plays has not yet reached a specific number, a reward determination can be made if the game result is a specific result. This prevents play from becoming boring until the specific number is reached, making the game more interesting.

Feature A15. The gaming machine described in Feature A14, wherein the award determination means is configured to be able to execute the award determination if the game resulting in the specific result is the first game, but is configured to restrict execution of the award determination if the game is the second game, or is configured so that the specific result is not achieved in the second game.

With the above configuration, if a specific result is achieved in the first game, a prize determination is made, but if a specific result is achieved in the second game, a prize determination is not made, or a specific result will not be achieved in the second game at all. This can serve as motivation to play the first game. In this way, rather than simply waiting for a high prize state in the first game, it becomes possible to play a game in which a specific result is achieved, further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature A16. A transition number information storage means (various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 of main control device 101) capable of storing multiple types of transition number information (mode transition tables) of the first transition number and the second transition number, which are determined so that the first transition trigger occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes a first transition number, and the second transition trigger occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes a second transition number;
A selection means (a function for executing processing for a game in which the main control device 101 transitions advantageously) for selecting one piece of transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means based on the predetermined start trigger;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that it is equipped with a transition trigger determination means (a function that executes processing to make a mode determination based on a mode transition table by the main control unit 101) that can determine whether the game corresponds to the occurrence of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger based on the transition number information selected by the selection means.

With the above configuration, the occurrence of a transition trigger between both award states is determined by the transition count information and the number of games played, making it possible for the gaming machine to grasp the transition between the award states in advance. This significantly simplifies the configuration for determining the occurrence of a transition trigger in each game compared to a configuration in which the transition condition is met based on the results of each game, as in Feature A12, and it also makes it possible to notify in advance how long it will take for the transition trigger to occur, for example. This simplifies the configuration and increases interest when realizing gameplay using both award states.

Feature A17. The gaming machine described in Feature A16, wherein the transition trigger determination means is capable of determining whether a game corresponds to the establishment of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger based on the number of games grasped by the number of games grasp means and the transition number information.

According to the above configuration, the number of games grasped by the game count grasping means is the total number of games in the first game and the second game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the transition number information is used to transition between both award states, even if the second game is being played, it is possible to determine whether the current number of games corresponds to the occurrence of the first transition trigger or the second transition trigger. In other words, even if the first transition trigger or the second transition trigger does not actually occur in the second game and the award state does not transition, it is possible to determine that the number of games is that number. In this way, it is also possible to notify the player whether it is okay to switch to the first game while they are avoiding the transition to the award state in the second game. This makes it possible to more effectively increase the enjoyment of games that involve switching between the first and second games.

Feature A18. A gaming machine described in any one of Features A1 to A17, characterized in that the second game is set to have a higher gaming base, which is the average value obtained by subtracting the gaming value (number of bets) used in the game from the gaming value (number of payouts) awarded as a result of the game, than the first game.

The above configuration minimizes loss of gaming value in the second game when the first game transitions to a high payout state and then the player switches to the second game until a specific number of plays is reached. Even with this configuration, the transition to the high payout state in the second game is restricted, ensuring the significance of playing the first game.

Feature A19. The device is provided with a bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) that sets the bet amount for a game based on an operation by a player,
The game in which the first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means is the first game,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A18, characterized in that the second game is a game in which a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means.

With the above configuration, the player can switch between the first game and the second game simply by changing the number of bets on the game. This makes it easy to switch between games, regardless of the player's level of skill, for example, when switching to the second game in the event of a transition to a high payout state.

The inventions described in Features A1 to A19 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals as gaming media have been bet, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features A1 to A19 address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features A1 to A19 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a payout means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) for paying out a predetermined number of gaming media as a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a specific result (for example, a push order bell) is set in which a first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second operation result that can provide a benefit different from the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided which can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means;
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which a transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means can be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed are set,
A game number grasping means (advantageous zone game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches a specific number, a transition determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that can execute a transition determination as to whether or not to transition to the specific state;
a special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning the gaming state to a special gaming state when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result (first BB, second BB) and a transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result has stopped at the valid position, and for terminating the special gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is met;
Equipped with
The number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means includes the number of games in the special game state,
A gaming machine characterized by having a restriction means (a function of executing processing to restrict processing related to the instruction function when the number of bets by the main control unit 101 is not a specific specified number according to the gaming state) that can restrict the execution of specific processing (processing related to the instruction function) related to the status notification, including transition judgment by the transition judgment means in the special gaming state.

With the above configuration, when a specific result is won, where the winning outcome can vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, a specific notification means may notify the player of the stop operation mode. By having the player perform operations in accordance with the mode notification, it is possible to award different benefits to the player. In this case, the specific state that allows mode notification is set to be transitionable during an advantageous state, and mode notification itself is not performed in the normal state, ensuring the advantage of the advantageous state over the normal state. Furthermore, this gaming machine is configured to determine whether to transition to the specific state when the number of plays in the advantageous state reaches a specific number, which increases interest in the number of plays during the advantageous state and realizes gameplay that aims to reach that specific number.

In addition, this gaming machine is set up so that a special gaming state, a so-called bonus state, is entered when the lottery result becomes the transition result and the transition symbol combination stops in an active position. The number of plays during this special gaming state is included in the number of plays required to reach the specific number, so it may be advantageous for the player to play in as advantageous a state as possible in the special gaming state. On the other hand, since the execution of specific processes related to status notification, including transition determination, is limited in the special gaming state, for example, depending on the timing of the end of the special gaming state, the transition determination may not be made easily, or the transition determination may be made under unfavorable circumstances.

By doing this, it is possible for a player to benefit from transitioning to a special gaming state in order to earn enough plays to make a transition decision to transition to a specific state while in an advantageous state. However, by configuring the game so that the execution of specific processing related to status notification is restricted unless the timing of the transition to and end of the special gaming state is determined, gameplay is realized that allows the player to decide whether or not to transition to a special gaming state while in an advantageous state, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature B2: A reserving means (a function of executing a process of setting a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag by the main control device 101) is provided that can reserve the transition result information when the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the transition pattern combination does not stop at the valid position,
A gaming machine described in feature B1, characterized in that the number of games grasped by the number of games grasp means includes the number of games in a reserved state (internal state) in which the transition result information is reserved in the reservation means.

With the above configuration, the number of plays in the reserved state, which is a situation where the transition result is a winning one, also contributes to the specific number. This allows players to continue playing while waiting to transition to the special play state in the reserved state until the desired transition timing arrives.

Feature B3: Equipped with a bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) that sets the bet amount for a game based on an operation by a player,
the limiting means is configured to permit the execution of the specific process in a game that is started after a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means, and to restrict the execution of the specific process in a game that is started after a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means;
The gaming machine described in Feature B1 or Feature B2 is characterized in that in a game started after the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the transitional pattern combination can stop at the valid position, while in a game started after the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the transitional pattern combination does not stop or is difficult to stop at the valid position.

According to the above configuration, in order to cause a transition to the special game state, the bet amount for the game must be switched from the first bet amount to the second bet amount. In this case, while the execution of a specific process is permitted with the first bet amount, the execution of the specific process is restricted with the second bet amount, so the execution of the specific process is restricted in the game that is intended to cause a transition to the special game state. In other words, if a game is played with the first bet amount in order to execute a specific process, a transition to the special game state will not occur, thereby avoiding an unintentional transition to the special game state and the restriction on the execution of the specific process.

Feature B4: Equipped with a bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) that sets the bet amount for a game based on an operation by a player,
the limiting means is configured to permit the execution of the specific process in a game that is started after a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means, and to restrict the execution of the specific process in a game that is started after a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that in a game started after the second bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the lottery result by the lottery means can be the transition result, while in a game started after the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the lottery result by the lottery means will not be the transition result or is less likely to be the transition result than when the first bet number is set.

With the above configuration, in order to win a transition result that causes a transition to the special game state, the bet amount for the game must be switched from the first bet amount to the second bet amount. In this case, while the execution of a specific process is permitted with the first bet amount, the execution of the specific process is restricted with the second bet amount, so the execution of the specific process is restricted in the game that is intended to cause a transition to the special game state. In other words, if a game is played with the first bet amount in order to execute a specific process, it is unlikely that a transition result that could cause a transition to the special game state will be won, thereby preventing an unintentional transition to the special game state and the restriction on the execution of the specific process.

Feature B5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B4, wherein the number of games executed from the transition to the special game state until the end of the special game state can be less than the specified number.

With the above configuration, even if a transition to a special gaming state occurs, the number of plays will not reach the specific number. For example, if a transition to a special gaming state occurs shortly after a transition to an advantageous state, a situation may arise in which the specific number has not been reached when the special gaming state ends. This makes it possible to more optimally play games that time the transition to a special gaming state, which restricts the execution of specific processing, appropriately.

Feature B6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B4, wherein the number of games executed from the transition to the special game state until the end of the special game state can be greater than the specified number.

With the above configuration, simply transitioning to the special gaming state will cause the number of plays to reach a specific number. Therefore, for example, if a transition to the special gaming state is made shortly after a transition to an advantageous state, the specific number will always be reached when the special gaming state ends. This makes it possible to meet the diverse needs of players, such as when there are circumstances in which the player wishes to restrict the execution of specific processing before transitioning to the special gaming state in the first place.

Feature B7: The special game state is set to a first special game state to which the game result of the game is a first game result (first BB winning), and a second special game state to which the game result of the game is a second game result (second BB winning),
The number of games executed from the transition to the first special game state until the end of the first special game state may be greater than the specified number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that the number of games executed from the time the transition to the second special game state occurs to the time the second special game state ends can be less than the specific number.

With the above configuration, depending on the type of special game state to which the player transitions, it is possible that the specific number will be reached during the special game state, or that the specific number will not be reached during the special game state. This makes it possible to enhance interest by limiting the execution of specific processes and the relationship between the specific number and the type of special game state to which the player transitions.

Feature B8. A gaming machine as described in Feature B7, characterized in that the number of plays grasped by the play count grasping means is set to be more advantageous to the player when the specific number is reached in the second special play state than when the specific number is reached in the first special play state (the machine is set so that a non-winning AT due to a specific trigger occurring during the second BB contributes more to the execution of a special notification than a non-winning AT due to a specific trigger occurring during the first BB).

The above configuration makes it more advantageous to play in the second special gaming state, where the number of plays may be less than the specific number, than in the first special gaming state, where the number of plays may be greater than the specific number. Therefore, it is more advantageous to play in at least the normal gaming state in the advantageous state to reach the specific number. This makes it possible to optimally achieve a game in which the specific number is reached by combining the normal gaming state and the special gaming state.

Feature B9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B8, characterized in that the gaming base, which is the average value obtained by subtracting the gaming value (number of bets) used in a game from the gaming value (number of payouts) awarded as a result of a game, is set to be higher in the special gaming state than in the normal gaming state.

With the above configuration, the execution of specific processes is restricted in the special game state, but the game base is set to be higher, making it possible to reach the specific number without requiring a large amount of game value. Therefore, it is possible to optimally realize a game that utilizes the special game state and is determined to transition to a specific state.

Feature B10. A gaming machine described in any one of Features B1 to B9, characterized in that the probability of a result corresponding to a transition to the specific state in a transition determination made by the transition determination means based on the number of plays in the advantageous state reaching the specific number varies depending on the result of the specific process executed before the number of plays in the advantageous state reaches the specific number.

With the above configuration, the results of the specific processing executed before the specific number is reached will affect the results of the transition determination executed when the specific number is reached. This makes it possible to optimally realize gameplay that allows the specific number to be reached by utilizing the special game state while the specific processing is being executed.

Feature B11. A reserving means (a function of executing a process of setting a first BB winning flag or a second BB winning flag by the main control device 101) is provided that can reserve transition result information indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means is the transition result and the transition pattern combination does not stop at the valid position,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that the restriction means is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process to set the MAX bet counter to 2 in a non-internal state by the main control unit 101) that can restrict the execution of the specific process after the special game state has ended and until the transition result information is reserved in the reservation means.

With the above configuration, even after the special gaming state has ended, the execution of a specific process is restricted until the transition result information is reserved by the reservation means. This also restricts the execution of a transition determination based on the specific number included in the specific process until the reserved state is reached. This helps maintain the reserved state as much as possible, preventing the occurrence of an event where players have to wait for a winning transition result when it is time to transition to the special gaming state. This makes it possible to optimally realize gameplay that makes it easier to receive a transition determination by utilizing the special gaming state.

The inventions described in Features B1 to B11 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features B1 to B11 above address the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known to be types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when medals are bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9 to each of the above Features B1 to B11, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group C>
Feature C1. A game start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on a player's ending operation;
When a predetermined judgment opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs, a grant determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that can execute a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a bonus to a player;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process to cause the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that awards a bonus to the player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus corresponding result corresponding to awarding the bonus to the player;
Equipped with
A high-imparting state (second mode) in which the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low-imparting state (first mode) in which the result is less likely or not likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high-imparting state are set,
A game number grasping means (a function for executing a process for grasping the number of games played in the advantageous zone AG by the main control device 101) for grasping the number of games played from a predetermined start trigger (a game that transitions to the advantageous zone);
When a predetermined first transition trigger is established, a first transition means (a function of executing a process of clearing a first mode flag by the main control device 101) transitions from the low-power-added state to the high-power-added state;
When a predetermined second transition trigger is established, a second transition means (a function of executing a process of setting a first mode flag by the main control device 101) transitions from the high-power-added state to the low-power-added state;
a transition number information storage means (various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 of the main control device 101) capable of storing multiple types of transition number information (mode transition tables) of the first transition number and the second transition number, which are determined so that the first transition trigger occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes a first transition number, and the second transition trigger occurs when the number of games from the predetermined start trigger becomes a second transition number;
A selection means (a function for executing processing for a game in which the main control device 101 transitions advantageously) for selecting one piece of transition number information from the transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means based on the predetermined start trigger;
A state determination means (a function of executing a process of mode determination based on a mode transition table by the main control device 101) that can determine whether a game corresponds to the high award state or the low award state based on the transition number information selected by the selection means and the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means;
Equipped with
As the games to be started by the game starting means, a first game (e.g., a 3-bet game) in which the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger may be realized, and a second game (e.g., a 2-bet game) in which the realization of the first transition trigger and the second transition trigger is restricted are set,
The number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means includes the number of games of the first game and the number of games of the second game.

In accordance with the above configuration, in gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, where a game is started based on a start operation by the player and ended based on an end operation, when a predetermined trigger occurs, a grant determination is made as to whether or not to grant a bonus to the player. The result of this grant determination is set to either a high grant state, which is more likely to result in a bonus, or a low grant state, which is less likely to result in a bonus. Therefore, the bonus award rate differs depending on the grant state in which the grant determination is made, thereby diversifying the game. In this configuration, a transition between the high grant state and the low grant state occurs in the first game but not in the second game, so transitioning to the high grant state in the first game is a shortcut to obtaining a bonus.

In addition, because the transition between the high award state and the low award state is determined by the transition number information and the number of games played in the first and second games, the gaming machine can determine in advance which award state transitions will occur. Even in the second game, in which no award state transitions occur, the gaming machine can determine which award state the current game corresponds to. This allows the gaming machine to notify the player of the information it has determined, or to change the content of the award determination or other processing based on that information, dramatically improving the gameplay by setting up a first game in which a transition in the award state may occur and a second game in which a transition in the award state may not occur. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature C2. A gaming machine as described in Feature C1, characterized in that it is equipped with a special notification means (a function for executing special notification processing by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification corresponding to the determination result of the state determination means using a predetermined notification means.

The above configuration allows for convenient switching between the first game and the second game based on the special notification.

Feature C3. A gaming machine as described in Feature C2, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification even when the second game is being played.

With the above configuration, even when playing the second game, which does not result in a transition of the award state, the special notification allows the player to understand which award state they would be in if they were to switch to the first game. This allows for gameplay that allows the player to determine the timing to switch to the first game based on the special notification.

Feature C4. A gaming machine as described in Feature C2 or Feature C3, wherein the special notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the special notification when the result of the award determination by the award determination means is not the award-compatible result.

With the above configuration, by making it easier for a special notification to be issued when a player does not win a prize determination, it becomes easier to win the prize determination by making it more likely that the next prize determination will be in a high prize state, making it possible to effectively address the player's disappointment caused by not winning the prize determination. In this case, even if a player does not win a prize determination, it is possible to make it easier to win the prize determination simply by issuing a special notification, without changing the configuration for the prize determination win probability or the trigger for transitioning to the prize state. This means that non-wins can be compensated for without making complex processing changes, and compensation can be provided even in gaming machines where there are circumstances that make it impossible to change the win probability or trigger for transition.

Feature C5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C4, wherein the predetermined transition number information stored in the transition number information storage means includes a plurality of first transition numbers or a plurality of second transition numbers.

The above configuration specifies that multiple first transition numbers are set in the specified transition number information, and that there are multiple game plays in which a first transition trigger from a low award state to a high award state occurs, and that there is a transition from the low award state to the high award state, and then a transition to the low award state, and then a further transition to the high award state; or that multiple second transition number information is set in the specified transition number information, and that there are multiple game plays in which a second transition trigger from a high award state to a low award state occurs, and that there is a transition from the high award state to the low award state, and then a transition to the high award state, and then a further transition to the low award state. This clarifies the repeated transition between the low award state and the high award state, and increases the excitement of switching between the two games while predicting the transition between the two award states.

Feature C6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C5, characterized in that when the number of games grasped by the number of games grasper is a predetermined number, each piece of transition number information is stored in the transition number information storage means so that there is transition number information determined by the state determination means to correspond to the high payout state and transition number information determined by the state determination means to correspond to the low payout state.

With the above configuration, the transition number information is set so that the award state is not determined by the number of plays from a specified start trigger, which prevents the excitement of predicting which award state will occur based on the set transition number information and number of plays.

Feature C7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C6, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification means (a function for executing table notification processing by the display control device 81) that can execute a specific notification corresponding to the transition number information selected by the selection means using a predetermined notification means.

With the above configuration, the specific notification allows the player to know which transition number information has been selected, and based on the transition number information thus determined, the player can also determine in advance the timing for switching between the first game and the second game. This makes it easier to play a game in which the first game and the second game are switched in relation to the award state.

Feature C8. The gaming machine described in Feature C7, wherein the specific notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the specific notification when the result of the award determination by the award determination means is not the award-compatible result.

With the above configuration, by making it easier for a specific notification to be issued when a player does not win a prize, it becomes easier to receive a high prize in the next prize determination, making it possible to make the player more likely to win the prize determination and effectively addressing the player's disappointment caused by not winning the prize determination. In this case, even if a player does not win a prize determination, it is possible to make the player more likely to win the prize determination simply by issuing a specific notification, without changing the configuration for the prize determination win probability or the trigger for transitioning to the prize state. This means that a non-win can be compensated for without making complex processing changes, and compensation can be provided even in gaming machines where there are circumstances that make it impossible to change the win probability or trigger for transition.

Feature C9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C8, characterized in that the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game.

The above configuration can create the benefits of switching to the second game. In other words, although the second game does not result in a transition to a payout state, it is advantageous for the player, so it is possible to achieve gameplay in which the player can play the advantageous second game in a situation where a low payout state is predicted, and then switch to the first game when a high payout state is reached.

Feature C10. A gaming machine as described in Feature C9, characterized in that the second game is set to have a higher gaming base, which is the average value obtained by subtracting the gaming value (number of bets) used in the game from the gaming value (number of payouts) awarded as a result of the game, than the first game.

The above configuration is one specific example of Feature C9. In other words, it is a configuration in which the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game and the second game is embodied by the game base. Furthermore, by using such a game base to create a difference in the degree of advantage between the two games, it is possible to expect the excellent effects of Feature C9 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature C11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features C1 to C10, characterized in that execution of award determination by the award determination means is permitted in the first game, while execution of award determination by the award determination means is restricted in the second game.

With the above configuration, when switching to the second game, no transition in the award state occurs and no award determination is made. With this configuration, the second game is perceived more as a throwaway game in order to receive a favorable award determination in the first game, which raises concerns about a decrease in playability in the second game. In this regard, as in feature C1 above, the state determination means allows advance detection of the award state transition and the award state to be determined in the second game, making it possible to more appropriately enhance playability in the second game.

The invention described in Features C1 to C11 above addresses the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The invention was made with the following problem in mind: "Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features C1 to C11 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group D>
Feature D1. A game start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on a player's ending operation;
When a predetermined judgment opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs, a grant determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that can execute a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a bonus to a player;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process to cause the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that awards a bonus to a player based on the result of the award determination by the award determination means being a bonus corresponding result that corresponds to awarding a bonus to the player;
A grant setting means (a function of executing a special notification process by the display control device 81) that can set the likelihood of granting the benefit by using specific information that the result of the benefit determination by the benefit determination means is not the benefit corresponding result;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the award setting means is capable of varying the ease with which the bonus is awarded depending on whether the specific information is used when the game that triggered the judgment was a first game or when the specific information is used when the game that triggered the judgment was a second game different from the first game.

With the above configuration, in gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, where a game is started based on a start operation by the player and ended based on an end operation, when a predetermined trigger occurs, a determination is made as to whether or not to award a bonus to the player. If the result of the award determination is a loss that does not correspond to the awarding of a bonus, the bonus setting means uses specific information corresponding to the loss result to set the likelihood of the bonus being awarded, thereby making it possible to realize a so-called ceiling function using the result of the award determination.

The likelihood of a bonus being awarded when the award determination at the determination trigger is a miss is set differently depending on whether the game that triggered the determination was the first game or the second game. This allows the ceiling function to be realized not only by the award determination result, but also by the game that triggered the determination, making it possible to diversify the games played until the ceiling is reached.

Feature D2. A gaming machine as described in Feature D1, characterized in that the probability of the award corresponding result being obtained in the award determination by the award determination means based on the determination trigger occurring in the first game is the same as the probability of the award corresponding result being obtained in the award determination by the award determination means based on the determination trigger occurring in the second game.

With the above configuration, if the first game and the second game result in a non-winning award, the likelihood of a bonus being awarded is set differently by the award setting means, but the winning probability of the award determination is the same. In other words, the only difference between the games that trigger the determination is the degree of contribution to the so-called ceiling. This makes it possible to implement a ceiling function without using a complex configuration such as varying the winning probability set by the award determination means.

Note that "the probability of ... and the probability of ... are the same" can also be expressed as "the probability of ... and the probability of ... are the same" or "the probability of ... and the probability of ... are approximately the same." In this case, "approximately the same probability" does not have to be exactly the same, as long as the difference in probability is small enough that the player cannot tell the difference.

Feature D3. A gaming machine described in Feature D1 or Feature D2, characterized in that the first game and the second game can be selected by a player's selection operation.

With the above configuration, players can select the game that triggers the transition determination, assuming that the transition determination is not successful. This increases the attention paid to the game through active participation in the game.

Feature D4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D3, wherein the execution of the award determination by the award determination means is restricted in at least one of the first game and the second game, while the determination trigger can occur in either the first game or the second game.

With the above configuration, although the execution of the award determination is restricted in at least one of the first game and the second game, the determination trigger can occur in either the first game or the second game. In other words, after a determination trigger occurs in the first game or the second game, the award determination is performed for either the first game or the second game after that, rather than in the first game or the second game. This allows for innovative gameplay in which the contribution of a miss in the award determination based on the determination trigger to the ceiling varies depending on which game caused the determination trigger.

Feature D5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D4, wherein the execution of the award determination by the award determination means is restricted in the first game and the second game, while the determination trigger can occur in either the first game or the second game.

With the above configuration, although the execution of the award determination is restricted in the first game or the second game, a determination trigger can occur. In other words, in a game where a determination trigger occurs in the first game or the second game, and then the award determination is made after that, rather than in the first game or the second game, it is possible to realize innovative gameplay in which the contribution of a miss in the award determination based on that determination trigger to the ceiling varies depending on which game the determination trigger occurs in.

Feature D6. A first transition means (a function of executing processing for starting and ending the first BB state in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) that transitions to a first special game state in which the first game is played based on the establishment of a predetermined first transition condition, and ends the first special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first ending condition;
a second transition means (a function of executing processing for starting and ending the second BB state in the bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning to a second special game state in which the second game is played and which has a different degree of advantage for the player from the first special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second transition condition, and terminating the second special game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second termination condition;
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

With the above configuration, for determination triggers that occur during so-called bonuses, such as the first special game state and the second special game state, which have different degrees of advantage to the player, the degree of progression to the ceiling in the event of a miss in the award determination based on the determination trigger differs depending on which bonus the determination trigger occurred in. In this way, in addition to the traditional gameplay of enjoying profits in which bonus, the weighting of bonus types is increased, such that the degree of contribution to the ceiling differs depending on which bonus triggered the determination trigger, which can contribute to increased enjoyment of the game.

Feature D7: Equipped with a bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game (a function for executing a process for setting the bet amount by the main control device 101),
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the first game and the second game are games in which the same number of bets is set.

According to the above configuration, although the first game and the second game are played with the same bet amount, the degree of contribution to the ceiling in the event of a miss judgment is different between when a judgment trigger occurs in the first game and when a judgment trigger occurs in the second game. This configuration, in which the player can select which game will trigger the judgment trigger, further increases the importance of the degree of contribution to the ceiling, and enhances the interest of the gameplay of feature D1.

Feature D8. Equipped with a bet amount setting means for setting the bet amount for a game (a function for executing a process for setting the bet amount by the main control device 101),
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that the first game and the second game are games in which different bet amounts are set.

With the above configuration, the first game and the second game have different bet amounts, and the degree of contribution to the ceiling when the judgment result is a miss differs between when a judgment trigger occurs in the first game and when a judgment trigger occurs in the second game. This configuration makes it possible to effectively use the association between the degree of contribution to the ceiling and the bet amount, helping to increase interest.

Feature D9. The second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game (the base is higher in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game, and the payout limit is higher in the first BB than in the second BB),
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the award setting means can be set so that the benefit is more likely to be awarded when the specific information is used when the game that caused the judgment trigger was the first game, than when the specific information is used when the game that caused the judgment trigger was the second game.

With the above configuration, the ceiling function is set so that a bonus is more likely to be awarded if a judgment trigger occurs during an unfavorable game. This makes it possible to realize different gameplay styles, such as making the current bonus judgment during the favorable second game, or during the first game in anticipation of not winning, thereby diversifying the game.

Feature D10. A gaming machine described in Feature D9, characterized in that the second game is set to have a higher gaming base, which is the average value obtained by subtracting the gaming value (number of bets) used in the game from the gaming value (number of payouts) awarded as a result of the game, than the first game.

The above configuration is one specific example of feature D9. In other words, it is a configuration in which the difference in the degree of advantage between the first game and the second game is embodied by the game base. Furthermore, by using such a game base to create a difference in the degree of advantage between the two games, it is possible to expect the excellent effects of feature D9 with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature D11: A special notification means (a function of executing a special notification process by the display control device 81) is provided that can execute a special notification by a predetermined notification means to make the award determination by the award determination means advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D10, characterized in that the award setting means sets the ease of the special notification being executed by the special notification means, thereby setting the ease of the special notification being awarded.

With the above configuration, the award setting means does not change the probability of the award determination made by the award determination means, but rather executes a special notification to make the award determination more favorable, thereby realizing a ceiling function that makes it easier to award a bonus. In this way, even in circumstances where the probability of the award determination cannot be changed, it is possible to implement a ceiling function, which can greatly contribute to improving gameplay.

Feature D12: A high grant state in which the determination result of the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low grant state in which the determination result is less likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high grant state are set,
The gaming machine described in feature D11 is characterized in that the special notification means is capable of executing a notification corresponding to the high award state or the low award state as the special notification.

The above configuration is one specific example of feature D11. In other words, if the state in which the award determination is made is configured to include a high award state and a low award state, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the award determination based on the determination trigger in the high award state. Therefore, by configuring the notification corresponding to such a high award state or low award state to be executed as a special notification, it becomes possible to determine which award state the player is in and then receive the award determination by triggering the determination trigger, thereby increasing the chances of winning the award determination and receiving a bonus.

Feature D13. A specific state (advantageous zone) in which the awarding of the award by the awarding means is permitted, and a normal state (normal zone) in which the awarding of the award by the awarding means is restricted are set as game states,
When the specific state ends and transitions to the normal state, an initialization means (a function of executing initialization processing of advantageous zone information by the main control device 101) is provided to execute initialization processing of various information used in the specific state,
This gaming machine is
The system includes a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the award determination means and the initialization means, and a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the award setting means and the special notification means,
The gaming machine described in feature D11 or feature D12 is characterized in that the second control device is equipped with a memory means (trigger through counter) capable of storing the specific information across the specific state.

With the above configuration, the award determination means performs an award determination, and a specific state in which a bonus may be awarded and a normal state in which the award is restricted are set. When transitioning from a specific state to the normal state, various information used in that specific state is initialized. This prevents information from being carried over to the normal state, and assuming that gameplay begins in the normal state, fairness between players is ensured at the start of the game. However, in this attempt to ensure fairness, there is a higher likelihood that gameplay will end when the specific state ends, raising concerns about a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine. Therefore, while assuming that initialization processing is performed when the specific state ends as described above, the specific information indicating a non-winning award determination used to set the special notification as a ceiling function can be stored across specific states, making it possible to associate each specific state with the special notification. This can motivate players to continue playing across specific states and also make it possible to achieve a ceiling across specific states.

The inventions described in Features D1 to D13 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with respect to slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals as gaming media have been bet, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features D1 to D13 address the following background art: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features D1 to D13 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group E>
Feature E1. A bet amount operation means (credit insertion switch 56) for setting the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount of a game based on the operation of the bet amount operation means;
A game start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that allows a game to be started by setting a bet amount by the bet amount setting means and starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on a player's ending operation;
When a predetermined judgment opportunity (specific opportunity) occurs, a grant determination means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that can execute a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a bonus to a player;
A bonus awarding means (a function of executing a process to cause the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that can award a bonus to a player when the result of the awarding determination by the awarding determination means is an awarding correspondence result that corresponds to awarding the bonus;
Equipped with
A first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means, and an allowable state is set in which the execution of the award determination by the award determination means is allowed, and a restricted state is set in which a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, and the execution of the award determination is restricted,
The bet number setting means
a first bet number setting means for setting the first bet number when the bet number operation means is operated;
a second bet number setting means for setting the second bet number when the bet number operation means is operated;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a switching means (a function of executing a process to switch the MAX bet counter in the bonus state processing by the main control unit 101) that switches between a state in which the bet number is set by the first bet number setting means (a state in which 3 is input into the MAX bet counter) and a state in which the bet number is set by the second bet number setting means (a state in which 2 is input into the MAX bet counter) when the bet number operation means is operated based on a predetermined switching trigger.

In this configuration, a game begins based on the player's bet number and start operation, ends based on the end operation, and when a predetermined trigger occurs, a grant determination is made as to whether or not to grant a bonus to the player. If the result of the grant determination is a bonus corresponding to the bonus, the bonus is awarded. In gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, a permissive state in which the execution of the bonus determination is permitted and a restricted state in which the execution of the bonus determination is restricted are set depending on the number of bets in the game. Therefore, while multiple bet numbers are permitted, the game related to the bonus determination is limited, making it difficult to commit fraudulent acts that exploit differences in the number of bets to illegally obtain bonuses.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, when the bet number operation means is operated, either a first bet number that results in the above-mentioned permitted state or a second bet number that results in the above-mentioned restricted state is set, and when a switching trigger occurs, the bet number that is set switches. By doing this, while under normal circumstances gameplay is based on the first bet number that allows the execution of the award determination, if, for example, a situation arises in which the execution of the award determination should be restricted while the game is proceeding, gameplay can be played on the second bet number. This makes it possible to use the above configuration regarding the restricted state that stipulates the relationship between the bet number and the award determination to improve gameplay. This can ideally increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature E2: A separate bet operation means (credit insertion switch 57, medal insertion slot 45) is provided separately from the bet operation means and performs the operation of setting the bet amount for the game,
A gaming machine described in feature E1, characterized in that when the first bet number is set by the first bet number setting means, the second bet number can be set by operating the separate bet number operation means, and when the second bet number is set by the second bet number setting means, the first bet number can be set by operating the separate bet number operation means.

With the above configuration, even when the bet amount set when the bet amount operation means is operated by the switching means is predetermined, it is possible to set the other bet amount by operating the alternative bet amount operation means. In other words, the player is free to choose which bet amount to set and play with regardless of the situation, and the switching means is used to encourage the player to set the bet amount in line with the game content. In this way, it is possible to apply restrictions on bet amount switching and award determination to gameplay without eliminating the so-called thrill of slot machines, which is to decide the bet amount at will and start and end the game with your own operation.

Feature E3: A transition determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the special game state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition corresponding result that enables transition to the special game state and the termination operation corresponds to the transition corresponding result, and for terminating the special game state when a predetermined termination condition is established;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, characterized in that the switching trigger does not occur upon transition to the special gaming state.

The above configuration clarifies that the bet amount does not change in conjunction with the transition to a special gaming state, which is a so-called bonus state. This allows the bet amount to be changed regardless of whether or not the special gaming state is transitioned, and furthermore, this bet amount change may also result in a transition to a restricted state in which the awarding of bonuses is restricted, making it possible to realize a novel gameplay experience not previously seen.

Feature E4: A transition determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the special game state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition corresponding result that enables transition to the special game state and the termination operation corresponds to the transition corresponding result, and for terminating the special game state when a predetermined termination condition is established;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that the trigger for switching from a state in which the second bet number is set by the second bet number setting means to a state in which the first bet number is set by the first bet number setting means occurs based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being the transition response result.

The above configuration switches from the restricted state to the permissive state when a transition result that allows transition to a special gaming state, also known as a bonus state, is won. In other words, before the transition result is won, a restricted state of the second bet is recommended, and when the transition result is won, a permissive state of the first bet is recommended. In this way, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay experience not previously seen, in which the number of bets automatically switches when the transition result is won, and the execution of a prize determination is permitted.

Feature E5. A gaming machine as described in Feature E4, wherein transition to the special game state is possible in a game in which the second bet number is set, while transition to the special game state is restricted in a game in which the first bet number is set.

With the above configuration, when a game based on a transition result win is switched from a game based on the second bet amount to a game based on the first bet amount, a transition to a special game state due to a transition result win does not occur. In other words, by switching the bet amount, a transition occurs to a game in which the transition result win is carried over as a so-called bonus. By carrying over the transition result win, when a situation arises in which a transition result win should be realized, the advantage is that the transition result win can be realized more quickly compared to a configuration in which a transition result win is waited for from that point. Here, for example, a configuration in which a transition result win is possible with the first bet amount and then the transition result win is carried over with the first bet amount without switching the bet amount is also conceivable. However, with such a configuration, when playing a game that receives a bonus determination with the first bet amount, the player would always be forced to play in a way that avoids the transition result win before the situation arises in which the transition result win should be realized, which could hinder smooth gameplay. In this regard, with the above configuration, no transition result wins will be made after switching to the first bet number, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of a transition result win at the desired timing while ensuring smooth game progress.

Feature E6: A transition determination means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that determines whether or not to transition the gaming state to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the start operation;
a special transition means (a function for executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the special game state when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition corresponding result that enables transition to the special game state and the termination operation corresponds to the transition corresponding result, and for terminating the special game state when a predetermined termination condition is established;
Equipped with
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein in the special game state, the execution of award determination by the award determination means is restricted.

With the above configuration, when a transition to a special gaming state, known as a bonus state, occurs, the execution of the award determination is restricted. In other words, the award determination is performed when the first bet is made and the special gaming state is not in effect. This allows for a gameplay experience that encourages players to look forward to the award determination, unlike conventional gameplay that tends to require players to wait for the special gaming state, without overemphasizing the superiority of the special gaming state, known as a bonus state. Furthermore, with the above configuration, for example, if a situation does not require a award determination to be made, it is possible to restrict the execution of the award determination not only by switching from the first bet to the second bet, but also by causing a transition to the special gaming state. This allows for enhanced gameplay by utilizing the presence or absence of restrictions on the award determination, which can also help increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature E7. The gaming machine described in Feature E6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means for enabling the second bet setting means to set the second bet when the bet operation means is operated based on the end of the special game state.

The above configuration allows the restricted state to be set even after the special gaming state, which is a so-called bonus state, has ended. This allows the special gaming state and the state after the end of that special gaming state to be restricted in terms of the award determination as a whole. Therefore, for example, by using that collective state for effects, it is possible to create gameplay by associating the restricted award determination with the number of bets and the special gaming state, thereby helping to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature E8. The gaming machine described in Feature E7, characterized in that the trigger for switching from a state in which the second bet number is set by the second bet number setting means to a state in which the first bet number is set by the first bet number setting means occurs based on the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means being the transition response result.

With the above configuration, the special gaming state and the subsequent state in which the award determination is restricted are terminated when a transition result that allows transition to the special gaming state is won. In this way, rather than switching to a game in which the transition determination is permitted immediately upon the end of the special gaming state after a transition result is won, the transition result is again won, creating a situation in which a transition to the special gaming state is possible, and then switching to a game in which the award determination is permitted, making it possible to maintain the situation in which a transition to the special gaming state occurs. This makes it possible to transition to the special gaming state more quickly, without waiting for a transition result to be won, if a transition to the special gaming state is to be initiated in order to restrict the award determination. This makes it possible to optimally realize gameplay that avoids award determinations by transitioning to the special gaming state.

Feature E9: A special effect execution means (a function of executing processing for performing a bonus state effect by the display control device 81) is provided, which is capable of executing a special effect corresponding to the special game state by a predetermined effect means,
The gaming machine described in feature E8 is characterized in that the special effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect after the special game state ends, until the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means becomes the transition corresponding result.

With the above configuration, in a gaming machine with feature E8, the continuation of the special effects allows the player to accept without feeling uncomfortable that the restricted state will continue even after the special game state has been entered. This makes it possible to more appropriately anticipate the effects of feature E8.

The invention described in Features E1 to E9 above addresses the following problem: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The invention was made with the objective of resolving this problem: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of Features E1 to E9 above. It is also possible to apply some or all of the technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106g in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that causes the specific event to occur based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
a first specific state (first mode) and a second specific state (second mode) are set in which the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and corresponding information as the specific information that is associated with the special result so that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery becomes the specific result;
A gaming machine characterized in that the state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state is set to occur in either an allowed game (e.g., a 3-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted, or a restricted game (e.g., a 2-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Furthermore, the first and second specific states are provided so that the corresponding information associated with the special result as the lottery result of the game is different so that the result of the specific lottery is a specific result that corresponds to the occurrence of a specific event. Therefore, even when a specific lottery is held using the same special result and the same specific information, an event may occur in which a player wins in the first specific state but not in the second specific state. This allows the gaming machine to determine, based on the specific information acquired in advance, whether it is better to take the specific lottery in the first specific state or the second specific state, even if both result in the same special result.

In addition, the above configuration sets allowable play, which allows the execution of a specific lottery, and restricted allowable play, and the state transition between the first specific state and the second specific state can occur in either allowable play or restricted play. Therefore, by waiting until the specific state where the previously acquired specific information becomes corresponding information and then providing that specific information for the specific lottery, it is possible to win the specific lottery. Conversely, by waiting until the specific state where the previously acquired specific information does not become corresponding information and then providing that specific information for the specific lottery, it is possible to lose the specific lottery. In this way, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability by utilizing the previously acquired specific information and the lottery results of the game.

In addition, by configuring the above as follows: "The specific lottery means is capable of executing the specific lottery using specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means in a specific game and stored in the specific information storage means, and the lottery result by the lottery means in a specific game that is a game subsequent to the specific game," it can be made clearer that a specific lottery may be executed in relation to the acquired specific information and the game result in the subsequent game.

Note that "specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information" can also be expressed as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information" or "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information, which is a predetermined plurality." Such changes in expression can also be applied to other features and other groups of features.

Feature F2. A gaming machine as described in Feature F1, characterized in that it is equipped with a switching operation means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) that can switch between the permitted game and the restricted game based on the player's operation.

The above configuration allows players to select and switch between permitted play and restricted play. This allows for innovative gameplay, in which players decide whether or not to consume previously acquired specific information in relation to a specific state. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F3. A bet amount operation means (credit insertion switch 56) for setting the bet amount for a game;
A bet amount setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S205 and S206 by the main control device 101) for setting the bet amount of a game based on the operation of the bet amount operation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature F2, characterized in that a game in which a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means is included in the allowed game, and a game in which a second bet number different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means is included in the restricted game.

The above configuration is one specific example of Feature F2. In particular, by configuring a slot machine so that it is possible to switch between allowable play and restricted play by setting the number of bets on the game, as described above, it is possible to achieve the effect of Feature F2 by making good use of the existing configuration without adding a new configuration for the switching operation.

Feature F4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F3, characterized in that it is equipped with specific notification means (a function for executing pending display processing by the display control device 81) that can execute specific notifications (hold display) for the specific information stored in the specific information storage means using a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65).

With the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the specific information acquired in advance based on the specific notification, and thus play while predicting whether the specific information will be in a specific state that will become corresponding information when it is provided for the specific lottery. This increases attention to the switch between restricted play and permitted play, i.e., whether or not the specific information will be consumed, and improves the enjoyment of the game.

Feature F5. The gaming machine described in Feature F4 is characterized by including update means (a function of executing processing for hold shift by the display control device 81) that updates the specific notification based on the specific information being acquired by the specific information acquisition means, and that can update the specific notification based on the specific information stored in the specific information storage means being used in the specific lottery by the specific lottery selection means.

With the above configuration, by checking whether the specific notification has been updated, it is possible to determine whether the specific information has been consumed and whether the game is restricted or permitted. This makes it easier to play a game in which the player predicts the specific state in which the specific information will be provided to a specific lottery, while predicting and understanding the corresponding information based on the content of the specific information obtained from the specific notification.

Feature F6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F5, characterized in that it is equipped with special notification means (a function that executes processing by the display control device 81 to produce first mode effects, second mode effects, first mode predictive effects, and second mode predictive effects) that can execute a special notification corresponding to the first specific state or the second specific state using a predetermined notification means.

With the above configuration, it is possible to determine which specific state is in effect based on the special notification. This makes it easier to predict the specific state when pre-acquired specific information is used in a specific lottery.

Feature F7. A gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein the special notification means is equipped with first special notification means (a function for executing processing for the display control device 81 to produce a first mode effect or a second mode effect) capable of executing, as the special notification, an announcement suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed.

With the above configuration, the special notification indicates whether the current game is in the first specific state or the second specific state. In this way, when a specific lottery is held for specific information, it is possible to predict and understand from the specific state whether the specific lottery will be a win. Furthermore, for example, in a configuration where there is a pattern to the transition of specific states, it is possible to predict the subsequent transition of specific states from the type of specific state that is currently in effect, and then predict and understand the content of the specific lottery for specific information that has been acquired in advance based on that prediction. In this way, the playability of using special notifications can be dramatically improved.

Feature F8. A gaming machine as described in Feature F6 or Feature F7, wherein the special notification means is equipped with second special notification means (a function of executing processing for the display control device 81 to perform first mode predictive presentation or second mode predictive presentation) that can execute, as the special notification, a notification that suggests a specific state of a game a predetermined number of times after the game in which the special notification is executed.

With the above configuration, the special notification indicates whether the game following the current game will be in the first specific state or the second specific state. This allows the player to know in advance the specific state when a specific lottery is held based on previously acquired specific information, and also makes it possible to predict and understand the content of that specific lottery. This dramatically improves the enjoyment of using special notifications.

Feature F9: The specific information storage means is configured to be able to store a specific number of the specific information, which is a plurality of numbers;
A gaming machine described in feature F8, characterized in that the predetermined number is smaller than the specific number.

With the above configuration, the special notification by the second special notification means, which serves as a notification suggesting a future specific state, is a notification corresponding to a specific state after a number of plays that is less than the upper limit of specific information acquired and stored in advance. This allows players to understand the specific state in relation to the specific information acquired in advance, and then play in an optimal manner to predict and understand the content of the specific lottery based on the balance between whether or not the specific information is consumed, depending on whether or not it is a limited play.

Feature F10. The special notification means
A first special notification means (a function for executing processing for performing a first mode presentation or a second mode presentation by the display control device 81) capable of executing a notification suggesting a specific state of the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification;
The special notification means includes a second special notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a first mode prediction presentation or a second mode prediction presentation by the display control device 81) that can execute a notification suggesting a specific state of a game a predetermined number of times after the game in which the special notification is executed as the special notification;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features F6 to F9, characterized in that the special notification by the second special notification means is set to have a higher reliability as a notification corresponding to the specific state than the special notification by the first special notification means.

With the above configuration, the current specific state is easier to grasp than a future specific state. This makes it possible to determine the transition to a specific state earlier, making it a preferable configuration for switching between restricted play and permitted play.

Note that "high reliability of being a notification corresponding to the specific state" may also be expressed as, for example, "high probability that it is a notification corresponding to the specific state" or "the content indicated by the special notification is likely to be a notification corresponding to the specific state." Furthermore, the "first special notification means" and the "second special notification means" may be configured to execute a "special notification" through a "predetermined lottery," and "set so that the probability of winning the predetermined lottery by the second special notification means is higher than the probability of winning the predetermined lottery by the first special notification means." In this case, the "first special notification means" may execute a "special notification" through a "predetermined lottery," while the "second special notification means" may execute a "special notification" without executing a "predetermined lottery."

Feature F11. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F6 to F10, wherein the special notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the special notification when the result of the specific lottery drawn by the specific lottery means is a result other than the specific result.

With the above configuration, a special notification is executed to compensate for the fact that the result of the specific lottery is not a specific result and a specific event does not occur. As a result, it becomes easier to play by determining the type of specific state. This makes it possible to effectively address the player's decreased motivation to play when a specific result is not achieved.

Feature F12: A plurality of setting values are set that can cause changes in the rate or manner of increase/decrease of gaming media, and a setting means (a function that executes the process of setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the setting values of the plurality of setting values;
A gaming machine described in any one of features F6 to F10, characterized in that the execution rate of the special notification by the special notification means differs when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means.

With the above configuration, a set difference is set for the execution rate of special notifications. This allows special notifications corresponding to specific status types to be used to change the rate and pattern of increase/decrease in gaming media, contributing to the diversification of games.

Feature F13. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F6 to F12, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification during the limited play.

With the above configuration, a special notification corresponding to the type of specific state is issued during restricted play when the specific information is not consumed. In this way, for example, if restricted play is switched to permitted play and the specific information is provided to a specific lottery, it will be possible to predict, based on the regularity of the transition between specific states, that the previously acquired specific information will be the corresponding information for the specific state when provided to the specific lottery, thereby attracting the player's attention, including whether or not there will be a switch between restricted play and permitted play.

Feature F14. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F6 to F13, wherein the special notification means is capable of executing the special notification during the allowed play.

With the above configuration, when a game is allowed and specific information is consumed, a special notification corresponding to the type of specific state is issued. By doing this, for example, if a game is switched from allowed to restricted play and specific information is no longer consumed, consumption can be delayed until the specific information acquired in advance becomes information corresponding to the specific state when it is provided to a specific lottery, thereby attracting the player's attention, including whether or not there is a switch between restricted play and allowed play.

Feature F15. A gaming machine described in any one of Features F6 to F14, wherein the special notification means is more likely to execute the special notification for the restricted game than for the allowed game.

The above configuration makes it possible to increase the interest of limited play, in which the execution of specific lotteries is restricted by utilizing the execution rate of special notifications. In particular, since the execution of special lotteries is restricted in limited play, players who wish to participate in special lotteries are likely to prefer playing permissible play rather than limited play. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the special notification reminds players of the importance of waiting to consume previously acquired specific information in limited play until it corresponds to a specific state, making it possible to effectively prevent players from losing patience and switching to permissible play before the desired specific state is reached, even though they are playing limited play.

The inventions described in Features F1 to F15 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features F1 to F15 above address the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known to be types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when medals are bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of Features F1 to F15 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106g in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that causes the specific event to occur based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
The lottery result by the lottery means is a special result, and the corresponding information as the specific information that is associated with the special result so that the lottery result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery becomes the specific result varies depending on the number of games (number of advantageous zone games AG) from a predetermined starting trigger that is determined in advance,
A gaming machine characterized in that, as games to be played from the predetermined starting trigger, it is possible to play an allowed game (e.g., a 3-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is allowed, and a restricted game (e.g., a 2-bet game) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

Furthermore, the correspondence information that corresponds the special result as a game lottery result to the specific result that the result of the specific lottery will cause a specific event varies depending on the number of plays from a specified starting trigger. Therefore, even when a specific lottery is held using the same special result and the same specific information, there may or may not be a win depending on the number of plays from the specified starting trigger.

In addition, in the above configuration, an allowable state in which the execution of a specific lottery is permitted and an allowable state in which the execution of a specific lottery is restricted are set as games that can be executed from a specified start trigger. By waiting until the number of games that the pre-acquired specific information becomes corresponding information and then providing that specific information for the specific lottery, it is possible to win the specific lottery. Conversely, by waiting until the number of games that the pre-acquired specific information does not become corresponding information and then providing that specific information for the specific lottery, it is also possible to not win the specific lottery. In this way, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability by utilizing the pre-acquired specific information and the lottery results of the game.

Feature G2. A gaming machine as described in Feature G1, wherein the correspondence information is set to correspond to the special result for each number of plays, so that the probability that the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means will be the specific result is the same regardless of the number of plays from the predetermined start trigger.

In the above configuration, in which the corresponding information is set according to the number of plays from a predetermined start trigger, the corresponding information is set so that the winning probability of the specific lottery itself does not change regardless of the number of plays. If the winning probability of the specific lottery were to change, in a configuration in which limited play and allowed play are provided, an event could occur in which allowed play should be selected for a predetermined number of plays regardless of the corresponding information. In this regard, the above configuration allows players to enjoy switching between limited play and allowed play more purely in relation to the specific information obtained in advance.

Feature G3. A gaming machine as described in Feature G1 or Feature G2, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result drawn by the lottery means will result in the special result is set to be the same regardless of the number of games played since the predetermined start trigger.

In the above configuration, in which the corresponding information is set according to the number of plays from a specified start trigger, the probability of a special result in each game is set to be the same regardless of the number of plays. This prevents events such as the winning rate of a specific lottery changing due to differences in the probability of a special result, allowing players to enjoy switching between restricted play and permitted play purely in relation to the specific information obtained in advance.

Feature G4. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second operation result that may be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided which can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means;
an advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means can be executed, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed,
The predetermined start trigger occurs based on a transition from the normal state to the advantageous state,
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein the specific event is an event that causes the mode notification execution means to perform the mode notification.

With the above configuration, when a winning pattern result is achieved, which can vary depending on the operation of the stop operation means, a predetermined notification means may notify the player of the pattern of the stop operation. By having the player perform operations in accordance with the pattern notification, it is possible to award different benefits to the player. Based on this gameplay, the specific information that will be won in the specific lottery that triggers a specific event, such as a pattern notification, is set to differ depending on the number of plays after the game transitions to an advantageous state in which a pattern notification is possible. This makes it possible to realize innovative gameplay, such as predicting the occurrence of a pattern notification in advance based on the relationship between the specific information acquired in advance and the number of plays. Moreover, because it is possible to play games in which the specific information acquired in advance is consumed and games in which it is not consumed, the occurrence of the predicted pattern notification changes depending on the game played by the player thereafter. This dramatically improves the excitement of gameplay that utilizes pattern notifications.

Feature G5: The system includes an advantageous state notification means (eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator) that transitions to the advantageous state and starts an advantageous state notification based on the establishment of a predetermined notification condition, and ends the advantageous state notification when the advantageous state ends;
A gaming machine described in feature G4, characterized in that it is set up so that when the specified start trigger occurs, the specified notification condition may not be met.

In the above configuration, feature G4, which is premised on gameplay based on status notifications, is configured to issue an advantageous state notification during an advantageous state and to end the advantageous state notification when the advantageous state ends. Therefore, by checking the advantageous state notification, the player can clearly understand whether the advantageous state will continue (or end). This ensures fairness between players who can determine whether the advantageous state will continue from other information and players who cannot, improving the soundness of the game. Furthermore, when a player transitions to an advantageous state, an advantageous state notification may or may not be initiated. More specifically, the start of the advantageous state notification is delayed until a specified notification condition is met. In this way, in gameplay that aims to achieve an advantageous state, the transition to the advantageous state is prevented from becoming too obvious, improving the soundness of the game without compromising playability. By applying this configuration to the present invention, in which the corresponding information that will result in a win in a specific lottery is set to differ depending on the number of plays since the transition to an advantageous state occurs, it becomes difficult to know the number of plays since the transition to an advantageous state occurs, and as a result, it is possible to increase the difficulty of predicting the corresponding information. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game by utilizing the relationship between the specific information obtained in advance and whether or not that specific information is consumed.

Feature G6: A special notification means (a function of executing a special notification process or a hold display process by the display control device 81) is provided that can execute a special notification (a first mode effect, a second mode effect, a first mode prediction effect, a second mode prediction effect, and a hold display) showing the relationship between the number of games played and the corresponding information by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65),
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the probability of the special notification by the special notification means is set to change depending on the number of plays after the specified start trigger occurs.

With the above configuration, the corresponding information associated with a special outcome varies depending on the number of plays, and furthermore, in a game where games can be played with or without consuming specific information, a special notification indicating the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information may be issued. Based on this special notification, the player can decide whether or not to consume specific information, thereby improving the probability of winning the specific lottery. Furthermore, because the probability of the special notification being issued is set to change depending on the number of plays from a predetermined start trigger, the special notification can be used to change the probability of winning the specific lottery. This eliminates the need to change the corresponding information or the probability of a special outcome, and therefore allows the probability of winning the specific lottery to be changed without complicating the configuration, and even in gaming machines where there are circumstances that make it impossible to change the corresponding information or the probability of a special outcome.

Feature G7: A game number information storage means (various table storage area 182a by the display control device 81) that stores a plurality of game number information (mode transition tables) that set the relationship between the game number and the corresponding information;
A selection means (a function of executing a process for setting a mode transition table by the display control device 81) capable of executing a selection process for selecting one piece of game number information from the game number information stored in the game number information storage means;
Equipped with
The specific lottery means is configured to grasp the corresponding information corresponding to the number of games from the number-of-games information selected by the selection means and execute the specific lottery,
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the selection means is configured to execute the selection process based on the number of games played since the selection process was executed reaching a predetermined specific number of games (100 games).

With the above configuration, each time the number of plays reaches a specific number of plays, the number of plays information, which defines the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information, is updated. This prevents the game from becoming monotonous by utilizing the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information. Even if an undesirable number of plays information is selected for a player, there is a possibility that the undesirable number of plays information will be updated to another number of plays information after the specific number of plays has been played. Conversely, even if an undesirable number of plays information is selected for a player, the desirable specific number of plays information can be updated after the specific number of plays has been played, thereby making it possible to appropriately increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature G8. A gaming machine as described in Feature G7, wherein execution of the selection process by the selection means is permitted during the permitted game mode, while execution of the selection process by the selection means is restricted during the restricted game mode.

With the above configuration, not only are specific lotteries restricted during limited play, but updates to the number of plays information that determines the specific information (corresponding information) used in specific lotteries are also restricted. This prevents unnecessary processing, such as updating the number of plays information even when no specific lottery is being held.

Feature G9. A gaming machine described in Feature G8, characterized in that the selection process by the selection means is configured to be executed before the specific lottery is performed by the specific lottery means in one game.

The above configuration makes it difficult to perform actions such as avoiding updates to play count information through restricted play, and then holding a specific lottery using the play count information before the update as an allowed play when the desired number of plays is reached.

Feature G10: A special notification means (a function of executing a special notification process or a hold display process by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification (a first mode prediction effect, a second mode prediction effect, and a hold display) showing the relationship between the number of games and the corresponding information by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65),
A gaming machine described in any one of features G7 to G9, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for limiting the execution of the special notification after the number of plays since the selection process is executed reaches the specific number of plays, at least from the time the specific number of plays is reached until the selection process is executed.

With the above configuration, the corresponding information associated with the special result varies depending on the number of plays, and furthermore, in a game where different games can be played with or without consuming specific information, a special notification indicating the relationship between the number of plays and the corresponding information may be issued. Based on this special notification, the player can decide whether or not to consume specific information, thereby improving their chances of winning the specific lottery. Furthermore, even if the number of plays information is subsequently updated, the special notification is set not to be issued based on the information before the update, which prevents the issued special notification from mismatching the actual content. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in motivation to play due to the special notification's reduced credibility.

The invention described in Features G1 to G10 above addresses the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The invention was made with the following problem in mind: "Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the features G1 to G10: features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9. Alternatively, some or all of the technical ideas can be combined and applied. When combining and applying the technical ideas, they can also be combined across feature groups.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are attached in the circumferential direction,
Display units (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allow some of the patterns on each rotating body to be visible;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that, when operated, stop the rotation of each of the rotating bodies;
a drive control means (a function of executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an active position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
a specific information storage means (lottery information storage area 106g in the main control device 101) capable of storing a predetermined number of pieces of specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (AT mode transition) will occur using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that causes the specific event to occur based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (winning the transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
a limited game (for example, a two-bet game) is set in which execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is limited;
The specific information acquisition means acquires the specific information when the acquisition condition is met and the specific information storage means does not store the specified number of pieces of specific information, but does not acquire the specific information when the specified number of pieces of specific information is stored in the specific information storage means.

In this so-called slot machine, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the orbiting body begins to rotate; when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body stops, and if the resulting number corresponds to the lottery result for this game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. The lottery result by the lottery means and specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means are used to conduct a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, thereby achieving a completely different level of playability from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the orbiting body.

The above configuration is based on the premise that there may be cases where limited play is played in which specific lotteries are limited. When the acquisition condition is met, the specific information acquisition means acquires specific information if the specific information storage means does not store a predetermined number of specific information, which is the upper limit, but does not acquire specific information if the specific information storage means stores a predetermined number of specific information, which is the upper limit. Therefore, even in situations where a specific lottery is not played and specific information is not consumed, a relatively simple configuration can be used to prevent inconveniences such as specific information being acquired in excess of the upper limit or specific information being overwritten.

Feature H2. A gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the specific information acquisition means is capable of acquiring the specific information when the acquisition condition is met during the limited play.

As in the above configuration, by making it possible to acquire specific information even though it is not consumed in the restricted state, it is possible to only acquire specific information in situations where the specified number of specific information items has not been stored. This makes it possible to store specific information with a relatively simple configuration, for example, when specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased.

Feature H3. Equipped with a bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the bet amount for games,
A gaming machine as described in Feature H2, characterized in that in a game that is started after a first bet number (3 bets) is set by the bet number setting means, the specific lottery can be conducted by the specific lottery means, while in a game that is started after a second bet number (2 bets) different from the first bet number is set by the bet number setting means, the game becomes a restricted game in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

With the above configuration, if you want to acquire specific information without consuming it, you simply need to set the bet number to the second bet number instead of the first bet number. This makes it possible to quickly accumulate a predetermined amount of specific information with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature H4: A special transition means (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101) is provided, which transitions the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the special gaming state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined transition result (first BB, second BB) and the transition pattern combination corresponding to the transition result stopping at the active position, and terminates the special gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition;
A gaming machine described in Feature H2 or Feature H3, characterized in that during play in the normal gaming state, the specific lottery can be conducted by the specific lottery means, while during play in the special gaming state, the game becomes a restricted game in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

With the above configuration, if you want to acquire specific information without consuming it, you need to transition the game state to a special game state, which is a so-called bonus state. Generally, when a transition to a special game state occurs, for example, information to that effect is output to the amusement hall's hall computer or data display, or a bonus state effect is displayed, so it is thought that the amusement hall manager or other personnel can easily grasp that a transition to the special game state has occurred. In this way, for example, if undesirable specific information has been stored and a player erases the specific information through some operation and then transitions to the special game state in an attempt to accumulate more specific information, the amusement hall manager can easily identify that this behavior is occurring. This makes it more difficult to fraudulently acquire specific information.

Feature H5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features H2 to H4, wherein the specific information stored in the specific information storage means is erased when a predetermined operation (operation of reset switch 72) is performed.

With the above configuration, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means may be erased when a specified operation is performed. By applying the configuration of Feature H2 to such a gaming machine, it becomes possible to store the specific information after erasure and then use it for normal gaming.

In addition, by defining "predetermined operation" as "operation of an operating means located in a position that becomes operable when a predetermined unlocking operation is performed," it becomes clear that players will not be able to freely erase specific information.

Feature H6. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second operation result that may provide a benefit different from the first operation result is won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell),
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided which can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means;
an advantageous state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means can be executed, and a normal state in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means cannot be executed,
A gaming machine described in any one of features H2 to H5, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing initialization processing of information for advantageous zones by the main control unit 101) that can erase the specific information stored in the specific information storage means based on the end of the advantageous state.

With the above configuration, when a winning pattern result is achieved, where the winning outcome may vary depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, a predetermined notification means may notify the player of the pattern of the stop operation. By having the player perform operations in accordance with the pattern notification, it is possible to award different benefits to the player. Based on this type of gameplay, by configuring the specific information stored in the specific information storage means to be erased when an advantageous state that allows pattern notification ends, the specific information acquired in one advantageous state is not carried over between advantageous states, ensuring the independence of each advantageous state. Applying the configuration of Feature H2 to such a gaming machine makes it possible to reacquire specific information in the normal state, where the execution of a specific lottery may be restricted. This prevents the player from experiencing inconveniences such as not being able to participate in a specific lottery because the specific information has not been accumulated when transitioning back to an advantageous state.

Feature H7. A gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the game in the normal state is included in a restricted game in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted.

The above configuration clarifies that, under normal circumstances, specific information is not consumed, but only acquired.

Feature H8. A lottery time acquisition means (a function of executing a process of shifting an AT counter to an execution area AE in a random number shift process by the main control device 101) is provided that acquires the specific information to be used in the current specific lottery from the specific information stored in the specific information storage means based on the specific lottery being performed by the specific lottery means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the acquisition condition is met after the specific information is acquired by the lottery-time acquisition means.

The above configuration clarifies that in each game, specific information is consumed by being provided for a specific lottery, creating space in the specific information storage means, and then specific information is acquired. This essentially means that the maximum number of specific information items is stored in the specific information storage means at the end of each game, and it also clarifies that if specific information is not consumed in a limited game, no specific information will be acquired.

The inventions described in Features H1 to H8 above address the following problem that the invention seeks to solve: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated with medals bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The inventions described in Features H1 to H8 above address the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player based on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when medals are bet as gaming media and the start lever is operated, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded based on the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features H1 to H8 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature Group I>
Feature I1. A game start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on a player's ending operation;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a bonus to a player based on the start operation;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the ending operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific lottery means (a function of executing AT lottery processing by the main control device 101) that can execute a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event (transition to AT mode) advantageous to a player will occur using the lottery result by the lottery means;
a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that causes the specific event when the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is a specific result that corresponds to causing the specific event;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The specific lottery means is configured to execute the specific lottery using the lottery result by the lottery means, and predetermined first information (mode transition table, AT counter) and second information (number of advantageous zone games AG),
A first information update means for updating the first information during a game (a function for executing a process for transitioning to a lottery mode by the main control device 101 and a process for shifting a random number);
A second information update means (a function of executing a second section display process by the main control device 101) for updating the second information during a game;
Equipped with
a first game (a three-bet game) in which the updating of the first information by the first information updating means is permitted, and a second game (a two-bet game) in which the updating of the first information is restricted, are defined;
A gaming machine characterized in that the update of the second information by the second information update means is permitted in both the first game and the second game.

With the above configuration, a game begins based on a start operation by the player, a lottery for that game is held, the game ends based on an end operation, and a bonus is awarded if the end operation corresponds to the lottery result. In gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, a specific lottery may be held using the lottery result of the game to determine whether a specific event advantageous to the player will occur. If the specific lottery is won, the specific event will occur. This increases the player's interest in the lottery result not only for each game but also for the specific lottery result, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, the specific lottery means for conducting the specific lottery is configured to conduct the specific lottery using not only the lottery results of each game, but also the first information and the second information. While the first information is permitted to be updated in the first game and restricted in the second game, the second information is updated in both the first and second games. Therefore, when the first game is being played, the specific lottery is always conducted using the updated first and second information. However, when the second game is being played, the updated first information is used, but the unupdated second information is used. In this way, for example, if the second information is desirable to the player, the player can play the second game while avoiding updating the second information. Alternatively, if the second information is undesirable to the player, the second information can be updated in the first game. In other words, compared to when both the first information and the second information are updated every time a game is played, by configuring the system to allow or restrict updating of one of the pieces of information, it is dramatically easier to find a combination of the two pieces of information that is desirable to the player. This makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game using a specific lottery.

Feature I2. A gaming machine according to Feature I1, characterized in that the player can select whether to play the first game or the second game.

With the above configuration, players can freely choose between the first game, in which the first information is updated, and the second game, in which the first information is not updated, encouraging active player participation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature I3. A gaming machine as described in Feature I1 or Feature I2, characterized in that it is equipped with special notification means (a function that executes special notification processing or hold display processing by the display control device 81) that can execute a special notification corresponding to the first information using a predetermined notification means.

With this configuration, the player can grasp the first information through the special notification and can determine whether the first game or the second game is appropriate based on the first information. This makes the game more interesting by applying the relationship between the first information and the second information, or the relationship between the first game and the second game, to a specific lottery.

Feature I4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I3, wherein execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is permitted in the first game, while execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted in the second game.

With the above configuration, in order to enter the special lottery, it is necessary to play at least the first game. In this case, if the update of the first information side is restricted and only the second information side is updated in the second game, the combination of the first information and the second information is being adjusted to be preferable to the player. In other words, when the second game is being played, it is highly likely that the combination of the first information and the second information is not yet preferable to the player. Therefore, by configuring the special lottery itself to be restricted in the second game as described above, the execution of unnecessary special lotteries is avoided. For example, in a configuration in which the first information and the second information are provided in a special lottery, resulting in the need for new first information and second information, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of using the pre-optimized first information and second information when a special lottery is being held, even though efforts are being made to optimize the combination, and thus requiring further optimization.

Feature I5. A gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I4, characterized in that the first information update means updates the first information each time a game is played according to a predetermined first rule (each time a game is played, the mode corresponding to the mode transition table is switched, and the AT counter is shifted).

With the above configuration, if the player understands the first rule, it is possible to predict the updated first information before updating the first information. In this way, even in a situation where updating the first information is restricted in the second game, it is possible to predict the updated first information in the first game.

Feature I6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features I1 to I5, wherein the specific lottery means executes the specific lottery using specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and the second information (the winning value of the AT counter corresponding to the first mode and the second mode in the first embodiment, and the lottery mode in the second embodiment) and the lottery result by the lottery means.

With the above configuration, specific lotteries do not simply use the first information and second information, but rather use specific information derived from the relationship between the first information and second information, making the significance of the second information being constantly updated clearer.

The invention described in Features I1 to I6 above addresses the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals as gaming media have been bet, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The invention was made with the following problem in mind: "Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of Features I1 to I6 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1: A game start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on a player's ending operation;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a bonus to a player when the start operation is performed;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the ending operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
An update means (a function that executes a process for obtaining random numbers by the main control device 101 and an update process for the number of games in the advantageous zone) that updates predetermined information (AT random numbers, number of games in the advantageous zone AG) according to the progress of the game;
A specific determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing, AT additional processing, first specialized zone processing, and second specialized zone processing by the main control device 101) that can execute a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (transition to AT mode, additional processing, set stock) that is advantageous to the player, using the lottery result by the lottery means and the predetermined information;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode, a process for adding the number of games, and a process for performing a set stock) for causing the specific event;
Equipped with
a first game (a betting game with a specific prescribed number) in which at least the execution of the specific judgment by the specific judgment means is permitted, and a second game (a betting game other than the specific prescribed number) in which at least the execution of the specific judgment by the specific judgment means is avoided;
a first specific situation (a situation in which the excess flag is not set) in which it is more advantageous for the player to avoid the execution of the specific judgment in the second game at least in a specific state (first specialized zone) than to allow it in the first game, using a predetermined lottery result as the lottery result by the lottery means and specific information as the predetermined information updated by the update means (for example, an AT random number in the second number range, the last digit of the advantageous zone game number AG is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9);
a second specific situation (a situation in which an excess flag is set) in which it is more advantageous for a player to allow the execution of the specific judgment using the predetermined lottery result and the specific information in the first game in the specific state than to avoid it in the second game;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to exist.

In gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, where a game is started based on a start operation by the player and a lottery is held for that game, the game is ended based on an end operation, and a bonus is awarded if the end operation corresponds to the lottery result, a specific determination may be made using the lottery result of the game and predetermined information updated as the game progresses to determine whether a specific event advantageous to the player will occur. If the specific determination is successful, the specific event will occur. This increases the player's interest in the game by drawing attention not only to the lottery results of each game but also to the results of the specific determination. Moreover, because the specific determination of whether a specific event will occur is made using the lottery result by the lottery means and the predetermined information updated by the update means, this is completely different from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery results by the lottery means with the end operation for each game, and realizes innovative gameplay that utilizes the relationship between the predetermined information and the lottery results of each game.

This gaming machine is equipped with a first game in which the execution of a specific judgment is permitted and a second game in which the execution is avoided. Furthermore, even when a specific judgment is made using the same predetermined information and the predetermined lottery result of the same game, there is a first specific situation in which it is advantageous to avoid the specific judgment in the second game, and a second specific situation in which it is advantageous to receive the specific judgment in the first game. This not only allows the player to simply expect the predetermined information to be updated to a level favorable to the player or the lottery result of the game to be favorable to the player, but also realizes gameplay that allows the player to switch between whether or not to execute a specific judgment depending on the situation, making it possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented entertainment. This can increase attention to the game.

Feature J2. A gaming machine according to Feature J1, characterized in that it is equipped with specific notification means (a function for executing processing for the display control device 81 to make the first to third specific notifications) that are updated by the update means and that can issue specific notifications (first to third specific notifications) corresponding to the predetermined information used for the specific determination when the first game is played, before the first game is played.

With the above configuration, the specific information can be known in advance through notification by the specific notification means, allowing the player to choose whether to receive a specific judgment in the first game or avoid a specific judgment in the second game. This makes it possible to optimally realize the playability of feature J1, which utilizes the specific information.

Feature J3. A gaming machine as described in Feature J1 or Feature J2, wherein when the specific determination is made using the predetermined lottery result and the specific information, the probability of the specific result being achieved is lower than when the specific determination is made using the predetermined lottery result and specific information different from the specific information.

With the above configuration, even when a specific judgment is made using the same predetermined lottery result, using specific information makes it less likely that the specific result will result than using other information. A first specific situation is one in which it is advantageous for the player to avoid making a specific judgment that is unlikely to result in that specific result, and a second specific situation is one in which it is advantageous for the player to accept a specific judgment even if it is unlikely to result in that specific result. This configuration allows the player to make situational judgments, assuming that there is an advantage to avoiding specific judgments that are unlikely to result in a specific result as much as possible, but also that in some cases it may be better to accept a specific judgment, thereby increasing the excitement of the gameplay of accepting or avoiding specific judgments.

Feature J4. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J1 to J3, characterized in that it is equipped with special notification means (a function for executing processing to produce an excess notification effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification corresponding to the second specific situation.

The above configuration allows the player to determine whether or not to avoid making a specific determination using specific information in the second game based on whether or not a special notification is made. This makes it easier for the player to choose between the first game and the second game.

Feature J5: A special notification lottery means (a function of executing excess notification lottery processing by the display control device 81) is provided to perform a notification lottery for executing the special notification;
A gaming machine described in feature J4, characterized in that the special notification means executes the special notification when the result of the notification lottery by the special notification lottery means is a corresponding result corresponding to executing the special notification.

With the above configuration, even if the second specific situation exists, a special notification will not be issued unless the result of the notification lottery by the special notification lottery means is a corresponding result. This makes it possible to issue a notification of the second specific situation, such as a special notification, without eliminating the excitement of predicting whether the situation is a first specific situation in which the execution of a specific judgment should be avoided, or a second specific situation in which the execution of a specific judgment should be tolerated.

Feature J6. The second specific situation is a situation in which, even if the specific event is caused by the specific event means, the degree of advantage to the player does not change or is less likely to change compared to a situation in which the specific event is not caused, and the second specific situation continues until a predetermined ending condition is met;
When the second specific situation occurs, an end notification means (a function of executing a process for an ending presentation by the display control device 81) is capable of executing an end notification (ending presentation) corresponding to the completion of the end condition thereafter, before the completion of the end condition;
When the end notification is being made by the end notification means, a means for restricting the execution of the special notification by the special notification means (a function for executing a process not to perform an excess notification effect when an ending effect is being performed by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to feature J4 or feature J5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

With the above configuration, when an end notification is issued, the player will understand that there is no point in causing any further specific events. This could result in special notifications and end notifications overlapping, making the special notifications feel more annoying than they actually are. Therefore, by using the above configuration, the execution of special notifications is restricted when an end notification is being issued, making it possible to clarify the role of each notification.

In addition, by configuring the "special notification lottery means" in the configuration of feature J5 to "conduct the notification lottery in each game," and by configuring the special notification not to be a notification that spans multiple games, it is possible to more clearly distinguish it from the above-mentioned end notification.

Feature J7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features J4 to J6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for limiting the execution of the special notification by the special notification means in the specific state (a function for executing processing to prevent the execution of an excess notification effect by the display control device 81 during the first specialized zone).

With the above configuration, the execution of the special notification corresponding to the second specific situation is restricted in a specific situation where a choice must be made as to whether to allow or avoid the execution of a specific judgment. Therefore, it is necessary to determine whether the second specific situation exists at least before the specific situation is reached. This makes it possible to increase attention not only to gameplay during the specific situation, but also to gameplay prior to that situation.

Feature J8. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a first predetermined result (for example, a normal RIP A to C), the second predetermined result (a specific role as a rare role) different from the first predetermined result is more likely to be the specific result even if the specific judgment uses the same predetermined information.
A gaming machine described in any one of features J4 to J7, characterized in that the special notification means is more likely to execute the special notification in a game resulting in the second predetermined result than in a game resulting in the first predetermined result.

With the above configuration, the second predetermined result is set as the lottery result of a game in which the result of a specific judgment is likely to result in a specific result, and a special notification corresponding to a second specific situation in which it is better to allow rather than avoid making a specific judgment is more likely to be made in a game in which the second predetermined result occurs. With this configuration, benefits from not only a specific event but also a special notification can be set based on the second predetermined result being achieved, making it possible to provide generous benefits for achieving the second predetermined result. This increases anticipation for the second predetermined result and draws attention to the lottery result of the game.

Feature J9. A gaming machine according to Feature J8, wherein the second specific situation is a situation in which, even if the specific event is caused by the specific event means, the degree of advantage to the player does not change compared to a situation in which the specific event is not caused.

In the above configuration, in the second specific situation, even if the second predetermined result is achieved, the player will not be able to receive any further benefits from the specific event. In such a situation, the player may feel disappointed even if the second predetermined result is achieved. In this regard, as described in feature J8, achieving the second predetermined result makes it easier for a special notification to be executed, which can serve as a substitute for the benefits from the specific event.

Feature J10. A plurality of setting values are set that can cause changes in the rate of increase or decrease of the game value or the increase or decrease pattern, and a setting means (a function that executes the setting process of the main control device 101) that sets one of the setting values in the plurality of setting values is provided;
A gaming machine described in any one of features J4 to J9, characterized in that the ease with which the special notification is executed differs when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means.

With the above configuration, it is possible to adjust the rate and manner of increase/decrease of the game value by the execution rate of the special notification, and it is also possible to predict the set value based on the execution rate of the special notification.

Feature J11. The specific event is an event that increases the number of games in an advantageous state (advantageous zone, AT mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state is configured to be able to continue for a number of games that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit number of games,
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J10, characterized in that the second specific situation is a first special situation (a situation in which a first excess flag is set) in which it is known in advance that the maximum number of plays in the advantageous state will be reached.

With the above configuration, in an advantageous state where a maximum number of plays has been set and it is certain that the advantageous state will continue until that maximum number of plays, there is no point in further increasing the number of plays in the advantageous state. Therefore, in such situations, the execution of specific judgments is avoided, preventing unnecessary judgments from being made, thereby achieving smoother game progress.

Feature J12. The specific event is an event that increases the number of games in an advantageous state (advantageous zone, AT mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state is configured to be able to increase the gaming value within a range that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit of the increase number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J11, characterized in that the second specific situation is a second special situation (a situation in which a second exceedance flag is set) in which it is known in advance that the upper limit increase number of the advantageous state will be reached or is likely to be reached.

With the above configuration, in an advantageous state where an upper limit on the number of play value increases is set, and it is known that there is a high probability that the play value will increase up to that upper limit, there is no point in further increasing the number of play times in the advantageous state. Therefore, in such situations, the execution of specific judgments is avoided, and unnecessary judgments are not made, thereby achieving smoother game progress.

Feature J13. The specific event is an event that increases the number of games in an advantageous state (advantageous zone, AT mode) that is advantageous to the player,
The advantageous state can be continued for a number of games that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit of the number of games, and the game value can be increased within a range that does not exceed a predetermined upper limit of the number of increases.
The second specific situation includes a first special situation (a situation in which a first excess flag is set) in which it is known in advance that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous state will be reached, and a second special situation (a situation in which a second excess flag is set) in which it is known in advance that the upper limit number of increased games in the advantageous state will be reached or is likely to be reached,
A special notification means (a function of executing a process for performing an excess notification effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a special notification corresponding to the second specific situation,
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J12, characterized in that the special notification means is configured to make it easier to execute the special notification when the first special situation is present than when the second special situation is present.

With the above configuration, in an advantageous state where a maximum number of plays or a maximum increase in play value has been set, if it is certain that the advantageous state will continue until the maximum number of plays or if it is known that there is a high possibility that the play value will increase to the maximum increase, there is no point in further increasing the number of plays in the advantageous state. Therefore, in such situations, by avoiding the execution of specific judgments and preventing unnecessary judgments, smoother game progress is achieved.

Furthermore, with the above configuration, when the player is prompted to decide whether or not to avoid making a specific judgment using specific information in the second game based on whether or not a special notification is made, the special notification is more likely to be made when it is known that the maximum number of games will be reached than when it is known that the maximum increase in game value will be reached. While the number of games matches the game progress in an advantageous state, the increase in game value may differ between the predicted increase in game value and the actual increase in game value depending on the game content, so even if it is known that the maximum increase in game value will be reached, it may not be reached. Therefore, by setting the execution rate of the special notification as described above, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconsistencies, such as when a special notification is made but the maximum increase in game value is not reached.

Feature J14. A game number update means (a function of executing specialized zone count processing by the main control device 101) that updates the number of games that can be played in the specific state;
A specific end means (a function of executing a process to end the first specialized zone by the main control device 101) that ends the specific state when the number of games updated by the game number update means is a specific number;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J13, characterized in that the number of games played is updated when the execution of the specific judgment is allowed in the first game in the specific state, while not updating the number of games played when the execution of the specific judgment is avoided in the second game in the specific state.

With the above configuration, if a specific determination is avoided when the predetermined information is specific information in a specific state that ends when the number of plays reaches a specific number, updating the number of plays in the specific state will also be avoided. In this way, even if a second game is played in accordance with the updated predetermined information, the number of plays in the specific state will not be eroded by the second game, allowing the player to play the second game with peace of mind.

Feature J15. An operation response result is set as a lottery result by the lottery means, in which a first benefit is awarded when a first ending operation is performed by a player, and in which a second benefit different from the first benefit is awarded when a second ending operation different from the first ending operation is performed, or in which no benefit is awarded;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the operation corresponding result, an operation notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect by the main control device 101 or the display control device 81) capable of executing an operation notification including the first end operation or the second end operation is provided,
A gaming machine described in any one of features J1 to J14, characterized in that the specific judgment means judges that the specific event will be an event that makes it easier for the operation notification means to execute the operation notification or an event that increases the number of games that will make it easier for the operation notification to be executed.

When the operation response result is won, the player's gain will differ depending on whether the ending operation is the first ending operation or the second ending operation, and the player's degree of advantage will vary greatly depending on whether an operation notification is issued for that ending operation. Furthermore, specific determinations of whether or not a specific event will occur that makes it easier for the operation notification to be executed or increases the number of plays that are likely to be executed contribute to the player's degree of advantage and attract a great deal of interest from players. In this configuration, it is advantageous to allow the execution of a specific determination by playing the first game, or to avoid it by playing the second game, making it possible to create new gameplay features that go beyond simply aiming to make it easier for the operation notification to be executed or increase the number of plays that result.

Feature J16: An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the operation notification means is permitted to issue the operation notification, and a normal state (normal section) in which the operation notification means is not permitted to issue the operation notification, are set;
When a predetermined specific termination condition is met in the advantageous state, advantageous termination means (a function of executing a process to terminate the advantageous zone in the zone display second process by the main control device 101) terminates the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state;
An end determination means (a function that executes remaining game number management processing and remaining coin number management processing by the main control device 101) that can determine that the specific end condition is met in the advantageous state before the specific end condition is met;
Equipped with
the first specific situation is a situation in which the termination grasping means has not grasped that the specific termination condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine described in feature J15 is characterized in that the second specific situation is a situation in which the end grasping means grasps that the specific end condition is met.

In the above configuration, in a configuration in which an operation notification is made by the operation notification means in an advantageous state, it is assumed that it is better to make a specific determination that causes a specific event that makes it easier to make an operation notification or increases the number of plays that are executed. However, if it is known in advance that the specific termination conditions for the advantageous state will be met, there is no point in making further specific determinations. In this case, avoiding a specific determination can be beneficial to the player, as the player can use that time for other games.

Feature J17. A gaming machine according to Feature J16, wherein, in the specific state, the manner or frequency of the operation notification by the operation notification means is limited.

With the above configuration, the manner or frequency of operation notifications is limited in specific states. Therefore, specific states in which receiving a specific judgment would be meaningless and in which no further operation notifications would be issued should be ended as soon as possible. This makes the significance of avoiding a specific judgment in the second specific state clearer.

Feature J18. An avoidance information grasping means (a function of executing a process of grasping an avoidance counter by the main control device 101) for grasping avoidance information that the execution of the specific determination has been avoided in the second game;
A specifying means capable of reflecting the avoidance information grasped by the avoidance information grasping means in the specific event when the specific event means causes the specific event (a function of executing a process that adds the value of the avoidance counter to the number of additional games or the number of set stocks when an additional win or a set stock is won in the first specialized zone process or the second specialized zone process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J17, characterized by comprising:

The above configuration makes it possible to realize innovative gameplay features, such as avoiding a specific judgment affecting a subsequent specific event. For example, if avoiding a specific judgment makes the subsequent specific event more advantageous, there is an advantage to avoiding the specific judgment. Conversely, if avoiding a specific judgment makes the subsequent specific event more disadvantageous, the player can decide whether or not to avoid it, taking into account the degree of disadvantage. This makes it possible to effectively increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature J19. The specification means is configured to make the specific event more advantageous when the avoidance information grasped by the avoidance information grasping means is information corresponding to a second number of avoidances that is greater than the first number, rather than when the avoidance information grasped by the avoidance information grasping means is information corresponding to a first number of avoidances,
A gaming machine described in feature J18, characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing a process to initialize an avoidance counter by the main control unit 101) capable of initializing the avoidance information grasped by the avoidance information grasping means when the specific judgment is made by the specific judgment means.

With the above configuration, the more a player avoids a specific judgment, the more advantageous the subsequent specific event becomes. However, since the avoidance information is initialized when a specific judgment is made, if the player does not win the specific judgment, the avoidance information for the avoidances made up to that point will be wasted. This means that the choice of whether or not to accept a specific judgment can be made more carefully, improving the playability of the first and second games.

Feature J20: A game start means (a function of executing the processing of steps S207 to S211 by the main control device 101) that starts a game based on a start operation by a player;
A game ending means (a function of executing the processing of steps S403 to S417 by the main control device 101) that ends the game based on a player's ending operation;
a lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a bonus to a player when the start operation is performed;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that can award a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the ending operation is an operation corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
An update means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process by the main control device 101, an update process for the number of games in the advantageous zone, and a reel control process) for updating predetermined information (AT random number, number of games in the advantageous zone AG, and the symbol number of the symbol reached on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R);
A specific determination means (a function of executing AT lottery processing, AT additional processing, first specialized zone processing, and second specialized zone processing by the main control device 101) that can execute a specific determination as to whether or not to cause a specific event (transition to AT mode, additional processing, set stock) that is advantageous to the player, using the lottery result by the lottery means and the predetermined information;
When the result of the specific determination by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function for executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode, a process for adding the number of games, and a process for performing a set stock) for causing the specific event;
Equipped with
At least a first operation game (a betting game with a specific prescribed number, a specific operation mode when winning normal rips A to C) that causes the specific event to occur or makes the specific event more likely to occur, and a second operation game (a betting game other than the specific prescribed number, an operation other than the specific operation mode when winning normal rips A to C) that prevents the specific event from occurring or makes the specific event less likely to occur than when the first operation game is performed are set,
A first specific situation (a situation in which the excess flag is not set) in which it is more advantageous for a player to execute the first operation game than to execute the second operation game at least in a specific state (first specialized zone);
In the specific state, a second specific situation (a situation in which an excess flag is set) in which it is more advantageous for the player to execute the second operation game than to execute the first operation game;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is set to exist.

In gaming machines such as so-called slot machines, where a game is started based on a start operation by the player and a lottery is held for that game, the game is ended based on an end operation, and a bonus is awarded if the end operation corresponds to the lottery result, a specific determination may be made using the lottery result of the game and predetermined information to determine whether a specific event advantageous to the player will occur. If the specific determination is successful, the specific event will occur. This increases the player's interest in the game by drawing attention not only to the lottery results of each game but also to the results of the specific determination. Moreover, because the specific determination of whether a specific event will occur is made using the lottery results by the lottery means and predetermined information, it is completely different from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery results by the lottery means with the end operation for each game, and realizes innovative gameplay that utilizes the relationship between the predetermined information and the lottery results of each game.

This gaming machine is equipped with a first operation game that causes a specific event to occur or makes it more likely to occur, and a second operation game that prevents a specific event from occurring or makes it less likely to occur. It also has a first specific situation in which performing the first operation game in a specific state is advantageous, and a second specific situation in which performing the second operation game in a specific state is advantageous. This means that the game not only provides gameplay that is advantageous to the player, but also adds gameplay that prevents specific events from occurring, and can be switched by the player's operation, making it possible to provide a gaming machine with unprecedented entertainment. This can increase attention to the game.

Note that, for feature J20, each of the features J1 to J19 may be applied individually or in combination with one another, or some of the features J1 to J19 may be applied individually or some of the features may be applied in combination with one another.

The invention described in Features J1 to J20 above addresses the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals as gaming media have been bet, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The invention was made with the following problem in mind: "Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features K1 to K10, Features L1 to L12, and Features M1 to M9 to each of the above Features J1 to J20, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first specific state (AT mode) that is advantageous to the player;
A second specific state (first specialized zone) that is likely to transition to the first specific state or that is likely to increase the number of games played in the first specific state;
is set,
By performing a first game (advantageous game) in which the number of games in the second specific state increases, the proportion of the first specific state in a predetermined period increases,
a second game (normal game) is performed in which the number of games in the second specific state is smaller than that in the first game, so that the proportion of the first specific state in a predetermined period of time is increased;
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a selection means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) that allows a player to select between the first game and the second game.

The first specific state is advantageous to the player, while the second specific state, which makes it easier to transition to the first specific state or increase the number of plays in the first specific state, functions as a so-called chance zone or specialized zone. In addition to the general structure of a first game that makes it possible to increase the proportion of the first specific state by increasing the number of plays in the second specific state, the above configuration also includes a second game that makes it possible to increase the proportion of the first specific state by reducing the number of plays in the second specific state. Furthermore, the player can choose whether to play the first game to increase the proportion of the first specific state, or the second game to increase the proportion of the first specific state. Therefore, depending on the situation, it is possible to realize gameplay that allows players to fully enjoy the second specific state while enjoying the advantages of the first specific state, or to end the second specific state early and secure the benefits of the first specific state early.

Feature K2. A first specific situation (a situation in which the excess flag is not set) in which playing the first game is more advantageous to the player than playing the second game;
A second specific situation (a situation in which an excess flag is set) in which playing the second game is more advantageous to the player than playing the first game;
A gaming machine according to feature K1, characterized in that it is set to exist.

With the above configuration, whether the second specific state should be continued for a long time is completely different depending on which specific state exists. Therefore, by encouraging the player to proactively determine such specific states, it is possible to dramatically improve the playability of the second specific state.

Feature K3. A gaming machine as described in Feature K2, characterized in that, in the second specific situation, even if the first game is performed, the proportion of the first specific state in the predetermined period cannot be increased.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature K2. With this configuration, in the second specific situation, there is no point in playing the first game, and the benefits of playing the second game can be highlighted.

Feature K4. An advantageous state (advantageous zone) including the first specific state and the second specific state is set,
When a specific termination condition is met, that is, the number of games in the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of games or the number of increases in the game value in the advantageous state reaches the upper limit increase number, an advantageous termination means (a function of executing a process to forcibly terminate the advantageous period by the main control device 101) that terminates the advantageous state;
An end determining means (a function that executes a remaining number of games management process and a remaining number of coins management process by the main control device 101) that can determine that the specific end condition is met before the specific end condition is met;
Equipped with
the first specific situation is a situation in which the termination determining means has not determined that the specific termination condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3, characterized in that the second specific situation is a situation in which the end grasping means grasps that the specific end condition has been met.

In the above configuration, in a first specific situation where it is not known in advance that the upper limit of the number of plays or the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous state will be reached, it is advantageous for the player to increase the number of plays in the first specific state by transitioning to the first specific state until the upper limit of the number of plays or the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous state is reached, or to increase the number of plays in the first specific state that has been transitioned to. In contrast, in a second specific situation where it is known in advance that the upper limit of the number of plays or the upper limit of the increase in the advantageous state will be reached, it is advantageous for the player to complete the first specific state rather than the second specific state. Therefore, while it is assumed that increasing the number of plays in the first specific state normally directly leads to a player's benefit, in the second specific situation, it is possible to realize gameplay in which the proportion of the first specific state is increased by reducing the number of plays in the second specific state, allowing the player to enjoy the benefits of the first specific state to the extent that the number of plays in the second specific state is reduced.

Feature K5. A gaming machine according to Feature K4, wherein the predetermined period is the period until the advantageous state ends.

In the first specific situation, where it is not yet known that a specific end condition will be met, it is not yet certain that advantageous states, including the first specific state and the second specific state, will reach the maximum number of plays or the maximum increase in number of plays, and there is still room until the maximum number of plays or the maximum increase in number of plays is reached. Therefore, if the second specific state is completed in the first play, the proportion of the first specific state up to the maximum number of plays or the maximum increase in number of plays will increase by the amount of the increase in the number of plays in the first specific state, for example. In contrast, in the second specific situation, where it is known that a specific end condition will be met, it is certain that advantageous states, including the first specific state and the second specific state, will reach the maximum number of plays or the maximum increase in number of plays, and there is still room until the maximum number of plays or the maximum increase in number of plays is reached. Therefore, if the second specific state is completed in the second play, the proportion of the first specific state up to the maximum number of plays or the maximum increase in number of plays will increase by the amount of the decrease in the number of plays in the second specific state.

Feature K6. A gaming machine described in any one of Features K1 to K5, in which the first specific state is transitioned to via the second specific state, and when a predetermined termination condition in the first specific state is met, the game machine transitions to the second specific state.

With the above configuration, the game transitions from the second specific state to the first specific state, and then transitions to the second specific state when the first specific state ends, so the first specific state and the second specific state are repeatedly executed alternately. In other words, the completion of the second specific state is essential to the completion of the first specific state. This configuration makes it possible to easily change the proportion of the first specific state by adjusting the number of plays in the second specific state.

Feature K7. The second specific state ends when at least a specific number of games are played;
By playing the first game, the number of games in the second specific state becomes greater than the specific number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that by playing the second game, the number of games in the second specific state becomes the specific number or is less than when the first game is played and is equal to or greater than the specific number.

As described above, by configuring the game so that at least a specific number of plays are required to complete the second specific state, it becomes clearer that the game is not configured to increase the proportion of the first specific state without playing the second specific state at all.

Feature K8. A game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value providing means (payout device 53) for providing a game value according to the game content;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K7, characterized in that in the second specific state, the expected increase/decrease (net increase in number of coins), which is the average value per game obtained by subtracting the game value set by the game value setting means from the game value awarded by the game value awarding means, is set to be negative.

According to the above configuration, the more plays in the second specific state, the more game value is required; and the fewer plays in the second specific state, the less game value is lost. With this configuration, a first game that increases the number of plays in the second specific state not only has the advantage of increasing the proportion of the first specific state, but also has the disadvantage of requiring more game value. Conversely, a second game that decreases the number of plays in the second specific state not only has the advantage of increasing the proportion of the first specific state, but also has the advantage of allowing the second specific state to be consumed with a relatively small amount of game value. Therefore, the required amount of game value also becomes a parameter for selecting whether to play the first game or the second game, making it more interesting to choose which game to play.

Feature K9. A specific determination means (a function of executing an additional lottery or a set stock lottery by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific determination of transitioning to the first specific state or increasing the number of games in the first specific state is provided,
the second specific state is a state in which the specific determination is made by the specific determination means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K8, characterized in that the number of times the specific judgment is executed in the second specific state is set to be the same regardless of whether the first game or the second game is played.

With the above configuration, there is no difference in the number of times a specific judgment is made whether the first game or the second game is played; only the number of times the second specific state is played changes. This eliminates the need to make complex changes to the configuration of the second specific state itself depending on which game is being played, and makes it possible to set the playability of each game in the second specific state with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature K10. A gaming machine as described in Feature K9, wherein playing the first game tends to increase the probability that the result of the specific judgment will result in a transition to the first specific state or an increase in the number of plays in the first specific state, compared to playing the second game.

With the above configuration, even if the number of times a specific judgment is made is the same, the probability of winning the specific judgment increases when playing the first game, which increases the number of times the second specific state is played. This configuration makes it possible to create benefits from playing the first game, even in a configuration where the number of times a specific judgment is made is the same regardless of which game is played.

The invention described in Features K1 to K10 above addresses the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The invention was made with the following problem in mind: "Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features K1 to K10: features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features L1 to L12, and features M1 to M9. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. Update means (a function that executes the random number acquisition process and the advantageous zone game number update process by the main control device 101) that updates predetermined information (AT random number, advantageous zone game number AG) according to the progress of the game;
An acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined information updated by the update means (a function for executing a process for acquiring random numbers by the main control device 101 and a process for grasping the number of games in the advantageous zone AG);
A specific determination means (a function of executing a bonus lottery or a set stock lottery by the main control device 101) that executes a specific determination as to whether or not a specific event that is advantageous to the player will occur, using at least the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
When the lottery result by the specific determination means is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event, a specific event means (a function that executes a process of adding the number of additional games to the AT game counter by the main control device 101 and a process of adding the number of set stocks to the set counter) that causes the specific event;
a selection means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) by which a player can select whether to allow or avoid the execution of the specific judgment;
Equipped with
the update unit is configured to update the predetermined information even when the selection unit selects to avoid execution of the specific determination,
As the predetermined information, specific information that is more likely to result in the specific determination than other predetermined information is set,
A gaming machine characterized in that the acquisition rate at which the acquisition means acquires the specific information is set so that the loss to the player (the amount of medal loss that occurs when playing advantageously) caused by avoiding the execution of the specific judgment using the other specified information until the specific information is acquired by the acquisition means is smaller than the benefit the player receives when the specific judgment using the specific information results in the specific result (the increase in the number of medals when the AT mode for the number of added games is completed).

With the above configuration, a player can choose whether to accept or avoid a specific judgment that uses predetermined information updated by the update means as the game progresses. Even if the execution of a specific judgment is avoided, the predetermined information is still updated. This allows for a game in which a specific judgment is avoided until the predetermined information desired by the player is updated to specific information that is more likely to result in a specific result win, and then the player accepts the specific judgment when the specific information is updated. In this case, the profit that the player can receive if the rate of obtaining specific information is a specific result win using the specific information is greater than the loss to the player from avoiding a specific judgment using predetermined information other than the specific information until the specific information is obtained, so there is an advantage to avoiding a specific judgment using the other predetermined information. This makes it possible to play the above game in an optimal manner.

In addition, if a "game value setting means for setting a game value for playing a game" and a "benefit granting means for granting a benefit according to the content of the game" are provided, the "profit received by the player" and the "profit loss of the player" can be expressed, for example, as the "difference between the game value set by the game value setting means and the benefit granted by the benefit granting means."

Feature L2. A gaming machine as described in Feature L1, wherein the acquisition rate at which the specific information is acquired by the acquisition means is set so that the player's profit is greater when the execution of the specific judgment is avoided in accordance with the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means than when the execution of the specific judgment is allowed regardless of the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means.

The above configuration makes the benefits of avoiding specific judgments in response to predetermined information more clear. This makes it easier for players to enjoy games that involve avoiding specific judgments.

Feature L3: A first specific state (first specialized zone) in which the result of the specific determination is likely to be the specific result, and a second specific state (AT mode) in which the result of the specific determination is less likely to be the specific result than the first specific state are set,
A gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2, characterized in that the acquisition rate at which the acquisition means acquires the specific information in the first specific state is set so that the loss to the player caused by avoiding the execution of the specific judgment using the other specified information until the specific information is acquired by the acquisition means is smaller than the benefit to the player caused by the specific judgment using the specific information resulting in the specific result, while the acquisition rate at which the acquisition means acquires the specific information in the second specific state is set so that the loss to the player caused by avoiding the execution of the specific judgment using the other specified information until the specific information is acquired by the acquisition means is larger than the benefit to the player caused by the specific judgment using the specific information resulting in the specific result.

With the above configuration, a game that avoids a specific judgment until specific information is acquired is possible in the first specific state, but is less likely to be possible in the second specific state. In other words, if a game that avoids the specific judgment is played in the band 2 specific state, the player will incur a greater loss. This allows the game to proceed more smoothly, ensures the rarity of games that avoid specific judgments, and effectively increases the attention paid to the game.

Feature L4: A game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value providing means (payout device 53) for providing a game value according to the game content;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in feature L3, characterized in that when a game is played in the first specific state to avoid the execution of the specific judgment, the expected increase/decrease (net increase in number of coins), which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value awarded by the game value awarding means and the game value set by the game value setting means, is set to be negative.

According to the above configuration, if a player plays a game that avoids the execution of a specific judgment, the game value will become negative in the first specific state. By doing this, while it is easier to win a specific judgment in the first specific state, playing a game that avoids that specific judgment will result in a negative game value, so there may be a limit to how much the game value can become negative even when playing an avoidance game. In this way, even when a player invests game value to avoid a specific judgment, they can play while considering whether they can obtain game value that is commensurate with that investment, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Feature L5. A gaming machine as described in Feature L4, characterized in that when a game that allows the execution of the specific judgment is performed in the first specific state, the expected increase/decrease (net increase in number of coins) is set to be negative.

According to the above configuration, in the first specific state, whether the execution of a specific judgment is avoided or allowed, the game value is set to be negative. This means that the game value is negative not only for play up until the specific information is acquired, but also for play when the specific information is acquired, and a large amount of game value is required to repeatedly play in the first specific state. This makes it possible to make a stricter decision on whether to allow the execution of a specific judgment in relation to the game value invested, and to increase the enjoyment of the game through this decision.

Feature L6. A gaming machine as described in Feature L4 or Feature L5, wherein the expected increase/decrease when a game that allows the execution of the specific judgment is performed in the first specific state is set to be greater than the expected increase/decrease when a game that avoids the execution of the specific judgment is performed in the first specific state.

With the above configuration, when playing a game that avoids a specific judgment in the first specific state, the loss in game value is less severe than when playing a game that allows the execution of a specific judgment. This configuration makes the cost of avoiding a specific judgment in the first specific state relatively small, making it possible to more effectively play the avoidance game.

Feature L7. A game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value providing means (payout device 53) for providing a game value according to the game content;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features L3 to L6, characterized in that when a game is played in the second specific state that allows the execution of the specific judgment, the expected increase/decrease, which is the average value per game of the difference obtained by subtracting the game value set by the game value setting means from the game value awarded by the game value awarding means, is set to be positive.

According to the above configuration, in the second specific state, the game value will be positive if a game that allows the execution of a specific judgment is played, and there will be an advantage to continuing the game that allows the execution of the specific judgment. With this configuration, in the second specific state, the advantage of avoiding the specific judgment becomes relatively small, which can serve as an incentive to not play a game that allows the avoidance.

Feature L8. A game number counting means (a function of executing a process of counting the first special zone counter by the main control device 101) that counts the number of games that can be executed in the first specific state;
A specific termination means (a function of executing a process to terminate the first specialized zone by the main control device 101) for terminating the first specific state when the number of games counted by the game count means reaches a specific number;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features L3 to L7, characterized in that the number of plays means counts the number of plays in the first specific state when the selection means selects to allow the execution of the specific judgment, but does not count the number of plays in the first specific state when the selection means selects to restrict the execution of the specific judgment.

With the above configuration, the number of times specific determinations are made in the first specific state is limited, further enhancing the significance of avoiding specific determinations.

Feature L9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L8, characterized in that the specific determination using the other predetermined information may result in the specific result.

With the above configuration, the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means is not specific information but other predetermined information, and it is set up so that a specific judgment can be won even if the selection means is not used to avoid making the specific judgment. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player expect a specific judgment to some extent, even if they do not necessarily avoid it until the specific information is acquired, and it is possible to maintain a balance in the game, such as avoiding specific judgments.

Feature L10. In a situation where a predetermined specific condition is not established (the excess flag is not set), if the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means is not the specific information, the player will receive a greater benefit if the selection means selects to avoid the execution of the specific judgment rather than to select to allow the execution of the specific judgment;
A gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L9, characterized in that when the specific condition is met (the excess flag is set), regardless of whether the specified information acquired by the acquisition means is the specific information, the player will receive a greater benefit if the selection means makes a choice to allow the execution of the specific judgment rather than a choice to avoid the execution of the specific judgment.

The above configuration assumes that avoiding the execution of a specific judgment until specific information is acquired is beneficial in terms of efficiently causing a specific event that is advantageous to the player. However, if a specific condition is met, the player will receive a greater benefit if the execution of a specific judgment is allowed, regardless of whether the acquired predetermined information is specific information or not. In this way, the success or failure of a specific condition is added as a parameter to the gameplay, where the choice of whether to avoid the execution of a specific judgment is made solely based on whether or not specific information is acquired, greatly increasing the interest of the game of choosing whether or not to avoid the execution of a specific judgment.

Feature L11: A grasping means (a function of executing a remaining number of games management process or a remaining number of coins management process by the main control device 101) is provided that can grasp, before the upper limit is reached, that the profit received by the player will reach a predetermined upper limit as a result of the specific judgment using the specific information becoming the specific result,
A gaming machine according to feature L10, characterized in that the specific condition is met when the grasping means grasps that the upper limit will be reached.

If a specific determination using specific information results in a specific event, and it is known in advance that the player's resulting benefit has already reached its upper limit, there is no further benefit to avoiding the execution of the specific determination until specific information is acquired. Therefore, in situations such as those described above, it is better to allow the execution of the specific determination rather than avoid it. By doing so, it is possible to add depth to the game's choice of whether or not to avoid it, using a relatively simple configuration, such as whether or not the benefit from the specific event has reached its upper limit.

Feature L12. A gaming machine described in any one of Features L1 to L11, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification means (a function for executing each specific notification by the display control device 81) that is capable of executing a specific notification regarding the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means before the specific determination is made or the selection to avoid it is made.

With this configuration, the player can choose whether or not to avoid making a specific judgment after understanding the specified information through the specific notification. This makes it possible to optimally realize gameplay that allows players to avoid making the specific judgment.

The invention described in Features L1 to L12 above addresses the following background technology: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals are bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A). The invention was made with the following problem in mind: "Here, the gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the configurations of Features A1 to A19, Features B1 to B11, Features C1 to C11, Features D1 to D13, Features E1 to E9, Features F1 to F15, Features G1 to G10, Features H1 to H8, Features I1 to I6, Features J1 to J20, Features K1 to K10, and Features M1 to M9, respectively, to each of the configurations of Features L1 to L12 above, or some or all of the technical ideas can be applied in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. Update means for updating predetermined information (a function for executing random number acquisition processing and random number shift processing by the main control device 101, and addition processing of the number of games in the advantageous zone AG);
A specific determination means (a function of the main control device 101 to draw lots for extra games and set stocks) that uses at least the predetermined information to make a specific determination as to whether a specific event (an extra game or set stock) that is advantageous to the player will occur;
a specific notification means (a function of executing a process for making each specific notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification regarding the predetermined information used for the specific determination;
a selection means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for selecting a first game that allows the execution of the specific judgment and a second game that avoids the execution of the specific judgment;
Equipped with
The specific determination by the specific determination means is configured such that when first specific information (AT random number of the first numerical range, last digit of the advantageous zone game number AG is 1, 3, 5, 7) of the specified information is used, it is more likely to result in a specific result corresponding to causing the specific event than when second specific information (AT random number of the second numerical range or third numerical range, last digit of the advantageous zone game number AG is 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9) of the specified information is used,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification means is capable of executing, as the specific notification, a first specific notification corresponding to the first specific information, and a second specific notification corresponding to the second specific information, and further comprises a specific notification means (a function of executing processing to make the first specific notification when an excess flag is set by the display control device 81 and the AT random number is in the second or third number band) that is capable of executing the first specific notification when a predetermined specific condition is met and the specified information used for the specific judgment is the second specific information.

The above configuration, which uses predetermined information to make a specific judgment to cause a specific event advantageous to the player, may result in a specific notification corresponding to the predetermined information. Furthermore, the player can select between a first game that allows the execution of a specific judgment and a second game that restricts the execution of a specific judgment. This allows the player to make a unique choice based on the specific notification: avoiding the execution of a specific judgment when second specific information that makes it less likely to result in a specific judgment is used, and receiving the specific judgment only when first specific information that makes it more likely to result in a specific judgment is used. Furthermore, when second specific information is used based on the establishment of a specific condition, a first specific notification corresponding to the first specific information may be issued. Therefore, when making the above selection, discerning whether or not this specific condition is met is key to increasing the chances of receiving a specific judgment. This makes it possible to create an exciting game in which the player can predict from the specific notification whether or not they will receive a specific judgment while discerning whether or not the specific condition is met.

Feature M2. A gaming machine according to Feature M1, characterized in that the situation in which the specific condition is met is one in which allowing the specific determination using the second specific information to be made in the first game is more advantageous to the player than avoiding the specific determination using the second specific information in the second game.

With the above configuration, even if the specific judgment results in second specific information that is unlikely to result in a specific result, the specific condition is met in a situation where it is advantageous for the player to execute the specific judgment as is, and the first specific notification is made even with the second specific information. By doing this, even if the specific judgment results in a non-winning result, the player will ultimately be at an advantage, making it less likely that the player will feel dissatisfied.

Feature M3. A gaming machine as described in Feature M1 or Feature M2, characterized in that the number of times the specific judgment is executed is set to be the same regardless of whether the first game or the second game is being played, at least in the specific state (first specialized zone) in which the specific notification is issued.

With the above configuration, it is possible to avoid making a specific judgment in the second game without reducing the number of times the specific judgment is made. This allows the player to safely select between the first game and the second game.

Feature M4. A gaming machine according to Feature M3, wherein the specific condition is met in a situation where the occurrence of the specific event would not be advantageous to the player, or in a situation where the player is less likely to be advantageous than if the specific condition were not met (a situation where the excess flag is set).

With the above configuration, if the occurrence of a specific event does not or is unlikely to be advantageous to the player, the player is unlikely to suffer a disadvantage even if the first specific information, which makes it unlikely that the specific judgment will be won, is used for the specific judgment. Therefore, in such cases, by issuing the first specific notification even when the second specific information is used, it is possible to prevent the specific judgment from being unnecessarily avoided and to allow the game to be played smoothly.

Feature M5. A game value setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57) for setting a game value for playing a game;
a game value providing means (payout device 53) for providing a game value according to the game content;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features M1 to M4, characterized in that at least in a specific state (first specialized zone) in which the specific notification is made, the expected increase/decrease, which is the average value per game obtained by subtracting the game value set by the game value setting means from the game value awarded by the game value awarding means, is set to be negative.

With the above configuration, the game value held by the player decreases as the specific state is exhausted, and in a configuration in which the number of specific judgments is set to be the same regardless of whether or not a specific judgment is avoided, avoiding a specific judgment can also cause a greater loss of game value. This configuration encourages players to more seriously consider whether or not to avoid a specific judgment, making it possible to increase the excitement of a game in which players have to choose whether or not to avoid it.

Feature M6. A gaming machine as described in Feature M5, wherein the expected increase or decrease when the first game is played in the specific state is set to be less than the expected increase or decrease when the second game is played in the specific state.

With the above configuration, although avoiding a specific judgment results in a loss of gaming value, it is possible to keep this loss smaller than the loss of gaming value that would result from receiving a specific judgment. Therefore, it is possible to set the risk of avoiding a specific judgment without eliminating the fun of the game, which is predicting the type of predetermined information that will be provided for the specific judgment in relation to the specific notification.

Feature M7. A gaming machine described in any one of Features M1 to M6, characterized in that it is equipped with second identification means (a function of executing a pseudo-notification lottery process by the display control device 81) that can execute the first specific notification when the predetermined information used for the specific determination is the second specific information when the specific condition is not met.

With the above configuration, the first specific notification can be issued even if the second specific information is present, regardless of whether the specific condition is met, making it difficult to tell whether the specific condition has been met. This increases the excitement of figuring out whether the specific condition has been met.

In addition, in the above feature M7, the "identification means" in feature M1 can be read as "first identification means."

Feature M8. The specification means is configured to execute the first specification notification when the specified information used for the specification determination is the second specification information and a specified first lottery is won in a situation where the specification condition is met,
The second specifying means is configured to execute the first specific notification when the predetermined information used for the specific determination is the second specific information and a predetermined second lottery is won in a situation where the specific condition is not established,
A gaming machine according to feature M7, characterized in that the probability of winning the first lottery is set to be higher than the probability of winning the second lottery.

With the above configuration, the probability that the first specific notification will be issued even when the second specific information is received is higher when the specific condition is met than when the specific condition is not met. In other words, when the specific condition is not met, the probability that the first specific notification will be issued when the second specific information is received is relatively low, ensuring the reliability of the first specific notification. In other words, by assuming that the reliability of the first specific notification is high, it is possible to expect the effect of encouraging the player to play the first game when the first specific notification is issued when the specific condition is met.

Feature M9. A gaming machine described in any one of Features M1 to M8, wherein the specific notification means executes the specific notification at least before the first game and the second game become selectable.

With the above configuration, players can effectively use specific notifications to decide which game to play.

The invention described in Features M1 to M9 above addresses the following problem: "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held when predetermined lottery conditions are met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with slot machines, when a start lever is operated while medals as gaming media have been bet, an internal lottery is held and the reels begin to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop. If the result of the reels stopping corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus is awarded according to the result (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The invention was made with the objective of resolving this problem: "The gaming machines exemplified above need to be designed to enhance the gaming experience, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

Note that the technical ideas shown in any one of the following configurations can be applied individually to each of the above features M1 to M9: features A1 to A19, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C11, features D1 to D13, features E1 to E9, features F1 to F15, features G1 to G10, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J20, features K1 to K10, and features L1 to L12. It is also possible to apply some or all of these technical ideas in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

In addition, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A to Feature Group I described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A to I individually, or to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the respective technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

Below is the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a gaming ball launching means that launches gaming balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched gaming balls to a specified gaming area, and various gaming components arranged within the gaming area, and that awards a bonus to the player when the gaming ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the gaming components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the series of symbols as it stops. The symbol fluctuations are initiated by operating a start operating means, and the symbol fluctuations are stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed. A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the fluctuations is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a fluctuating pattern sequence consisting of multiple symbols and then displays the symbol sequence as a final stop; the pattern change begins when a start operating means is operated, and the pattern change is stopped when a stop operating means is operated or after a predetermined time has passed; a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol; further equipped with a ball receiving device that performs a loading process to take gaming balls from the ball receiving device, and a payout device that pays out gaming balls to the ball receiving device; and configured so that operation of the start operating means is valid when gaming balls are inserted by the loading device.

10... slot machine as gaming machine, 32... reels as rotating body, 41... start lever as start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as interval indicator, 81... display control device as sub-control board, 101... main control device as main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (2)

A plurality of rotating bodies on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be visible;
a start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a storage means for storing the specific information when a predetermined acquisition condition is met;
means for executing a specific process that enables a specific event to occur by using at least the specific information stored in the storage means and the lottery result by the lottery means;
means for causing the specific event to occur when a result of the specific processing is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
a first state set so that the specific event is more likely to occur, and a second state set so that the specific event is less likely to occur than in the first state or so that the specific event does not occur at all;
The process for causing a state transition between the first state and the second state is set to be able to be executed in both a first game in which execution of the specific process is permitted and a second game in which execution of the specific process is restricted,
After a state transition from the second state to the first state occurs, a transition from the first state to the second state is possible;
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined process for causing a state transition between the first state and the second state can be executed when the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result, and can also be executed when the lottery result is a second result different from the first result. a game start means for starting a game based on a start operation by a player;
a game ending means for ending a game based on a player's ending operation;
A grasping means capable of grasping specific information corresponding to the number of games played from a predetermined start trigger;
a means for making it possible to execute a specific determination that enables a specific event to occur when the specific information becomes predetermined special information;
means for enabling the specific event to occur when the result of the specific determination is a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
a first state in which the result of the determination of the specificity is likely to be the specific result, and a second state in which the result of the determination of the specificity is less likely to be the specific result than the first state or the result of the determination of the specificity is not likely to be the specific result;
a means for causing a state transition between the first state and the second state;
As a game to be started by the game starting means, a first game in which a state transition between the first state and the second state may occur, and a second game in which a state transition between the first state and the second state is restricted are set,
The grasping means is capable of grasping the specific information including the first game and the second game,
After a state transition from the second state to the first state occurs, a transition from the first state to the second state is possible;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for executing a notification corresponding to the specific information during a game before the specific information becomes the special information.